DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx

Service manual

R5905014/14
25/02/2015

Barco Inc. Media and Entertainment Division

11101 Trade Center Drive, Rancho Cordova, California 95670, USA
Phone: +1 916 859-2500
Fax: +1 916 859-2515
Support: www.Barco.com/esupport
Visit us at the web: www.barco.com
Barco nv
Noordlaan 5, B-8520 Kuurne
Phone: +32 56.36.82.11
Fax: +32 56.36.883.86
Support: www.barco.com/esupport
Visit us at the web: www.barco.com

Printed in Belgium

Changes
Barco provides this manual as is without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Barco may make improvements and/or changes to the product(s) and/or the
program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information in this
publication; these changes are incorporated in new editions of this publication.
The latest edition of Barco manuals can be downloaded from the Barco web site www.barco.com or from the secured Barco web site
https://www.barco.com/en/signin.

Copyright
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated. It shall not otherwise be recorded, transmitted or
stored in a retrieval system without the prior written consent of Barco.

EN55022/CISPR22 Class A ITE (Information Technology Equipment)

Class A ITE is a category of all other ITE which satisfies the class A ITE limits but not the class B ITE limits. Such equipment should not
be restricted in its sale but the following warning shall be included in the instructions for use:
Warning : This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.

Trademarks
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective holders.
All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples and are not to be understood as advertising for
the products or their manufacturers.

Disposal Information
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

This symbol on the product indicates that, under the European Directive 2012/19/EU governing waste from electrical and electronic
equipment, this product must not be disposed of with other municipal waste. Please dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to
a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. To prevent possible harm to the environment
or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
For more information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office or your municipal waste disposal service.
For details, please visit the Barco website at: http://www.barco.com/en/AboutBarco/weee

Table of contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Safety .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5
1.1

Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2. General . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 9
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Convention projector orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Location of the main components of the projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About the Projector Status Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Projector block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Spare part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

3. Preventive maintenance actions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 21

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

Monthly maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Lamp change maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Three monthly maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Annually maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4 yearly maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4. Troubleshooting .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 29
4.1
4.2

Troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 93

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13

Removal of the lamp cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Removal of the input cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Removal of the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Removal of the side cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Removal of the rear cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Removal of the top cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Open the sealed compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Close the sealed compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Installation of the top cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Installation of the rear cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Installation of the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Installation of the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Installation of the input cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

6. Lamps and lamp house . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 109

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removal of the lamp house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Removal of the xenon lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Installation of the Xenon lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Installation of the lamp house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Resetting the lamp parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Realignment of the lamp in its reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Replacement of the Lamp Info module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Replacement of the UV blocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Replacement of the lamp reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Cleaning the Reflector of the Lamp House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Cleaning the UV blocker of the Lamp House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

7. Cold mirror assembly.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 139

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Removal of the cold mirror assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Replace the Cold Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Installation of the cold mirror assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Adjusting the cold mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Cleaning the Cold Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

8. 3D color wheel .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 151

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Parts location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Remove the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Remove rod entrance cooling block of a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Installation of the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Finalizing the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

9. Light Processor assembly .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 163

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Light Processor diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Remove light processor top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Electrical disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Light processor assembly removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Table of contents
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
9.17

Preparing the new light processor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Installation of the light processor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Mount light processor cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Finalize the installation of the light processor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Replacement of the dowser (shutter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Replacement of the Light Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Adjusting the Fold Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Adjusting the notch filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Cleaning the Prism exit side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Replacement of the Peltier element from the DMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Replacement of a Peltier element from the heat pipe cooling block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

10. Convergence .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 193

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4

Convergence controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Preparing the convergence adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Red on Blue convergence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Green on Blue convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

11. Integrator rod . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 201

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Rod diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Removal of the integrator rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Installation of a new integrator rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Adjusting the integrator rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

12. Liquid cooling circuit .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 213

12.1 Check cooling liquid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
12.2 Cooling liquid refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
12.3 Tools used in the liquid cooling servicing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
12.4 Draining the liquid cooling circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
12.5 Filling the liquid cooling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
12.6 Excluding the Light processor Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
12.7 Removal of the heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
12.8 Installation of the heat exchanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
12.9 Cleaning the cooling pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
12.10 Replacement of the pump motor and rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
12.11 Replacement of the complete cooling pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

13. Lenses and Lens holder .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 235

13.1 Available lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

13.2 Lens selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
13.3 Lens removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
13.4 Lens installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
13.5 Cleaning the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
13.6 Remove the lens holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
13.7 Install the lens holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
13.8 Scheimpflug adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
13.9 Replacement of the Vertical Shift stepper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
13.10 Replacement of the Horizontal Shift stepper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

14. Card Cage.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 257

14.1 Fan controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

14.2 Integrated Cinema Processor (ICP) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
14.3 HD-SDI board + link decryptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
14.4 Cinema controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
14.5 Removing a board in the card cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
14.6 Inserting a board in the card cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
14.7 Removing the button unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
14.8 Installation of the button unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
14.9 Replacement of the Button module (first generation Keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
14.10 Replacement of the Keypad (first generation Keypad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
14.11 Replacement of the Keypad assembly (second generation Keypad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
14.12 Replacement of the signal back plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
14.13 Replacement of the Link Decryptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
14.14 Authorization to clear security warning on the projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
14.15 Replacement of the Status Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 293

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5

Software upgrade, launch DC update companion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Software upgrade, projector, ICMP or touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
ICP software upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Link decryptor software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Update logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

16. Communicator touch panel. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 307

16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
2

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Table of contents
16.2 Installing the touch panel interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
16.3 Reposition the touch panel interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

17. Power input.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 313

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Getting access to the Mains Input components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Replacement of the mains ON/OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Replacement of the mains input filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Closing the Mains Input compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

18. Switched mode power supply.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 325

18.1 Diagnostic LEDs on the SMPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
18.2 Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327

19. Lamp power supply .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 329

19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
LPS diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Removing the LPS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Installation of the LPS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 339

20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4

LPS module diagnostic LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

Removal of a LPS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Installation of a LPS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Replacing a large frame LPS with a 2 single module LPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

21. Start Pulse Generator.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 353

21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Removal of the Start Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Installation of the Start Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

22. Fan replacement procedures. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 361

22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.7
22.8
22.9

Card cage fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

SMPS compartment fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Light processor compartment fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Lamp cathode fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Lamp anode fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Heat exchanger fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Cold mirror fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Lamp Info Module fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Integrated cinema processor fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

23. Maintenance procedures.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 385

23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4

Cleaning the exterior of the projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

Removing the front dust filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Clean the dust filter on the bottom side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Clean the dust filter on the top side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

24. Projector cleaning procedure .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 391

24.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
24.2 Necessary tools, products and tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
24.3 Optical path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
24.3.1 Cleaning order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
24.3.2 Cleaning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
24.4 Non optical components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
24.4.1 Card cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
24.4.2 External covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
24.4.3 Dust filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

A. Pin configurations . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 409

A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4

About General Purpose Inputs & Outputs (GPIO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410

Pin configurations of the communication ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Pin configurations of the ICMP communication ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Pin configurations of the inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

B. Input formats . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 419

B.1

Input formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

C. Specifications .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 423
C.1
C.2

Specifications of the DP2K-15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

Specifications of the DP2K-20C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

Index. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 427

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Table of contents

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

1. Safety

1. SAFETY
About this chapter
Read this chapter attentively. It contains important information to prevent personal injury while servicing the DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18CX projector. Furthermore, it includes several cautions to prevent damage to the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX
projector. Ensure that you understand and follow all safety guidelines, safety instructions and warnings mentioned in this chapter
before servicing the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX projector. After this chapter, additional warnings and cautions are given
depending on the service procedure. Read and follow these warnings and cautions as well.

WARNING:

This manual is only intended for qualified service personnel.

Overview

Safety Instructions

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

1. Safety

1.1

Safety Instructions
WARNING: Before removing/replacing any projector components, disconnect the power to the unit mains
terminals and unplug the power cord at UPS INLET.

Safety Instructions
1.

Before returning an instrument to the customer, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited
to, the following items:
a) Be sure that no built-in protective devices are defective and/or have been defeated during servicing. (1) Protective shields
are provided on this chassis to protect both the technician and the customer. Correctly replace all missing protective shields,
including any removed for servicing convenience. (2) When reinstalling the chassis and/or other assembly in the cabinet,
be sure to put back in place all protective devices, including, but not limited to, insulating materials, barriers, covers/shields,
and isolation resistor/capacitor networks. Do not operate this instrument or permit it to be operated without all protective
devices correctly installed and functioning. Service people who defeat safety features or fail to perform safety checks may
be liable for any resulting damage.
b) Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a
hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to, (1) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (2) an
improperly fitted and/or incorrectly secured cover panels.
c) Leakage Current Hot Check. With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord directly into a 220 V AC
outlet (Do not use an isolation transformer during this test). Use a leakage current tester or a metering system that is
designed to comply with the new IEC, ANSI and UL standards. With the instrument AC switch first in the on position and
then in the off position, measure from a known earth ground (metal waterpipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts
of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). especially
any exposed metal parts that offer an electrical return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 3,5 mA.
Reverse the instrument power cord plug in the outlet and repeat test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS
SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING
THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING ACCESSORIES.

AC Leakage Test

Leakage Current Tester

Reading should
not be above
3,5 mA

Device Under Test

Test all exposed metal surfaces

2-Wired cord
Also test with plug reversed
(Using AC Adapter plug as required)
Earth
Ground
Image 1-1

d) Ultraviolet Radiation exposure - Warning: This lamp can cause serious skin burn and eye inflammation from shortwave
ultraviolet radiation if not operated in enclosed fixtures. DO NOT operate this lamp in a fixture with a missing or broken lens
cover.
e) Ozone: Operating lamp generates ozone gas which is harmful to the respiratory system. Therefore the lamp should be
operated in adequately ventilated equipment.

2.

Read and comply with all caution and safety-related notes on or inside the projector cabinet or on the projector chassis, or on
the picture tube.

3.

Design Alteration Warning - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this apparatus. Design alterations and
additions, including, but not limited to, circuit modifications and the addition of items such as auxiliary audio and/or video output
connections, might alter the safety characteristics of this apparatus and create a hazard to the user. Any design alterations
or additions may void the manufacturers warranty and may make you, the servicer responsible for personal injury or property
damage resulting therefrom.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

1. Safety
4.

Lamp explosion Protection Warning The lamp in this projector operates with a high internal pressure and there is a slight risk
that the lamp may explode, particularly if it is used beyond its rated life. Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the lamp
in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept
safely away while lamps are handled. Keep the lamp away from your body. For continued explosion protection, replace the
lamp only with one of the same type number. Always replace the lamp before the rated life time.

5.

Hot Chassis Warning - This projector chassis has two ground systems: the primary ground system is formed by the negative
voltage of the rectified mains (power) and is only used as a reference in primary circuits; the secondary ground system is
connected to earth ground via the earth conductor in the mains (power) lead. Separation between primary and secondary
circuits is performed by the safety isolation transformers. Components bridging these transformers are also safety components
and must never be defeated or altercated. All user-accessible conductive parts must be connected to earth ground, or are kept
at SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage).

6.

Observe original lead dress. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-face, or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing
between components, and between components and the printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. Take extra
care to assure correct lead dress in the following areas:
a) near sharp edges
b) near thermally hot parts - be sure that leads and components do not touch thermally hot parts
c) the AC supply
d) high voltage

7.

Components, parts, and/or wiring that appear to have overheated or are otherwise damaged should be replaced with components, parts, or wiring that meet original specifications. Additionally, determine the cause of overheating and/or damage and, if
necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard.

8.

PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE - Many electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics some of which
are often not evident from visual inspection, nor can the protection they give necessarily be obtained by replacing them with
components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in BARCO service data parts list might create shock, fire, and/or other hazards.
Product Safety is under review continuously and new instructions are issued whenever appropriate. For the latest information,
always consult the appropriate current BARCO service literature.

9.

Do not spray chemical on or near this instrument or any of its assemblies.

10. Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices Some semiconductor (solid state) devices can be damaged easily by static electricity.
Such components commonly are called Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices. Examples of typical ES devices are integrated
circuits and some field-effect transistors and semiconductor "chip" components. The following techniques should be used to
help reduce the incidence of component damage caused by static electricity:
a) Immediately before handling any semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any electrostatic charge on your body by
touching a known earth ground. Wear a commercially available high impedance discharging wrist strap device.
b) After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ES devices, place the assembly on a static dissipative surface such as
a 3M No 8210 table mat, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup or exposure of the assembly.
c) Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ES devices.
d) Do not remove a replacement ES device from its protective package until immediately before you are ready to install it
(Most replacement ES devices are packaged with leads electrically shorted together by conductive foam, aluminium foil or
comparable conductive material).
e) Immediately before removing the protective material from the leads of a replacement ES device, touch the protective material
to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed. CAUTION: Be sure no power is applied to the chassis
or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.
f) Minimize bodily motions when handling unpacked replacement ES devices (Otherwise harmless motion such as the brushing together of your clothes fabric or the lifting of your foot from a carpeted floor can generate static electricity sufficient to
damage an ES device).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

1. Safety

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General

2. GENERAL
About this chapter
This chapter contains some general information on projector level such as the location of the main components, internal wiring
diagram, spare parts list, etc.

Overview

Convention projector orientation

Location of the main components of the projector

About the Projector Status Light

Projector block diagrams

Spare part list

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General

2.1

Convention projector orientation

Convention
This manual refer to the left side of the projector as the side at your left hand when standing behind the projector and looking at the
projection screen in front of the projector.

R
F

Image 2-1
T
Top of the projector.
L
Left side of the projector (Light Processor side).
F
Front of the projector.
R
Right side of the projector (Lamp side & Input side).
B
Back side of the projector.

10

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General

2.2

Location of the main components of the projector

Housing and air inlet filters
2
1

5
6
7
Image 2-2
1
Rear cover.
2
Top cover.
3
Left cover (Light Processor side).
4
Sealed compartment cover (Light processor side)
5
Lamp cover.
6
Input cover (Input & Communication unit).
7
Front cover.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11

2. General
Main internal components
9

10

11
19
20

14

12
13

15

16

17

18
Image 2-3
8
Lamp Power Supply (LPS)
9
Convergence cover plate
10 Backplane + light processor compartment fan
11 Lens holder assembly
12 Front dust filter (cleanable)
13 Button panel
14 Fan controller board
15 Integrated Cinema Processor board (ICP)
16 HDSDI board or Mediablock
17 Cinema controller board
18 Switched mode power supply board
19 Lamp house

12

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General
20

Lamp info module fan

21

22

23
24
28
25

27
26
Image 2-4
21 Dust filter cold mirror
22 Light processor (assembly)
23 Light pipe
24 Water cooling circuit (reservoir)
25 Water cooling pump
26 Dust filter heat exchanger
27 Heat exchanger

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13

2. General
28

Anode fan assembly

29
30
31

28

Image 2-5
28 Anode fan assembly
29 Start pulse generator (SPG)
30 Cold mirror assembly
31 SPG cover plate

14

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General

2.3

About the Projector Status Light

Overview
The projector status light can have 4 colors:
Flashing
green

Projector is booting up.

Green

Projector is running normal.

Yellow

Projector is running with warnings. Event can go on but a technical intervention will be necessary in the near
future to prevent a complete stop of the projector.

Red

Projector is in error state. Problem could prevent normal operation. Solve the problem before continuing
with the projector.

Blue

Projector runs in notification state. Maintenance action required. Lamp run time is exceeded. New lamp
must be installed.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15

2. General

2.4

Projector block diagrams

General block diagram

Blue formatter

Green formatter

Red formatter

Shutter

Lamp

Fan1, 1-6

Fan controller
ICP

Pump
Signal backplane

Tail
light
Switched mode
Power Supply

From
UPS

Motorized
Lens

Lamp info
Motor control
Fan2, 1-4

Cathode fan

Anode fan

Start Pulse
Generator

Light Sensor

Lamp power
supply

3D controller

Light processor

HDSDI input
TI decryptor
or
Mediablock

Projector
ID

Button module
Cinema controller

To UPS

Electronic box
Main
Input

Touch
Panel

Image 2-6

Communication block diagram

Blue formatter

Green formatter

Lamp

Red formatter

Start Pulse
Generator

Light Sensor

Lamp power
supply

3D controller

Light processor

Lamp info
Motor control

Fan controller
Signal backplane
ICP

Projector
ID

HDSDI input
TI decryptor
or
Mediablock
Button module

Cinema controller

RS232

Electronic box

I2C
Ethernet

Touch
Panel

Image 2-7

16

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General

Any external command sent via Ethernet or serial will always be routed through the Cinema Controller to the Signal Backplane
and then on to the end device

Cinema Controller contains a multi port internal Ethernet router, connected to all internal Ethernet devices.

Once the Cinema Controller receives the command, it will convert it into the necessary protocol to control the end device.

TI controls its own devices with commands to perform functions coming from the Cinema controller or from cinema server/IMediablock.

Decryption is handled by the Link decryptor or Mediablock.

IC communication between Fan Controller and Cinema Controller is used by the Fan Controller to send back error reporting
to Cinema Controller

Cinema Controller receives error reporting and sends it to the Communicator and the log files.

Video block diagram

Blue formatter

Green formatter

Red formatter

Light processor

Signal backplane
ICP
HDSDI input
TI decryptor
or
Mediablock

Projector
ID

Cinema controller
Electronic box
Image 2-8

The following steps happen :

If decryption link is present; video is sent from server via HDSDI cables to the projector HDSDI board (or PCI express cable if
media block is inserted).

Video is decrypted on the Link decryptor board or Media Block and then sent to the Signal Backplane

Video signal is sent to Integrated Cinema Processor

ICP Board adds scaling, subtitle overlay, image cropping & applies all color correction. Also divides video signal into Red,
Green and Blue signals.

Formatter applies any 3D frame rate multiplication if needed and turns signal into pulses to drive or cycle DMD mirrors.

DMDs are reflecting the light provided by the prism back to the prism and reflect it through the lens towards the screen.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17

2. General

2.5

Spare part list

Look at the secured Barco website https://My.Barco.com for the most recently updated spare parts list.

Optical spare parts

Order No.

Description

Applies to

Reference

R9856170

Dolby 3D color wheel (Active 3D, single projector)

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R59770256

R9856171

3D color wheel (Active 3D, single projector)

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R59770256

R848401K

Lamp house reflector set.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C

page 134

R8760619K

Lamp house reflector set.

DPZK-18CX

page 134

R862416FK

Light processor + Light pipe + shutter assembly.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 163

R8624161FK

Light processor 3D + Light pipe + shutter assembly.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 163

R9855937

Osram xenon lamp of 4 kW (DHP)

DP2K-20C/DP2K18CX

page 118

R9855938

Osram xenon lamp of 3 kW

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9855956

Osram xenon lamp of 2 kW

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9855939

Ushio xenon lamp of 4 kW (DXL40BAF)

DP2K-20C/DP2K18CX

page 118

R9855940

Ushio xenon lamp of 3 kW (DXL30BAF)

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9855955

Ushio xenon lamp of 2 kW (DXL20BAF)

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9855965

Ushio xenon lamp 2 kW (DXL20BAF/2)

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9856350

XHA xenon lamp of 3 kW DHP

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9856360

XHA xenon lamp of 4 kW DHP

DP2K-20C/DP2K18CX

page 118

R9856370

Philips xenon lamp XDC4000B

DP2K-20C/DP2K18CX

page 118

R9855959

Osram xenon lamp of 1.2kW

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

R9855961

Ushio xenon lamp of 1.2kW

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 118

Electrical spare parts

18

Order No.

Description

Applies to

Reference

R765535K

Button module.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 268

R7655331K

Cinema Controller Board + 3D interface

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 261

R7655825K

TI ICP Board

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 259

R765530K

Fan & Motor Control Board.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 258

R765534K

HD-SDI module

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 260

B401632K

Link Decryptor unit

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 260

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

2. General
Order No.

Description

Applies to

Reference

R7655325K

Signal backplane

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 277

R765529K

Switched mode power supply

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 325

B3245964DK

Axial Fan used:

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 378

on top of cold mirror.

on top of the heat exchanger.

B3247001DK

Fan for cooling the compartment of the Light Processor Unit.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 366

B32459592DK

Fan for cooling the Lamp Info unit. Fan is located at the right side of
the projector below the Lamp compartment.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 383

B3245651DK

Radial Fan used:

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 374

inside compartment of the lamp anode cooling.

inside compartment of the lamp cathode cooling.

page 369

B32466391DK

Fans for cooling the SMPS.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 364

R765365K

Lamp Info Module.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 129

R7648205K

Light sensor module

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 182

R765524K

Lamp Power Supply (LPS).

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 329

R765523K

Lamp Power Supply (LPS), single module

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 339

R7655232K

Lamp Power Supply (LPS), 2 single module + fixation frame

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 348

B358035K

Lens holder shift motor.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

B401303K

Liquid cooling pump.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 232

R724350K

Local keypad. Button module not included.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 269

B3722365K

Mains switch 35A UL/CSA.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R765310K

Projector status light.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 292

R863465K

Shutter Blizzard assembly (dowser).

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 180

R7648225K

Start Pulse Generator (SPG).

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 353

R765314K

Touch Panel display. Without articulated arm.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R9863060

Axial fans set

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

Mechanical spare parts

Order No.

Description

Applies to

Reference

B1909086K

Cooling liquid 1 liter.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 213

R395198K

Cooling liquid refill & calibration kit (2 liter)

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 213

R9863070

Dust filters set

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 387

R868540K

Heat Exchanger

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 224

R8552642K

Lamp house

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C

page 109

R8760618K

Lamp house

DP2K-18CX

page 109

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

19

2. General

20

Order No.

Description

Applies to

R858100K

Lamp cathode adaptor

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R863445K

Motorized lens holder.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 235

R863465K

Dowser

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

page 180

R9855920

Rear exhaust.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R859360K

Stacking points.

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

R857783K

Projector rear cover (air outlet on the rear).

DP2K-15C/DP2K20C/DP2K-18Cx

Reference

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

3. Preventive maintenance actions

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTIONS

Maintenance program
The maintenance program is subdivided in time frames going from monthly maintenance actions which can be done by a trained
projectionist to annually and 4 yearly maintenance actions which must be done by certified service personnel who are familiar with
potential hazards of the product and all product safety checks.

Overview

Monthly maintenance actions

Lamp change maintenance actions

Three monthly maintenance actions

Annually maintenance actions

4 yearly maintenance actions

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

21

3. Preventive maintenance actions

3.1

Monthly maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE A (perform every month)
The monthly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by a trained projectionist who is familiar
with potential hazards associated with the product.

No.

Maintenance action

Remarks

Clean all dust filters of the projector.

Use a vacuum cleaner and blow

away the remaining dust away with
compressed air in another room. Take
care of orientation when reinstalling the
cleaned filters.

dust filter at the front of the projector (electronics).

dust filter at the top of the projector (cold mirror).

dust filter at the bottom of the projector (heat exchanger).

Frequency at which filters should be

replaced is dependant on environmental
conditions and the way they can be
cleaned. Replace damaged filters
immediately.
Front dust filter, "Removing the front
dust filter", page 387 , cold mirror filter,
"Clean the dust filter on the top side",
page 390 , heat exchanger filter, "Clean
the dust filter on the bottom side", page
389.

22

Check the surface of the lens output side for dust. (it is not needed to remove
the lens from the projector)

Clean the lens output side in case dust

is clearly visible upon the surface. See
"Cleaning the lens", page 242. Note
that if the lens was removed from the
projector, a home and return must
be executed. See user guide of the
Communicator software.

Check the porthole (both sides) for dust.

Clean the porthole in case dust is clearly

visible upon the surface. Use an optical
cloth.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

3. Preventive maintenance actions

3.2

Lamp change maintenance actions

Maintenance actions at every lamp change
The maintenance actions, listed below, which are required at every lamp change may be performed by a trained
projectionist who is familiar with potential hazards associated with the xenon bulb lamp.

No.

Maintenance action

Remarks

Check the UV blocker of the lamp house for dust.

Only clean the UV blocker in case dust

is clearly visible upon the surface of the
UV blocker (both sides). See "Cleaning
the UV blocker of the Lamp House",
page 138.

Check the reflector of the lamp house for dust.

Only clean the reflector in case dust

is clearly visible upon the surface of
the reflector. Take the lamp house to
another room and use compressed air
to blow away the dust. See "Cleaning
the UV blocker of the Lamp House",
page 138.

Visual inspection of the lamp anode and cathode connectors of the lamp house. Replace the lamp house in case
of degradation, damage, etc. See
"Removal of the lamp house", page 112.

Visual inspection of the lamp anode and cathode cables of the lamp house.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Replace the lamp house in case

of degradation, damage, etc. See
"Removal of the lamp house", page 112.

23

3. Preventive maintenance actions

3.3

Three monthly maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE B (perform every three months)
The 3 monthly maintenance actions, listed below, may be performed by a trained projectionist who is familiar
with potential hazards associated with the product.

24

No.

Maintenance action

Remarks

Clean the air vents/inlets of the projector:

Use a vacuum cleaner.

air inlet grid of the cold mirror fan (top side projector).

air inlet grid of the electronic compartment (front side projector).

air inlet grid of the Lamp Power Supply (bottom side projector).

air inlet grid of the heat exchanger (bottom side projector).

Clean the cabinet of the projector. (Removal overall dust accumulation on

projector covers)

See cleaning procedure "Cleaning the

exterior of the projector", page 386.

Check cooling liquid level at cooling reservoir

Start refill procedure when level is below

Min or almost at Min.See "Cooling liquid
refill", page 215. If the liquid level is too
low, the maintenance/repair should be
performed by a service technician.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

3. Preventive maintenance actions

3.4

Annually maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE C (perform every year)
The yearly maintenance actions, listed below, may ONLY be performed by certified service personnel who are
familiar with potential hazards of the product and all product safety checks.

No. Component

Maintenance action

Remarks

Dust in
general

Clean the metal mesh grid of the anode fan (inside sealed
compartment).

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush.

Dust in
general

Remove all dust inside the lamp compartment.

Use a vacuum cleaner. Do NOT touch

the cold mirror.

Dust in
general

Check the cold mirror for dust, burn damage, degradation, cracks, Only clean the cold mirror in case dust
etc.
is clearly visible upon the surface of the
cold mirror.
Replace the cold mirror in case of burn
damage, degradation, cracks, etc. See
"Cold mirror assembly", page 139.

Dust in
general

Check the mask and the integrator entry for burn damage,
degradation, cracks, etc. Remove the lamp house and look at the
mask and integrator entry via the cold mirror.

Replace the integration rod and mask

in case of burn damage, degradation,
cracks, etc. See "Removal of the
integrator rod", page 204.

Dust in
general

Open the dowser (shutter) and check the prism exit side for dust,
discoloration, damage, degradation, cracks, etc.

Only clean the prism exit side in case

dust is clearly visible upon the surface
of prism. See "Cleaning the Prism exit
side", page 187.
Replace the complete Light Processor
Unit in case of degradation, cracks, etc.
See "Light Processor assembly", page
163.

Dust in
general

Check the porthole (both sides) for dust.

Only clean the porthole in case dust is

clearly visible upon the surface. Use
an optical cloth.

Dust in
general

Clean the projector exterior (housing). Report on cleanliness of

booth!

See cleaning procedure

Dust in
general

Check the condition (hot state) of the light pipe and prism by
looking for artifacts in the projected full white and full black
patterns.

If artifacts are visible diagnose the

integration rod. See "Rod diagnostic",
page 203.
Replace the integration rod In case the
integration rod causes the artifacts.
See "Removal of the integrator rod",
page 204.
Replace the complete Light Processor
Unit in case the prism causes the
artifacts. See "Light Processor
assembly", page 163.

Diagnostics

Check actual diagnostics after 1 hour play with black image. See
user guide of the Communicator software.

Note any irregularities and follow up.

Take the necessary measurements if
required.

10 Diagnostics

Run self tests. See user guide of the Communicator software

Note any irregularities and follow up.

Take the necessary measurements if
required.

11 Diagnostics

Create a diagnostic package and check the log files inside the
package.

Use the diagnostic package reader and

note any irregularity.

12 Diagnostics

Verify Link Decryptor clock. Time must be set to UTC/GMT time

Only a deviation of 15 minutes is

allowed. See Communicator software.

13 Software
version

Check for the latest version of Barco and TI software. See user
guide of the Communicator software. The latest software version
can be downloaded from the secured Barco web site.

Upgrade the projector software with the

latest version. See user guide of the
projector toolset.

14 Info-Ts

Check if all Info-Ts are implemented. Note that the Info-Ts are
listed on the secured Barco web site.

If not, implement all Info-Ts and update

the projector service docket.

15 Cooling
circuit

Check the condition of the tubing of the liquid cooling circuit for
degradation, UV cracking, kinking of tubes, leakage.

Replace damaged parts immediately.

See "Liquid cooling circuit", page 213.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

25

3. Preventive maintenance actions

No. Component

Maintenance action

Remarks

16 Cooling
circuit

Replace the liquid of the cooling circuit. (drain, refill, expel air)

See chapter "Liquid cooling circuit",

page 213.

18 Electrical
connections

Check the torque values/general condition of all critical electrical

connections and components. Use a torque wrench to verify the
torque values of the critical electrical connections listed:

Do not release the nuts to check the

torque. Just verify.

19 Lamp Module

Nuts (x2) of the SPG socket inside the lamp house: 9 Nm.

Cathode cable nut for the lamp cathode socket: 17Nm

Hexagon socket head cap screw at the lamp cathode socket

: 2,5 Nm.

Nuts (x4) of the LAMP OUT ports of the LPS unit: 4 Nm

Check the UV blocker of the lamp house for dust, burn damage,
degradation, cracks, etc. Note that in case of a passive 3D
projection system the UV blocker has an adapted 3D coating.

Only clean the UV blocker in case dust

is clearly visible upon the surface of the
UV blocker (both sides). See page 138.
Replace the UV blocker in case of burn
damage, degradation, cracks, etc. See
"Replacement of the UV blocker", page
131.

20 Lamp Module

Check the reflector of the lamp house for dust, degradation,

cracks, etc.

Only clean the reflector in case dust

is clearly visible upon the surface of
the reflector. Take the lamp house to
another room and use compressed air
to blow away the dust from the reflector.
See page 138.
Replace the reflector in case of burn
damage, degradation, cracks, etc. See
"Replacement of the lamp reflector",
page 134.

21 Lamp Module

Visual inspection of the lamp anode and cathode connectors of

the lamp house.

Replace the lamp house in case

of degradation, damage, etc. See
"Removal of the lamp house", page
112.

22 Lamp Module

Visual inspection of the lamp anode and cathode cables of the

lamp house.

Replace the lamp house in case

of degradation, damage, etc. See
"Removal of the lamp house", page
112.

23 Lamp Module

Check motors (motorized lamp house) and manual adjustments.

Lubricate if needed.

24 Lamp Module

Check the positional integrity of automatic lamp alignment/CLO.

Perform auto alignment. Manual

adjustment afterwards should not
improve light output.

25 Lens holder

Check the lens holder shift functionality (up/down & left/right).

Lubricate where needed.

Use the local keypad and the

Communicator software to shift.

26 Lens holder

Check the positional integrity of motorized adjustments by

switching Macros.

Verify correct alignment on screen

between flat and scope.

27 Lens holder

Check the focus uniformity.

Adjust the lens holder (Scheimpflug)

ONLY if needed. See "Scheimpflug
adjustment", page 249.

28 Lens

Check the optic surfaces of the lens input and output for dust.

Only clean the input and/or output side

in case dust is clearly visible upon the
surfaces. Use an optical cloth. Note
that a lens removal requires a home
and return action. See user guide of
the Communicator software.

29 Lens

Check the lens Zoom & Focus motors.

Use the local keypad and the

Communicator software to Zoom and
to Focus.

30 Shutter

Check the functionality of the Dowser (shutter). Loose

components, wear and tear.

Use the local keypad and the

Communicator software to Open and
Close the shutter.
Replace the dowser (shutter) if needed.
See "Replacement of the dowser
(shutter)", page 180.

31 3D color
wheel
26

Check the 3D color wheel for degradation of coatings/condition

of glass segments.

Replace the 3D color wheel assembly.

See "3D color wheel", page 151.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

3. Preventive maintenance actions

No. Component

Maintenance action

Remarks

32 3D color
wheel

Check the spinning motor and retraction mechanism of the 3D

color wheel assembly.

Wheel must turn before inserted into

light path.

33 3D color
wheel

Check the calibration of the 3D color wheel

Calibrate if required. See

Communicator software.

34 Electronic
boards

Check the general condition of the electronic boards: Status

LEDs, dust, connections, etc.

Blow out dust.

Boards to check: LPS, SMPS, Fan Control Board, ICP Board,

Cinema Controller Board, HD-SDI Board
35 Security

Check the Tamper Switch Activation Report and Security Logs for
security infringements.

Report if intruded.

36 Security

Verify if the Dallas key is present and working.

Report if missing, lost or damaged.

37 Air Extraction Check customer air extraction system for adequate extraction.

The air extraction system must be

capable of removing minimum 6,65
m/min or 235 CFM per installed
DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx
digital projector. This must be
measured at EACH individual projector
head exhaust stack.

38 Documentation

Check if the projector manuals are present and up-to-date.

Download current manual version from

www.My.Barco.com.

39 Documentation

Update projector service docket.

List all maintenance actions and

remarks.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

27

3. Preventive maintenance actions

3.5

4 yearly maintenance actions

MAINTENANCE TYPE D (perform every four years)
The 4 yearly maintenance actions, listed below, may ONLY be performed by certified service personnel who
are familiar with potential hazards of the product and all product safety checks.

28

No.

Maintenance action

Replace the pump of the liquid cooling circuit

Remarks

Check the lamp fans: vibrations, noise, speed, etc. (speeds: via diagnostics)

Replace if needed. See "Fan

replacement procedures", page 361.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
About this chapter
This chapter enumerates all possible error codes which can appear on the Touch Panel display of the cinema projector or in the
projector log files. Note that some codes have a warning and an error state. Some only have an error state, others have only a
warning state. In case of a warning the projector remains to operate. Nevertheless, it is recommended to solve the problem which
causing the warning as soon as possible otherwise, the warning state may turn into an error state which will switch off the
projector consequently.
The codes are placed in ascending order to make it easier to look up the code and find an appropriate solution.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

29

4. Troubleshooting

4.1

Troubleshooting checklist
Code 5003: light sensor - no communication (Error)
Situation

Solution

No communication with the Light

Sensor Module (CLO).

1.

Reboot the projector:

a) Turn off the Lamp and cool down the Lamp for at least 1 minute if hot.
b) Switch off the power of the unit and wait for at least 15 seconds.
c) Switch on the power of the unit and respect normal startup procedure.

2.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 of image 4-1) is connected with the CLO module
and with the Signal Backplane.
Note: To access the Signal Backplane the top cover of the Card Cage has to be
removed. Removing the top cover will lead to an authorization request upon startup.

3.

If the problem remains, replace the CLO module. See chapter "Replacement of the
Lamp Info module", page 129.

Image 4-1

Code 5004: lamp - no communication (Error)

30

Situation

Solution

Lamp House is not correctly installed.

Check if the Lamp House is properly installed. Ensure that the three fixation screws
(reference 2 of image 4-2) of the Lamp House are fastened.

Wrong Lamp House detected in lamp

compartment of the projector.

Replace the Lamp House with a compatible Lamp House for this projector.

No communication with the Lamp

House.

1.

Check if the blue socket (reference 3 of image 4-3) of the Lamp House is not
damaged.

2.

Check if the blue socket (reference 4 of image 4-3) in the lamp compartment is
not damaged (front side and back side).

3.

Check if the wire unit (reference 5 of image 4-3) is connected with the blue socket
in the lamp compartment and is plugged in its socket on the Signal Backplane
(reference 6 image 4-3).

4.

Replace the Integrated Cinema Controller board. See "Removing a board in the
card cage", page 263

5.

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page
277.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

2
2

Image 4-2
Lamp fixation
2

Lamp House fixation screws.

Image 4-3
Lamp connections
3
4
5
6

Blue socket connection Lamp Info Module of the Lamp House.

Blue socket inside Lamp compartment (front view).
Wire unit for connection with blue socket (back side).
Lamp info module cable connection to signal backplane

Code 5005: lamp power supplies - communication failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

LPS communication cable

disconnected from the CTLB-IN port
of the first LPS unit in the LPS rack.

Check if the LPS communication cable (reference 4 of image 4-4) is connected with the
CTLB-IN port of the first LPS unit in the LPS rack of the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

31

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Disconnected blue LPS cascade

wire unit (CTLB-IN / CTLB-OUT).

Reconnect the blue wire unit (reference 5 image 4-4) between the CTLB-IN and
CTLB-OUT sockets of the LPS units.

LPS communication cable

disconnected form the Signal
Backplane.

Check if the LPS communication cable (reference 7) of image 4-5) is connected with the
Signal Backplane.

Malfunction of one of the LPS

modules. The red LED ERR of the
malfunction LPS module lit up.

Replace the malfunction LPS unit. See chapter "Lamp power supply", page 329.

Image 4-5
LPS data connection Signal backplane
Image 4-4
Data connection LPS side

Code 5010: pump - refill mode is on (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The projector is in Refill mode.

Only the pump of the liquid cooling
circuit is working.

When cooling liquid refreshing is finished, tip on Exit refill mode in the Communicator
software.

Code 5020: system - read projector identification failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

Cinema Controller failure.

Re-seat/replace the Cinema Controller board.

Corrupt or invalid Projector ID card

(reference 1 of image 4-6)

Contact Barco for further actions.

Image 4-6
Projector identification

32

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5042: cold mirror fan - speed too low (Error)
Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 1 image 4-7)

of the Cold Mirror fan (reference 2
image 4-7) disconnected.

Remove the left cover of the projector and check the connection of the wire unit of the
fan below the Cold Mirror.

Wire unit of the fan units (reference

5 image 4-7) disconnected from the
Signal Backplane.

Remove the front cover and front dust filter from the projector and check if the wire unit
(reference 5 image 4-7) is inserted in the Signal Backplane.

Blocked fan (reference 2 image 4-7).

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See chapter "Cold mirror fan", page 381.

Image 4-7
Cold mirror fan connection

Code 5043: cold mirror fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan (reference 2 image 4-7).

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See chapter "Cold mirror fan", page 381.

Code 5053: engine fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan (reference 1 image 4-8).

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See chapter "Light processor compartment fan", page 366.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

33

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-8
Light processor compartment fan

Code 5063: heat exchanger fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan (reference 1image 4-9).

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "Heat exchanger fan", page 378.

2
3

Image 4-9
Heat exchanger fan connection

Code 5072: lamp anode fan - speed too low (Error)

34

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 1image 4-10) of

the Anode Fan is disconnected.

Remove the left side cover of the projector and check the connection of the Anode Fan.

Wire unit (reference 3 image 4-10)

of the fan units is disconnected from
the Signal Backplane.

Remove the front cover and front dust filter from the projector and check if the wire unit
(reference 53 image 4-10) is inserted in the Signal Backplane.

Blocked Anode Fan (reference 2

image 4-10).

Check if the Anode Fan is not blocked. Ensure that the Anode Fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the Anode Fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise
replace with new one.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Anode fan (reference 2 image 4-10)

end of life.

Replace the Anode Fan.

1
Image 4-10
Anode fan connections

Code 5073: lamp anode fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked Anode Fan (reference 2

image 4-10).

Check if the Anode Fan is not blocked. Ensure that the Anode Fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the Anode Fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise
replace with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Anode fan (reference 2 image 4-10)

end of life.

Replace the Anode Fan. See "Lamp anode fan", page 374.

Code 5082: lamp cathode fan - speed too low (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 1image 4-11) of

the Cathode Fan is disconnected.

Remove the left side cover of the projector and check the connection of the Cathode Fan.

Wire unit (reference 3 image 4-11)

of the fan units is disconnected from
the Signal Backplane.

Remove the front cover and front dust filter from the projector and check if the wire unit
(reference 3 image 4-11) is inserted in the Signal Backplane.

Blocked Cathode Fan (reference 2

image 4-11).

Check if the Cathode Fan is not blocked. Ensure that the Cathode Fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the Cathode Fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise
replace with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Cathode fan (reference 1 image 4-11)

end of life.

Replace the Cathode Fan. See "Lamp cathode fan", page 369.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

35

4. Troubleshooting

3
2

1
Image 4-11
Cathode fan connections

Code 5083: lamp cathode fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked Cathode Fan (reference 2

image 4-11).

Check if the Cathode Fan is not blocked. Ensure that the Cathode Fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit.

Check if the wire unit of the Cathode Fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise
replace with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Cathode fan (reference 1 image 4-11)

end of life.

Replace the Cathode Fan. See "Lamp cathode fan", page 369.

Code 5103: smps fan 1 (left side) - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan. (reference 1

image 4-12)

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit. (reference 2 &

5 of image 4-12)

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "SMPS compartment fans", page 364.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "SMPS compartment fans", page 364.

4
2
1

Image 4-12
SMPS fans connections

Code 5113: smps fan 2 (right side) - speed low (Warning)

36

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan. (reference 4 of

image 4-12)

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Damaged wire unit. (reference 3 &

5 of image 4-12)

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "SMPS compartment fans", page 364.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "SMPS compartment fans", page 364.

Code 5123: lamp rear fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan. (reference 1

image 4-13)

Unblock the fan. Ensure the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit of the fan.

(reference 2 & 3 image 4-13)

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Lamp Info Module fan", page 383.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "SMPS compartment fans", page 364.

3
1

Image 4-13
Lamp rear fan connections

Code 5143: electronics fan 1 (top side) - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan. (reference 1

image 4-14)

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit. (reference 2 &

5 of image 4-14)

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "Card cage fans", page 362.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

37

4. Troubleshooting
1
5
2

Image 4-14
Card cage fans

Code 5153: electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked fan. (reference

2image 4-14)

Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely.

Damaged wire unit. (reference 3 &5

of image 4-14)

Check if the wire unit of the fan is not damaged. Repair if possible, otherwise replace
with new one.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "Card cage fans", page 362.

Code 5160: engine switch - not ok (Error)

Situation

Solution

The Light Processor Unit is not

correctly installed.

Check if the Light Processor Unit is properly installed. Ensure that both fixation screws
at the foot of the Light Processor Unit are fastened.

Switch disconnected (reference 1 on

image 4-15) on Signal Backplane.

Check connection of engine switch at the signal backplane, if connections are OK,
measure switch at connector for continuity.

Damaged switch.

Remove the Light Processor Unit and check that switch is not damaged. The switch is
located behind left hand side set pin which guides the engine into place. Replace switch
if needed.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Image 4-15
Light processor switch connection

Code 5180: lamp house - not connected (Error)

38

Situation

Solution

The lamp house is not correctly

installed in its compartment.

Check if the lamp house is properly installed. Ensure that the three fixation screws
(reference 1 image 4-16) of the lamp house are fastened.
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Switch damaged (reference 2

image 4-16).

Check lamp house detection switch for damage. The switch is located at the bottom
right corner. Replace if damaged.

Switch disconnected (reference 3

image 4-16).

Check connection of lamp house detection switch at the Signal Backplane, if connections
are OK then measure switch cable for continuity.

1
2

Image 4-16
Lamp house switch

Code 5191: prism switch - warning (lens probably touches prism) (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Lens is touching the sensor

(reference PR of image 4-17) on the
prism. Maximum lens shift position
reached.

Shift the lens upwards and/or to the left.

Defect prism sensor.

Remove lens and reboot projector, if warning appears again then the prism sensor is
defective and needs to be replaced.

PR

Image 4-17

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

39

4. Troubleshooting
PR

Prism switch.

Code 5212: pump - speed too low (Error)

Situation

Solution

The pump of the cooling circuit is

electrical disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-18) of the pump is properly connected.

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See service
manual chapter "Cleaning the cooling pump", page 226.

Wire unit of the pump (reference 2

image 4-18) is disconnected from
the Signal Backplane.

Remove the front cover and front dust filter from the projector and check if the wire unit
(reference 2 image 4-18) is inserted in the Signal Backplane.

Malfunction Fan Control board

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Pump end of life.

Replace the pump. See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor", page 228 or
"Replacement of the complete cooling pump", page 232.

Image 4-18
Pump connection

Code 5213: pump - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See service
manual chapter "Cleaning the cooling pump", page 226.

Malfunction Fan Control board

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Pump end of life.

Replace the pump. See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor", page 228 or
"Replacement of the complete cooling pump", page 232.

Code 5230: lens zoom position - requested target not reached (Warning)

40

Situation

Solution

Manual lens installed.

Replace the manual lens with a motorized lens.

The activated lens file does not

correspond with the lens mounted
on the projector.

Activate a lens file which does correspond with the mounted lens or mount an other lens
which corresponds with the lens file you want to activate.

Corrupt lens file.

Delete the lens file and program correct lens type into communicator under
Advanced/lens parameters and recreate a new lens file. Tip: perform a Lens Homing
before creating a new lens file. Otherwise, if the lens is removed the existing lens file
becomes useless. Setup all new lens files away from the maximum limitation of the lens
zoom. It is possible that the lens file was originally created at the maximum or minimum
zoom capabilities of the lens zoom.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

The final lens position lays very

close to the mechanical limits which
disable the motorized lens position.

Position the lens manually, or reposition the projector so that the lens position lies further
away from the mechanical limits, or try to use another lens which range is more suitable.
Setup all new lens files away from the maximum limitation of the lens zoom. It is possible
that lens file was originally created at the maximum or minimum zoom capabilities of
the lens zoom. Program correct lens type into communicator under Advanced/lens
parameters and recreate the lens files.

Disconnected wire units (reference

1 image 4-19) of the zoom motor of
the motorized lens.

Remove the front cover of the projector and check if all wire units at the left bottom of
the lens holder are connected.

Disconnected wire unit, of the lens

zoom/shift signals, from the Signal
Backplane.

Remove the front cover and front dust filter from the projector and check if the wire unit
(reference 4 image 4-19) is inserted in the Signal Backplane (white plug behind blue
wires).

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Malfunction zoom motor of the lens.

Use the local keypad to zoom the image on the screen. If unsuccessful, replace the
motorized lens.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection).

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Malfunction SMPS board which

supplies power to the lens.

Replace the SMPS board. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

4
2
1
3
Image 4-19
Lens connections

Code 5231: lens focus position - requested target not reached (Warning)
Situation

Solution

The activated lens file does not

correspond with the lens mounted
on the projector.

Activate a lens file which does correspond with the mounted lens or mount an other lens
which correspond with the lens file you want to activate.

Corrupt lens file.

Delete the lens file and program correct lens type into communicator under
Advanced/lens parameters and recreate a new lens file. Tip: perform a Lens Homing
before creating a new lens file. Otherwise, if the lens is removed the existing lens file
becomes useless. Setup all new lens files away from the maximum limitation of the lens
zoom. It is possible that the lens file was originally created at the maximum or minimum
zoom capabilities of the lens zoom.

The final lens position lays very

close to the mechanical limits which
disable the motorized lens position.

Position the lens manually, or reposition the projector so that the lens position lays further
away from the mechanical limits, or try to use another lens which range is more suitable.
Setup all new lens files away from the maximum limitation of the lens zoom. It is possible
that lens file was originally created at the maximum or minimum zoom capabilities of
the lens zoom. Program correct lens type into communicator under Advanced/lens
parameters and recreate the lens files.

Wire unit (reference 1 image 4-19) of

the lens focus signals disconnected
from the Signal Backplane.

Remove the front cover and front dust filter from the projector and check if the wire unit
(reference 1 image 4-19) is inserted in the Signal Backplane.

Disconnected wire unit of the Signal

backplane.

Remove the front cover of the projector and check if the wire unit (reference 4
image 4-19) is connected with the Signal backplane.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

41

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Malfunction focus motor of the lens.

Use the local keypad to focus the image on the screen. If unsuccessful, replace the
motorized lens.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection).

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Malfunction SMPS board which

supplies power to the lens.

Replace the SMPS board. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

Code 5232: lens horizontal shift position - requested target not reached (Warning)
Situation

Solution

The activated lens file does not

correspond with the lens mounted
on the projector.

Activate a lens file which does correspond with the mounted lens or mount an other lens
which correspond with the lens file you want to activate.

Corrupt lens file.

Delete all current lens files and create new lens files. Note that each time the lens
is removed new lens files has to be created. Setup all new lens files away from the
maximum limitation of the lens zoom. It is possible that lens file was originally created at
the maximum or minimum zoom capabilities of the lens zoom. Program correct lens type
into communicator under Advanced/lens parameters and recreate the lens files.

The final lens position lays very

close to the mechanical limits which
disable the motorized lens position.

Position the lens manually, or reposition the projector so that the lens position lays further
away from the mechanical limits, or try to use another lens which range is more suitable.
Setup all new lens files away from the maximum limitation of the lens zoom. It is possible
that lens file was originally created at the maximum or minimum zoom capabilities of
the lens zoom. Program correct lens type into communicator under Advanced/lens
parameters and recreate the lens files.

Disconnected wire unit of the

horizontal shift motor of the
motorized lens holder.

Remove the front cover of the projector and check if the wire unit is connected with the
shift motor. See reference 1 image 4-20.

Disconnected wire unit on the Signal

Backplane

Remove the front cover of the projector and check if the wire unit (reference 2
image 4-20) is connected with the Signal backplane.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Malfunction shift motor of the

motorized lens holder.

Use the local keypad to shift the image on the screen horizontally. If unsuccessful,
replace the horizontal shift motor of the motorized lens holder.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection).

Replace the Signal Backplane, see "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Malfunction SMPS board which

supplies power to the lens.

Replace the SMPS board. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

2
1

Image 4-20
Horizontal lens shift connection

Code 5233: lens vertical shift position - requested target not reached (Warning)

42

Situation

Solution

The activated lens file does not

correspond with the lens mounted
on the projector.

Activate a lens file which does correspond with the mounted lens or mount an other lens
which correspond with the lens file you want to activate.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Corrupt lens file.

Delete all current lens files and create new lens files. Note that each time the lens
is removed new lens files has to be created. Setup all new lens files away from the
maximum limitation of the lens zoom. It is possible that lens file was originally created at
the maximum or minimum zoom capabilities of the lens zoom. Program correct lens type
into communicator under Advanced/lens parameters and recreate the lens files.

The final lens position lays very

close to the mechanical limits which
disable the motorized lens position.

Position the lens manually, or reposition the projector so that the lens position lies further
away from the mechanical limits, or try to use another lens which range is more suitable.
Setup all new lens files away from the maximum limitation of the lens zoom. It is possible
that lens file was originally created at the maximum or minimum zoom capabilities of
the lens zoom. Program correct lens type into communicator under Advanced/lens
parameters and recreate the lens files.

Disconnected wire unit of the vertical

shift motor of the motorized lens
holder.

Remove the front cover of the projector and check if the wire unit is connected with the
shift motor. See reference 1 image 4-21.

Disconnected wire unit on the Signal

Backplane

Remove the front cover of the projector and check if the wire unit (reference 2
image 4-21) is connected with the Signal backplane.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Malfunction shift motor of the

motorized lens holder.

Use the local keypad to shift the image on the screen vertically. If unsuccessful, replace
the vertical shift motor of the motorized lens holder.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection).

Replace the Signal Backplane, see "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Malfunction SMPS board which

supplies power to the lens.

Replace the SMPS board. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

2
1

Image 4-21
Vertical lens shift connection

Code 5280: ambient - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code: ambient - temperature high.
Situation

Solution

Ambient temperature too high.

Check the ambient temperature at the air inlets of the projector. Make sure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed 35C (95F).

Blocked filter at the front side of the

projector.

Clean the front filter or replace with new one. See "Removing the front dust filter",
page 387

Malfunction air extraction system.

Check the condition of the air extraction system. The air extraction system must be
capable of removing minimum 6,65 m/min or 235 CFM per installed digital projector.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5281: ambient - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Blocked high density filter at the front

side of the projector.

Replace the front high density filter with a new one. See "Removing the front dust filter",
page 387.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

43

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Ambient temperature too high.

Check the ambient temperature at the air inlets of the projector. Make sure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed 35C (95F).

Malfunction air extraction system.

Check the condition of the air extraction system. The air extraction system must be
capable of removing minimum 6,65 m/min or 235 CFM per installed digital projector.

Code 5284: ambient - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board, see "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5285: ambient - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5290: dmd blue - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5291: dmd blue - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 5291: dmd blue - temperature high (Warning)

44

Situation

Solution

Blocked filter of the Heat Exchanger.

The other DMD temperatures are
too high as well.

Clean filter of the heat exchanger (bottom side) or replace with a new oner. See service
manual chapter "Removal of the heat exchanger", page 222.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit. Most likely the other DMD
temperatures are too high as well.

Check of the cooling circuit of the Light Processor is connected with the pump and
heat exchanger.

The Peltier element (TEC) of

the DMD in the blue channel is
disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Check if the wire unit (reference 23 image 4-22) of the Peltier element (TEC) of the DMD
in the blue channel is connected with the Signal Backplane.

The wire units of two Peltier

elements (TEC) or there respective
temperature sensors (NTCs)
have been swapped. While the
temperature of one DMD is too high,
the other will most likely be too low.

Check if the wire units of all Peltiers (TEC) and all temperature sensors (NTCs) are
plugged in their respective connector sockets on the Signal Backplane. See image 4-22.

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board. The LED +VTEC on
the Fan Control board remains off.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +VTEC voltage on pin 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 of the

connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-23.

Malfunction Peltier element (TEC) of

the involved DMD. Use the diode
test of a multi-meter to check out
the Peltier. Polarity doesnt matter.
The Peltier is not OK in case the
measured value is higher then 0,01
volt.

Remove the Light Processor from its compartment and contact Barco for further
instructions.

Poor assembly of DMD or Peltier +

cooler block.

Remove the Light Processor from its compartment and contact Barco for further
instructions.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the blue
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Note that there are two temperature sensors per channel. The first sensor is visible on
top of the cooling block. The second sensor is located at the front of the DMD.

If the +VTEC voltage is about 16V then replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing
a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board. See
"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327..

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

23

13

Image 4-22
Temp sensor and Peltier connection blue DMD

24
+24V

+VTEC
13
++12V

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13

24

GND

13

Image 4-23

Code 5293: dmd blue - temperature low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The electronics of the Light

Processor Unit remains off due to a
low DMD temperature.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs (higher then 10C (50F)). Let
the projector acclimate. Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensation.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
DMD of the blue channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Code 5294: dmd blue - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire units of the temperature

sensors are disconnected from the
Signal Backplane.

Check if the wire units (reference 3 image 4-22) of the temperature sensors are plugged
into their sockets on the Signal Backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensors (reference
3 image 4-22) which measures the
temperature of the DMD of the blue
channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
blue channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

45

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5295: dmd blue - temperature sensor short (Error)
Situation

Solution

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensors (reference
3 image 4-22) which measures the
temperature of the DMD of the blue
channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
blue channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Code 5300: dmd green - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5301 : dmd green - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 5301: dmd green - temperature high (Error)

46

Situation

Solution

Blocked filter of the Heat Exchanger.

The other DMD temperatures are
too high as well.

Clean filter of the heat exchanger (bottom side) or replace with a new oner. See "Clean
the dust filter on the bottom side", page 389.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit. Most likely the other DMD
temperatures are too high as well.

Check of the cooling circuit of the Light Processor is connected with the pump and
heat exchanger.

The Peltier element (TEC) of

the DMD in the green channel
is disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Check if the wire unit (reference 22 image 4-24) of the Peltier element (TEC) of the DMD
in the green channel is connected with the Signal Backplane.

The wire units of two Peltier

elements (TEC) or there respective
temperature sensors (NTCs)
have been swapped. While the
temperature of one DMD is too high,
the other will most likely be too low.

Check if the wire units of all Peltiers (TEC) and all temperature sensors (NTCs) are
plugged in their respective connector sockets on the Signal Backplane. See image 4-24.

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board. The LED +VTEC on
the Fan Control board remains off.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +VTEC voltage on pin 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 of the

connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-23.

Malfunction Peltier element (TEC) of

the involved DMD. Use the diode
test of a multi-meter to check out
the Peltier. Polarity doesnt matter.
The Peltier is not OK in case the
measured value is higher then 0,01
volt.

Remove the Light Processor from its compartment and contact Barco for further
instructions.

Poor assembly of DMD or Peltier +

cooler block.

Remove the Light Processor from its compartment and contact Barco for further
instructions.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the green
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Note that there are two temperature sensors per channel. The first sensor is visible on
top of the cooling block. The second sensor is located at the front of the DMD.

If the +VTEC voltage is about 16V then replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing
a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board. See
"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327..

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
2

22

12

Image 4-24
Temp sensor and Peltier connection green DMD

Code 5303: dmd green - temperature low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The electronics of the Light

Processor Unit remains off due to a
low DMD temperature.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs (higher then 10C (50F)). Let
the projector acclimate. Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensate.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
DMD of the green channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Code 5304: dmd green - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire units of the temperature

sensors are disconnected from the
Signal Backplane.

Check if the wire units (reference 2 image 4-24) of the temperature sensors are plugged
into their sockets on the Signal Backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensors (reference
2 image 4-24) which measures the
temperature of the DMD of the green
channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
green channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Code 5305: dmd green - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensors (reference
2 image 4-24) which measures the
temperature of the DMD of the green
channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
green channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Code 5310: lamp - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5311 : lamp - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table can
be applied.

Code 5311: lamp - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Ambient temperature too high.

Check the ambient temperature at the air inlets of the projector. Make sure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed 35C (95F).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

47

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Blocked filters.

Check filters. Clean filthy filters or replace with new ones.

Malfunction air extraction system.

Check customer air extraction system for adequate extraction. The air extraction system
must be capable of removing minimum 6,65 m/min or 235 CFM per installed digital
projector.

Malfunction lamp anode fan or lamp

cathode fan.

Check the speed and voltage of the lamp anode and lamp cathode fan. Replace any
malfunction fan.

Code 5314: lamp - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 3 image 4-25)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Plug the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal Backplane.

Disconnected wire (reference

2image 4-25) units between Signal
Backplane and temperature sensor
in the air outlet channel of the
projector.

Check the connection between the wire units. The connection is made behind the back
cover.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor (reference
1 image 4-25).

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor

(reference 1 image 4-25).

Replace the temperature sensor. Temperature sensor is visible through the air outlet
on top of the projector.

Image 4-25
Lamp temperature sensor connection

48

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5315: lamp - temperature sensor short (Error)
Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

of the temperature sensor (reference
1 & 2image 4-25), which measures
the temperature in the channel of the
air outlet of the Lamp House. When
disconnecting the wire unit of the
temperature sensor from the Signal
Backplane (reference 3 image 4-25)
the error code is changed to lamp temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor

(reference 1 image 4-25), which
measures the temperature in the
channel of the air outlet of the Lamp
House. When disconnecting the wire
unit of the temperature sensor from
the Signal Backplane (reference 3
image 4-25 the error code is changed
to lamp - temperature sensor open.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Code 5320: fcb - force lps/lamp off (Error)

Situation

Solution

The Fan Control & Motor board

forces to switch off the Lamp Power
Supply due to an Error.

Look for other errors in the log files and try to solve them.

Malfunction Fan Control & Motor

board.

This can be due to:

Overtemperature

Lamp house not connected.

Light processor is not connected.

Replace the Fan Control & Motor board. See "Removing a board in the card cage",
page 263.

Code 5331: pfc heatsink - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Ambient temperature too high.

Check the ambient temperature at the air inlets of the projector. Make sure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed 35C (95F).

Blocked front filter.

Clean the filter at the front side of the projector or replace with a new one. See
"Removing the front dust filter", page 387.

Malfunction SMPS module

Replace the SMPS module, see "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5340: dmd red - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5341 : dmd red - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table can
be applied.

Code 5341: dmd red - temperature high (Error)

Situation

Solution

Blocked filter of the Heat Exchanger.

The other DMD temperatures are
too high as well.

Clean filter of the heat exchanger or replace with a new one. See "Clean the dust filter
on the bottom side", page 389.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor is excluded by
mistake from the main liquid cooling
circuit. Most likely the other DMD
temperatures are too high as well.

Check of the cooling circuit of the Light Processor is connected with the pump and
heat exchanger.

The Peltier element (TEC) of

the DMD in the red channel is
disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Check if the wire unit (reference 21 image 4-26) of the Peltier element (TEC) of the DMD
in the red channel is connected with the Signal Backplane.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

49

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

The wire unit of the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the DMD in the red
channel is disconnected from the
Signal Backplane.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-26) of the temperature sensor (NTC) of the
DMD in the red channel is connected with the Signal Backplane.

The wire units of two Peltier

elements (TEC) or there respective
temperature sensors (NTCs)
have been swapped. While the
temperature of one DMD is too high,
the other will most likely be too low.

Check if the wire units of all Peltiers (TEC) and all temperature sensors (NTCs) are
plugged in their respective connector sockets on the Signal Backplane. See image 4-26.

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board. The LED +VTEC on
the Fan Control board remains off.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +VTEC voltage on pin 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 of the

connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-23.

Malfunction Peltier element (TEC) of

the involved DMD. Use the diode
test of a multi-meter to check out
the Peltier. Polarity doesnt matter.
The Peltier is not OK in case the
measured value is higher then 0,01
volt.

Remove the Light Processor from its compartment and contact Barco for further
instructions.

Poor assembly of DMD or Peltier +

cooler block.

Remove the Light Processor from its compartment and contact Barco for further
instructions.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the red
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Note that there are two temperature sensors per channel. The first sensor is visible on
top of the cooling block. The second sensor is located at the front of the DMD.

If the +VTEC voltage is about 16V then replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing
a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board. See
"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327..

21

11

Image 4-26
Temp sensor and Peltier connection green DMD

Code 5343: dmd red - temperature low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The electronics of the Light

Processor Unit remains off due to a
low DMD temperature.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs (higher then 10C (50F)). Let
the projector acclimate. Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensation.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
DMD of the red channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Code 5344: dmd red - temperature sensor open (Error)

50

Situation

Solution

Wire units of the temperature

sensors are disconnected from the
Signal Backplane.

Check if the wire units (reference 1 image 4-26) of the temperature sensors are plugged
into their sockets on the Signal Backplane.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensors (reference
1 image 4-26) which measures the
temperature of the DMD of the red
channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the red
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

Code 5345: dmd red - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensors (reference
1 image 4-27) which measures the
temperature of the DMD of the red
channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the red
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction Light Processor Unit. It is too critical to replace this temperature sensor
in the field. The replacement of this temperature sensor must be done at factory or
at an authorized service center.

21

11

Image 4-27
Temp sensor and Peltier connection green DMD

Code 5351: smps primary heatsink - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Ambient temperature too high.

Check the ambient temperature at the air inlets of the projector. Make sure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed 35C (95F).

Blocked front filter.

Clean the filter at the front side of the projector or replace with a new one. See
"Removing the front dust filter", page 387.

Malfunction SMPS module

Replace the SMPS module.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5361: smps secondary heatsink - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Ambient temperature too high.

Check the ambient temperature at the air inlets of the projector. Make sure that the
ambient temperature does not exceed 35C (95F).

Blocked front filter.

Clean the filter at the front side of the projector or replace with a new one. See
"Removing the front dust filter", page 387.

Malfunction SMPS module

Replace the SMPS module.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

51

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5364: smps secondary heatsink - temperature sensor open (Error)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction SMPS module

Replace the SMPS module. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

Code 5365: smps secondary heatsink - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction SMPS module

Replace the SMPS module. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

Code 5431: cold mirror fan - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

24
+24V

+VTEC
13
++12V

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13

24

GND

13

Image 4-28

Code 5432: cold mirror fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably proceeded by the warning code 5433 : cold mirror fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 5433: cold mirror fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

52

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the brown/red

wire unit (reference 2 image 4-29)
of the cold mirror fan (reference 1
image 4-29).

Remove the top cover of the projector, pull out the top dust filter to access the fan
connection. Check the insulation of the wire unit.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If the wire unit of the fan is not repairable, replace the Cold Mirror fan. See "Removal
of the cold mirror assembly", page 141.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-29
Cold mirror fan connection

Code 5441: engine fan - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5442: engine fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5443: engine fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can be
applied.

Code 5443: engine fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

(reference 21 image 4-30) of the
Light Processor fan (reference 1
image 4-30). Note that this fan is
located between the Card Cage
compartment and Light Processor
compartment.

Check the insulation of the wire unit of the fan. The fan is accessible via the Card Cage.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and/or fan. See "Light processor
compartment fan", page 366.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

53

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-30
Light processor fan

Code 5451: heat exchanger fan - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5452: heat exchanger fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably proceeded by the warning code 5453: heat exchanger fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting
table can be applied.

Code 5453: heat exchanger fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

54

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire units

(reference 1 image 4-31) of the fan
(reference 2 image 4-31) of the Heat
Exchanger.

Remove the left cover of the projector and pull out the Heat Exchanger assembly. Check
the insulation of the wire units of the fans in the assembly.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If the wire unit of the fan is not repairable, replace the fan. See "Heat exchanger
fan", page 378

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-31
Heat exchanger fan

Code 5461: lamp anode fan - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5462: lamp anode fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably proceeded by the warning code 5463: lamp anode fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 5463: lamp anode fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

(reference 2 image 4-32) of the
Anode fan (reference 1 image 4-32).

Check the insulation of the wire unit of the Anode fan. The Anode fan is located below
the compartment of the Light Processor.
1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable replace the Anode fan. See "Lamp anode fan", page 374.

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Image 4-32
Anode fan connection

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

55

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5471: lamp cathode fan - voltage high (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5472: lamp cathode fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably proceeded by the warning code 5473: lamp cathode fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 5473: lamp cathode fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit (reference 1 image 4-33)
of the Cathode fan (reference 3
image 4-33).

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

To Check the insulation of the wire unit of the Cathode fan, pull out the wire unit
(reference 1 image 4-33). The Cathode fan is located at the right inner side of the Lamp
compartment.
1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable replace the Cathode fan. See "Lamp cathode fan", page 369.

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Image 4-33
Cathode fan connections

56

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5491: smps fan - voltage high (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5492: smps fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5493: smps fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can be
applied.

Code 5493: smps fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit (reference 3 & 4image 4-34)
of the SMPS fans (reference 1 &
2image 4-34).

Check the insulation of the wire unit of the SMPS fans. The two SMPS fans are located
behind the front filter (two lower fans).

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable replace the Cathode fan. See "Lamp cathode fan", page 369.

4
3

Image 4-34
SMPS fans connection

Code 5531: pump - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5532: pump - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5633: pump - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can be
applied.
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

57

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5533: pump - voltage low (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

(reference 1 image 4-35) of the
pump .

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable replace the pump. See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor",
page 228 or "Replacement of the complete cooling pump", page 232.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Image 4-35
Pump connections

Code 5551: tec - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +VTEC voltage on pin 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 of the

connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 16V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5553: tec - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

of one of three Peltier elements
(TEC) causing a short circuit with
the projector chassis. Disconnecting
the wire unit of the damaged Peltier
element from the Signal Backplane
will clear the warning.

Check the wire units of each Peltier element.

One of the Peltier elements causes

a short circuit.

Replace the Light Processor unit. Return the malfunction Light Processor to factory for
repair. See "Light Processor assembly", page 163.

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +VTEC voltage on pin 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 of the

connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the Light Processor unit. Return the malfunction Light
Processor to factory for repair. See "Light Processor assembly", page 163.

If the measured voltage is about 16V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.
58

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5571: lamp rear fan - voltage high (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5572: lamp rear fan - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5573: lamp rear fan - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can
be applied.

Code 5573: lamp rear fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

(reference 2 image 4-36) of the fan
(reference 1 image 4-36).

Check the insulation of the wire unit of the fan.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection, reference 3 image 4-36)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and/or fan. See "Lamp Info Module
fan", page 383.

3
1

Image 4-36
Lamp rear fan connections

Code 5621: electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5622: electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage too low (Error)
This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5623: electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can be applied.
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

59

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5623: electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage low (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

(reference 2 image 4-37) of the
upper fan (reference 1 image 4-37)
for the Card Cage electronics. The
fan is the upper fan located behind
the dust filter at the front of the
projector.

Remove the dust filter at the front side of the projector and check the insulation of the
wire unit of the fan.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and/or fan. See "Card cage fans",
page 362.

Image 4-37
Card cage, upper fan connection

Code 5631: electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 5632: electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage too low (Error)
This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5633: electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can be applied.

60

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5633: electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage low (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-28.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

(reference 2 image 4-38) of the lower
fan (reference 1 image 4-38) for the
Card Cage electronics. The fan is
the lower fan located behind the dust
filter at the front of the projector.

Remove the dust filter at the front side of the projector and check the insulation of the
wire unit of the fan.

Malfunction Signal Backplane (bad

connection)

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and/or fan. See "Card cage fans",
page 362.

Image 4-38
Card cage, lower fan connection

Code 5640: lamp power supplies - zero lamp power supplies detected (Error)
Situation

Solution

Disconnected wire unit between

the Signal Backplane and the LPS
module (reference 4, LPS side and
reference 5 Signal backplane side
image 4-39).

Reconnect the wire unit between the Signal Backplane and the LPS module.

Disconnected wire unit between

the CTLB IN and CTLB OUT
sockets of the LPS units (reference
3 image 4-39).

Reconnect the wire unit between the CTLB IN and CTLB OUT sockets of the LPS
units.

Malfunction of one of the LPS units.

The orange LED (Heartbeat) of the
malfunction LPS is not blinking.

Replace the whole LPS module. See "Removing the LPS module", page 333.

Defect Signal Backplane.

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

61

4. Troubleshooting

1
2

Image 4-39
Mains and CTRL connection LPS

Code 5641: lamp power supplies - lamp is on, but smps is off (Error)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction SMPS module.

Replace the SMPS module. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

Malfunction LPS module.

Replace the LPS module. See "Removing the LPS module", page 333.

Defect Signal Backplane.

Replace the Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Code 5642: lamp power supplies - at least one lamp power supply could not be detected (Error)

62

Situation

Solution

Disconnected wire unit between

the CTRL IN and CTRL OUT
sockets of the LPS units (reference
3 image 4-40).

Reconnect the wire unit between the CTRL IN and CTRL OUT sockets of the LPS
units.

Malfunction of one of the LPS units.

The orange LED (Heartbeat) of the
malfunction LPS is not blinking.

Replace the whole LPS module. See "Removing the LPS module", page 333.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

1
2

Image 4-40
LPS connections

Code 5643: lamp power supplies - communication failed with at least one lamp power supply
(Error)
Situation

Solution

Disconnected wire unit between

the CTRL IN and CTRL OUT
sockets of the LPS units (reference
3 image 4-40).

Reconnect the wire unit between the CTRL IN and CTRL OUT sockets of the LPS
units.

Malfunction of one of the LPS units.

The orange LED (Heartbeat) of the
malfunction LPS is not blinking.

Replace the whole LPS module. See "Removing the LPS module", page 333.

Code 5644: lamp power supplies - lamp is on, but at least one lamp power supply is off (Error)
Situation

Solution

Main power cable disconnected from

one of the LPS units (reference 1 &
2 image 4-40).

Check if the main power cable is connected with the MAINS INPUT socket of the
LPS unit.

Disconnected wire unit between

the CTRL IN and CTRL OUT
sockets of the LPS units (reference
3 image 4-40).

Reconnect the wire unit between the CTRL IN and CTRL OUT sockets of the LPS
units.

Malfunction of one of the LPS

units. The red LED ERR of the
malfunction LPS unit flashes fast.

Replace the whole LPS module. See "Removing the LPS module", page 333.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

63

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5646: lamp - set lamp on failed (Error)
Situation
The lamp goes out immediately after
the ignition or does not go on at
all. SMPS and LPS seems to work
normally. This situation can be the
result of a bad lamp or SPG module.
See chapter "Start Pulse Generator",
page 353.

Solution

Install another xenon lamp in case the voltage on the LAMP OUT pins is 140 volt
and you hear the SPG module three times clicking to ignite the lamp.

Replace the SPG module in case the voltage value on the LAMP OUT pins is 140
volt and you do NOT hear the SPG module clicking to ignite the lamp.

Replace the LPS modules in case the voltage value on the LAMP OUT pins is
below 140 volt and the lamp is not ignited.

Note: The ambient noise must be low to hear the SPG clicking in an attempt to ignite
the lamp.

Code 5647: lamp - lamp is off due to an error (Error)

Situation

Solution

The Lamp Power Supply was

triggered to switch off the lamp due
to an error.

Check the projector log files for other listed errors and solve these errors first.

Malfunction Lamp Power Supply

(LPS).

Replace the Lamp Power Supply unit. See "Removing the LPS module", page 333.

Defect Lamp installed.

Replace the Lamp. See "Lamps and lamp house", page 109.

Code 5654: lamp run time - read failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

Lamp house not correctly inserted

Check if the lamp house is properly installed. Ensure that the three fixation screws
(reference 1 image 4-16) of the lamp house are fastened.

Lamp Info Module with old firmware.

Check lamp info module firmware version in the "version info" area of the communicator.
If mismatch is detected then run update.

Malfunction Lamp Info Module.

Replace the Lamp Info Module. See "Replacement of the Lamp Info module", page 129.

Code 5657: lamp run time - exceeds maximum (Error)

Situation

Solution

The lamp inside the lamp house has

exceeded its maximum run time.

Replace the lamp and reset hours and bulb type. See "Lamps and lamp house", page
109.

Code 5658: lamp run time - read limits failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

Lamp house not correctly inserted

Check if the lamp house is properly installed. Ensure that the three fixation screws
(reference 1 image 4-16) of the lamp house are fastened.

Lamp Info Module with old firmware.

Check lamp info module firmware version in the "version info" area of the communicator.
If mismatch is detected then run update.

Malfunction Lamp Info Module.

Replace the Lamp Info Module. See "Replacement of the Lamp Info module", page 129.

Code 5659: lamp run time - warning (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The lamp inside the lamp house is

about to exceed its maximum run
time. Status light lights up blue
(notification state)

Replace the lamp as soon as possible. See "Lamps and lamp house", page 109.

Code 5670: dowser - set dowser open failed (Error)

64

Situation

Solution

Wire unit Dowser disconnected

(reference 1 image 4-41).

Reconnect the dowser wire unit with the blue wire unit on the light processor unit
(reference 1 image 4-41).

Wire unit Dowser disconnected from

the Signal Backplane (reference 2
image 4-41.

Reconnect the blue wire unit of the Dowser with the Signal Backplane.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Blocked blade of the Dowser

Check if noting is blocking the blade of the Dowser. Do NOT force the blade from the
open position to the closed position or vice versa.

Damaged wire unit of the Dowser

Try to repair the damaged wire unit. If not possible replace the Dowser unit. See
"Replacement of the dowser (shutter)", page 180.

Malfunction motor of the Dowser unit

Replace the Dowser unit. See "Replacement of the dowser (shutter)", page 180.

Malfunction Fan Control board

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

1
2

Image 4-41
Dowser connection

Code 5800: ti-icp - system status = fail (Error)

This is a generic TI error. Use the Communicator to make a detailed analysis. Go to Diagnostics > Actual > Cinema Front End
Status > Detailed status > Error Messages. Possible error messages are:
Situation

Solution

ICP self test - ICP frame memory

test failed

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

ICP self test - ICP data path

signature test failed

Check the connections to the formatters.

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

ICP Normal Configuration Error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

ICP Boot Configuration Error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

FMT Normal Configuration Error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

FMT Boot Configuration Error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

FMT Satellite Configuration Error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

1.20V Supply out of range

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

1.80V Supply out of range

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263

2.50V Supply out of range

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263

3.30V Supply out of range

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263

ICP FPGA Temperature out of range

Temperature on ICP is too high. Current active fans have errors. Solve the fan problem
first.
For a correct airflow, check if all covers are closed.
Ambient temperature is too high. Reduce the ambient temperature.

ICP FMT FPGA Temperature out of

range

Temperature on ICP is too high. Current active fans have errors. Solve the fan problem
first.
For a correct airflow, check if all covers are closed.
Ambient temperature is too high. Reduce the ambient temperature.

ICP Flash Update Error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

ICP real time clock error

Replace the ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Satellite Hardware Mismatch

Replace light processor assembly. See "Light Processor assembly", page 163.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

65

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5801: ti-link-decryptor - service door tamper event (Error)
Situation

Solution

A board in the Card Cage has been

removed.

Clear the security warning. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the projector",
page 291.
Brief procedure to clear the security warning:

The cover plate of the Light

Processor compartment has
been removed. Security switches
are activated (reference 1 & 2
image 4-43)

1.

Ensure the cover plate of the Light Processor compartment is properly installed.

2.

Ensure that all boards in the Card Cage are properly installed.

3.

Start up the projector.

4.

Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket (image 4-42).

5.

Enter the pin code within 5 seconds.

Clear the security warning. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the projector",
page 291.
Brief procedure to clear the security warning:
1.

Ensure the cover plate of the Light Processor compartment is properly installed.

2.

Ensure that all boards in the Card Cage are properly installed.

3.

Start up the projector.

4.

Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket.

5.

Enter the pin code within 5 seconds.

Defect security switches (reference

1 & 2 image 4-43).

If all compartments and devices are installed and security error will not authorize,
replace DCI security switches.

Malfunction Signal Backplane

If switch replacement is not the solution, then replace Signal Backplane. See
"Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Image 4-42
Dallas key slot

Image 4-43
Light processor cover tamper switches

Code 5807: ti-icp - read system status failed (Error)

The Barco controller can not read the status of the ICP.

66

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

ICP board is not correctly inserted

Insert the ICP board properly.

ICP crash. The most left LED is not

blinking

Restart the projector.

ICP is being upgrading

Wait until projector reset after the upgrade.

Code 5812: ti-icp - read satellite info failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

A wire unit to one of the formatters

is not correctly connected to the
Signal backplane (reference 1, 2, 3
for green on image 4-44).

Check the connections between the formatters and the Signal backplane on the Signal
backplane side.

A wire unit on one of the formatters

is not correctly connected (reference
4, 5, 6 for red on image 4-44)

Check the connections between the formatters and the Signal backplane on the
formatter side.

4
5

1
2

Image 4-44
Formatter connections

Code 5813: ti-icp - satellite firmware mismatch (Error)

Situation

Solution

ICP software corrupt

Reinstall the ICP software.

Use the ICP and Enigma control program,

Go to the Connection tab and select external ICP port (image 4-45).

Login with the credentials Service and Heal Thyself.

Go to Load/Install (image 4-46).

Install the Release from Slot in the selected slot.

Restart the projector.

This error can occur when you move ICP boards between projectors which have a different DMD configuration. (E.g. switching an
ICP between a 1.2 and 0.98 inch system)

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

67

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-45
Login

Image 4-46
Reinstall software

68

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5814: ti-icp - self test = fail (Error)
Situation

Solution

A wire unit to one of the formatters

is not correctly connected to the
Signal backplane (reference 1, 2, 3
for green on image 4-44).

Check the connections between the formatters and the Signal backplane on the Signal
backplane side.
The TI log file will indicate which formatter connection has failed
If problem remains, replace ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage",
page 263.

A wire unit on one of the formatters

is not correctly connected (reference
4, 5, 6 for red on image 4-44).

Check the connections between the formatters and the Signal backplane on the
formatter side.
If problem remains, replace ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage",
page 263.

Code 5815: ti-icp - certificate error (Error)

Situation

Solution

New ICP software version installed

but no reboot of projector has
happen.

Reboot projector

Error remains occurring after

different boot cycles.

Replace ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5816: ti-icp - key error (Error)

Situation

Solution

New ICP software version installed

but no reboot of projector has
happen.

Reboot projector

Error remains occurring after

different boot cycles.

Replace ICP board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5817: ti-icp - icp board not detected (Error)

Situation

Solution

There is no ICP board installed.

Install an ICP board.

ICP board not correctly inserted.

Re-install the ICP board.

Code 5830: ti-link-decryptor - no communication (Error)

Situation

Solution

Link decryptor is not correctly seated.

Reseat the link decryptor.

If problem remains, replace the link decryptor.

Code 5831: ti-link-decryptor - system error (Error)

With the Communicator, go to Diagnostics Actual Link Decryptor status Error messages
The following errors can occur:
Error

Solution

Link decryptor - User loader integrity

error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Main application

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - RNG hardware

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - DRNG hardware

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - RSA algorithm

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - AES algorithm

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

69

4. Troubleshooting
Error

Solution

Link decryptor - HMAC algorithm

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - SHA algorithm

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - TLS integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - FPGA configuration

integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - FPGA cinelink 2

decryption integrity error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Real time clock error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - FPGA configuration

error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - FPGA temperature

out of range

Temperature on the link decryptor is to high. Check for other fan or temperature error
messages. Check if the front cover of the HDSDI module is closed.

Link decryptor - RNG Hardware

duplicate output error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - DRNG Hardware

duplicate output error

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - 1.20V supply out of

range

Replace SMPS. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.
Replace Signal backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.
Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - 1.80V supply out of

range

Replace SMPS. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.
Replace Signal backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.
Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - 2.50V supply out of

range

Replace SMPS. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.
Replace Signal backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.
Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - 3.30V regulator out

of range

Replace SMPS. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.
Replace Signal backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.
Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Security tamper

The link decryptor has been tampered. Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of
the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Top side security

enclosure open

The top side enclosure has been tampered. Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement
of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Bottom side security

enclosure open

The bottom side enclosure has been tampered. Replace link decryptor. See
"Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Software command

Zeroization

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Link decryptor - Physical marriage

tamper

The ICP and/or link decryptor have been removed and inserted again. You need to
remarry both. Start the clear security warning procedure. See "Authorization to clear
security warning on the projector", page 291.

Link decryptor - Logical marriage

tamper

The ICP and link decryptor are not a couple. This means one of both has been replaced.
You need to marry both. Start the clear security warning procedure. See "Authorization
to clear security warning on the projector", page 291.

Link decryptor - Service door tamper

The Card Cage cover has been removed. Clear the security warning. See "Authorization
to clear security warning on the projector", page 291.
The cover plate of the Light Processor compartment has been removed. Clear the
security warning. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the projector", page
291.
Defect security switches. If all compartments and devices are installed and security error
will not authorize, replace DCI security switches.
Malfunction Signal Backplane. If switch replacement is not the solution, then replace
Signal Backplane. See "Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

70

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Error

Solution

Link decryptor - Service log error

The Security Log Error indicates that there is no more room to write log entries in the link
decryptor log file.
When this error is active, the DCI compliant Server needs to extract the log data (via
ASM/TLS session) from the link decryptor Security Log. Reads of the security log by any
other entity/means will not impact this error. This error will remain active until the Server
reads enough log entries to create room for 512 log entries. This can take some time.
Playback will be prohibited (black image) as long as this error is active.

Link decryptor - Security battery low

warning

The battery of the link-decryptor is low. Leave the projector on for some time to recharge
the battery.

Link decryptor - Security log warning

The security log warning indicates that there are less than 512 log entry locations
available in the link decryptor log before the log is full. The attached server needs to
read the log which will clear the log of the projector.
When this warning is active, the DCI compliant server needs to extract the log data (via
ASM/TLS session) from the link decryptor Security Log. This can take some time. Reads
of the security log by any other entity/means will not impact this warning.

Code 5832: ti-link-decryptor - security tamper event (Error)

Situation

Solution

The link decryptor has been

tampered.

Replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor", page 289.

Code 5833: ti-link-decryptor - logical marriage tamper event (Error)

Situation

Solution

The ICP and link decryptor are not a

couple.

This means one of both has been replaced. You need to marry both. Start the
clear security warning procedure. See "Authorization to clear security warning on
the projector", page 291. Together with this error you will always have an error
ti-link-decryptor physical marriage tamper event.
Brief procedure to clear the security warning and marriage ICP and decryptor:
1.

Ensure the cover plate of the Light Processor compartment is properly installed.

2.

Ensure that all boards in the Card Cage are properly installed.

3.

Start up the projector.

4.

Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket (image 4-42).

5.

Enter the pin code within 5 seconds.

Code 5834: ti-link-decryptor - physical marriage tamper event (Error)

Situation

Solution

The ICP and/or link decryptor have

been removed and inserted again.

You need to remarry both. Start the clear security warning procedure. See "Authorization
to clear security warning on the projector", page 291.
Brief procedure to clear the security warning and marriage ICP and decryptor:
1.

Ensure the cover plate of the Light Processor compartment is properly installed.

2.

Ensure that all boards in the Card Cage are properly installed.

3.

Start up the projector.

4.

Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket (image 4-42).

5.

Enter the pin code within 5 seconds.

Code 5835: ti-link-decryptor - security log is almost full (Error)

Situation

Solution

The security log almost full indicates

that there are less than 512 log
entry locations available in the link
decryptor log before the log is full.

When this warning is active, the DCI compliant server needs to extract the log data (via
ASM/TLS session) from the link decryptor Security Log. This can take some time. Reads
of the security log by any other entity/means will not impact this warning.

The attached server needs to read

the log which will clear the log of the
projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

71

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5836: ti-link-decryptor - security log is full (Error)
Situation

Solution

The Security Log is full indicates that

there is no more room to write log
entries in the link decryptor log file.

When this error is active, the DCI compliant Server needs to extract the log data (via
ASM/TLS session) from the link decryptor Security Log. Reads of the security log by any
other entity/means will not impact this error. This error will remain active until the Server
reads enough log entries to create room for 512 log entries. This can take some time.
Playback will be prohibited (black image) as long as this error is active.

Code 5837: ti-link-decryptor - read system status failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

Link decryptor is not correctly seated.

Reseat the link decryptor.

If problem remains, replace link decryptor. See "Replacement of the Link Decryptor",
page 289.

Code 5850: imb - no communication (Error)

Situation

Solution

No communication with media block

Check if the media block is well seated.

Replace the media block.

Code 5851: imb - service door tamper event (Error)

Situation

Solution

A board in the Card Cage has been

removed.

Clear the security warning. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the projector",
page 291.
Brief procedure to clear the security warning:

The cover plate of the Light

Processor compartment has
been removed. Security switches
are activated (reference 1 & 2
image 4-43).

1.

Ensure the cover plate of the Light Processor compartment is properly installed.

2.

Ensure that all boards in the Card Cage are properly installed.

3.

Start up the projector.

4.

Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket (image 4-42).

5.

Enter the pin code within 5 seconds.

Clear the security warning. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the projector",
page 291.
Brief procedure to clear the security warning:
1.

Ensure the cover plate of the Light Processor compartment is properly installed.

2.

Ensure that all boards in the Card Cage are properly installed.

3.

Start up the projector.

4.

Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket (image 4-42).

5.

Enter the pin code within 5 seconds.

Defect security switches (reference

1 & 2 image 4-43).

If all compartments and devices are installed and security error will not authorize,
replace DCI security switches.

Malfunction Signal Backplane

If switch replacement is not the solution, then replace Signal Backplane. See
"Replacement of the signal back plane", page 277.

Code 5853: imb - logical marriage tamper event (Error)

Situation

Solution

The ICP and Mediablock are not a

couple.

This means one of both has been replaced. You need to marry both. Start the clear
security warning procedure. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the
projector", page 291. Together with this error you will always have an error imb physical marriage tamper event.

Code 5854: imb - physical marriage tamper event (Error)

72

Situation

Solution

The ICP and/or lMediablock have

been removed and inserted again.

You need to remarry both. Start the clear security warning procedure. See "Authorization
to clear security warning on the projector", page 291.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5880: dolby 3d key-server - read status failed (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Exceptional software failure.

Reboot the projector.

Corrupt Dolby 3D key server

program. Unable to read the
Version Info from the Dolby
3D key server program via the
Communicator software.

Reinstall the Dolby 3D key server program on the projector. Use the Projector Toolset.

Code 5881: dolby 3d key-server - status = locked (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The content server does not support

Dolby 3D.

Check if the projector is connected with a Dolby 3D certified server.

Malfunction content server.

Check the Dolby certified content server.

As a temporally solution unlock the 3D key-server by pressing the button Manual unlock
in the 3D integrated color wheel menu of the Communicator software. Note that in this
case the 3D key-server remains unlocked for 24 hours.

Code 5882: 3d module - read status failed (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Exceptional software failure.

Reboot the projector.

There is no 3D color wheel installed

in the projector but the flag for 3D is
set in the Communicator software.

Either install the 3D color wheel unit or disable the 3D option in the Communicator
software.

The 3D color wheel unit is

disconnected from the Formatting
Interface Board.

Check the connection between the 3D color wheel unit and the Signal backplane.

Malfunction electronic board of the

3D color wheel unit.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

The color wheel can be rotated

by hand (spinning motor OK) and
be moved back and forward by
hand (retraction mechanism OK).
Note that to move the color wheel
manually you have to remove
the light processor unit from the
projector.
Malfunction of the 3D color wheel
unit.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

Code 5884: 3d module - change status failed due to dolby 3d key-server lock (Error)
Situation

Solution

Exceptional software failure.

Reboot the projector.

Corrupt Dolby 3D key server

program. Unable to read the
Version Info from the Dolby
3D key server program via the
Communicator software.

Reinstall the Dolby 3D key server program on the projector. Use the DC Toolset.

The content server does not support

Dolby 3D.

Check if the projector is connected with a Dolby 3D certified server.

Malfunction content server.

Check the Dolby certified content server.

As a temporally solution unlock the 3D key-server by pressing the button Manual unlock
in the 3D integrated color wheel menu of the Communicator software. Note that in this
case the 3D key-server remains unlocked for 24 hours.

Code 5885: 3d module - change status failed due to communication error (Error)
Situation

Solution

Exceptional software failure.

Reboot the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

73

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

There is no 3D color wheel installed

in the projector but the flag for 3D is
set in the Communicator software.

Either install the 3D color wheel unit or disable the 3D option in the Communicator
software.

The 3D color wheel unit is

disconnected from the Formatting
Interface Board.

Check the connection between the 3D color wheel unit and the Signal backplane.
Replace wire unit if damaged.

Malfunction electronic board of the

3D color wheel unit.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

The color wheel can be rotated

by hand (spinning motor OK) and
be moved back and forward by
hand (retraction mechanism OK).
Note that to move the color wheel
manually you have to remove
the light processor unit from the
projector.
Malfunction of the 3D color wheel
unit.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

Code 5890: 3d module - color wheel spin failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

Spinning motor disconnected.

Check the connection (reference D image 4-47) of the spinning motor. Replace wire
unit if damaged.

Feedback circuit of the spinning

motor disconnected.

Check the connection (reference A image 4-47) of the feedback circuit. Replace wire
unit if damaged.

Blocked color wheel.

Check if the 3D color wheel can turn freely. No mechanics preventing wheel to turn.

Malfunction 3D color wheel board.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

Malfunction spinning motor.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

C
A

D
Image 4-47
3D color wheel board connections.
A
B
C
D

Spinning motor feedback circuit.

Connection with Signal backplane
Wire unit between retraction motor and electronic board.
Wire unit between spinning motor and electronic board.

Code 5891: 3d module - color wheel in failed (Error)

74

Situation

Solution

Exceptional software failure.

Reboot the projector.

Retraction motor disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference C image 4-47) of the retraction motor is well inserted.
Replace wire unit if damaged.

Defect micro switch.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Mechanical mechanism is blocked.

The color wheel can not be moved
back and forward by hand. Note that
to move the color wheel manually
you have to remove the light
processor unit from the projector.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit in case you can not unlock the color wheel. Send
the blocked unit back to Barco.

Malfunction retraction motor.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

Code 5892: 3d module - color wheel out failed (Error)

Situation

Solution

Exceptional software failure.

Reboot the projector.

Retraction motor disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference C image 4-47) of the retraction motor is well inserted.
Replace wire unit if damaged.

Defect micro switch.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

Mechanical mechanism is blocked.

The color wheel can not be moved
back and forward by hand. Note that
to move the color wheel manually you
have to remove the light processor
unit from the projector.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit in case you can not unlock the color wheel. Send
the blocked unit back to Barco.

Malfunction retraction motor.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

Code 5893: 3d module - color wheel temperature too high (Error)

Situation

Solution

A high light pipe temperature

increases the temperature of the 3D
color wheel board.

Check the temperature of the light pipe.

Jammed wire unit of the spinning

motor.

Check the condition of the wire unit (reference D image 4-47) of the spinning motor.

Malfunction 3D color wheel board.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

Malfunction spinning motor.

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

Code 5894: 3d module - color wheel speed not ok (not locked) (Error)
Situation

Solution

Wrong 3D settings on the 3D content

server.

Check the 3D settings on the 3D content server. See Dolby or color wheel
documentation. The locking frequency for the 3D color wheel must be in the range of
48 and 72 Hz. You can verify the locking frequency via the Communicator software
menu 3D settings - integrated color wheel.

Feedback circuit of the spinning

motor disconnected.

Check the connection (reference A image 4-47) of the feedback circuit. Replace wire
unit if damaged.

Spinning motor disconnected.

Check the connection (reference D image 4-47) of the spinning motor. Replace wire
unit if damaged.

Malfunction 3D color wheel board.

Replace the electronic board of the 3D color wheel unit.

Malfunction spinning motor

Replace the whole 3D color wheel unit. Send the malfunction unit back to Barco.

Code 5960: light pipe - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5961: light pipe - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 5961: light pipe - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Interruption of the liquid cooling

circuit.

Check if the loop of the liquid cooling circuit is closed.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor Unit is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit.

Reconnect the cooling circuit of the Light Processor Unit with the pump and heat
exchanger.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

75

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

The pump of the water cooling is

electrical disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-48) of the pump is properly connected.

Blocked high density filter of the heat

exchanger.

Replace the high density filter. See "Clean the dust filter on the bottom side", page 389.

No or insufficient liquid inside the

cooling circuit. The pump is sucking
air and sounds noisier then normal.

Fill the cooling circuit with liquid and expel all air.

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.
See "Replacement of the complete cooling pump", page 232.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See "Cleaning
the cooling pump", page 226.

Defect temperature sensor on the

water cooling block of the Light Pipe
entrance.

Replace the temperature sensor on the Light Pipe entrance.

Misalignment of the lamp inside the

lamp house.

1.

Readjust the Z-alignment of the lamp. See "Realignment of the lamp in its reflector",
page 127.

2.

Replace the lamp house with a new lamp house. See "Removal of the lamp house",
page 112.

Misalignment of the cold mirror.

Readjust the cold mirror. See "Cold mirror assembly", page 139.

Image 4-48
Pump connections

Code 5964: light pipe - temperature sensor open (Error)

76

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 1image 4-49)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal Backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor which measures
the temperature of the water cooling
block of the light pipe entrance.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on the

water cooling block of the light pipe
entrance.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-49
Light pipe temperature sensor connection

Code 5965: light pipe - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit of the temperature sensor
(reference 1 image 4-49) which
measures the temperature of the
water cooling block of the light pipe
entrance. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 3 image 4-49)
of the temperature sensor from the
Formatting Interface Board the error
code is changed to light pipe temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on the

water cooling block of the light pipe
entrance. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 1 image 4-49)
of the temperature sensor from the
Signal backplane, the error code is
changed to light pipe - temperature
sensor open.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Code 5970: dmd red front - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5971 : dmd red front - temperature high. The same troubleshooting
table can be applied.

Code 5971: dmd red front - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The wire unit of the temperature

sensor at the front of the DMD is
mistakenly switched with one of the
wire units of the other temperature
sensors of the Light Processor Unit.

Check if all wire units of the temperature sensors are plugged into their respective
sockets on the Signal Backplane.

The wire units of the Peltier elements

(TECs), mounted on the common
cooling block of the heat pipes, are
mistakenly switched.

Check if all wire units of the Peltier elements are plugged into their respective sockets on
the Signal Backplane (reference 1 image 4-50).

No thermal contact between heat

pipes and common cooling block
due to loose screws.

Check if the four screws, which attach the heat pipes of the involved channel to the
common cooling block, are fastened.

Malfunction Peltier element (TEC)

between heat pipes and common
cooling block. Use the diode test
of a multi-meter to check out the
Peltier. Polarity does not matter. The
Peltier is OK in case the measured
value is higher then 0,01 volt.

Remove the light processor from its compartment and replace the malfunction Peltier.
If problem persist, contact Barco for further instructions.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

77

4. Troubleshooting

Image 4-50
Red DMD front temperature sensor connection

Code 5973: dmd red front - temperature low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

DMD temperature low.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs. Let the projector acclimate to
the normal room temperature which should be higher then 10C (50F) and lower then
35C (95F). Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensate.

Malfunction Fan Control board. TEC

(Peltier) is continuously on.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

The temperature on the front side of

the DMD of the red channel is low.

If this problem persist, contact Barco for further instructions.

Code 5974: dmd red front - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 1 image 4-50)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal Backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor which measures
the temperature at the front side of
the DMD of the red channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction light processor.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the red
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction light processor.

Code 5975: dmd red front - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

of the temperature sensor which
measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 1 image 4-50)
of the temperature sensor from the
Signal Backplane the error code
is changed to dmd red front temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction light processor.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the red
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction light processor.

Code 5980: dmd green front - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5981: dmd green front - temperature high. The same troubleshooting
table can be applied.

78

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5981: dmd green front - temperature high (Warning)
Situation

Solution

The wire unit of the temperature

sensor at the front of the DMD is
mistakenly switched with one of the
wire units of the other temperature
sensors of the Light Processor Unit.

Check if all wire units of the temperature sensors are plugged into their respective
sockets on the Signal Backplane (reference 2 image 4-50.

The wire units of the Peltier elements

(TECs), mounted on the common
cooling block of the heat pipes, are
mistakenly switched.

Check if all wire units of the Peltier elements are plugged into their respective sockets
on the Signal Backplane.

No thermal contact between heat

pipes and common cooling block
due to loose screws.

Check if the four screws, which attach the heat pipes of the involved channel to the
common cooling block, are fastened.

Malfunction Peltier element (TEC)

between heat pipes and common
cooling block. Use the diode test
of a multi-meter to check out the
Peltier. Polarity does not matter. The
Peltier is OK in case the measured
value is higher then 0,01 volt.

Remove the light processor from its compartment and replace the malfunction Peltier.
If problem persist, contact Barco for further instructions.

Code 5983: dmd green front - temperature low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

DMD temperature low.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs. Let the projector acclimate to
the normal room temperature which should be higher then 10C (50F) and lower then
35C (95F). Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensate.

Malfunction Fan Control board. TEC

(Peltier) is continuously on.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

The temperature on the front side of

the DMD of the green channel is low.

If this problem persist, contact Barco for further instructions.

Code 5984: dmd green front - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 2 image 4-50)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
backplane

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor which measures
the temperature at the front side of
the DMD of the green channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction light processor.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the green
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction light processor.

Code 5985: dmd green front - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

of the temperature sensor which
measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the green
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 3 image 4-50)
of the temperature sensor from the
Signal backplane the error code
is changed to dmd green front temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction light processor.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the green
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction light processor.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

79

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5990: dmd blue front - temperature too high (Error)
This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 5991: dmd blue front - temperature high. The same troubleshooting
table can be applied.

Code 5991: dmd blue front - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

The wire unit of the temperature

sensor at the front of the DMD is
mistakenly switched with one of the
wire units of the other temperature
sensors of the Light Processor Unit.

Check if all wire units of the temperature sensors are plugged into their respective
sockets on the Signal Backplane (reference 3 image 4-50.

The wire units of the Peltier elements

(TECs), mounted on the common
cooling block of the heat pipes, are
mistakenly switched.

Check if all wire units of the Peltier elements are plugged into their respective sockets
on the Signal Backplane.

No thermal contact between heat

pipes and common cooling block
due to loose screws.

Check if the four screws, which attach the heat pipes of the involved channel to the
common cooling block, are fastened.

Malfunction Peltier element (TEC)

between heat pipes and common
cooling block. Use the diode test
of a multi-meter to check out the
Peltier. Polarity does not matter. The
Peltier is OK in case the measured
value is higher then 0,01 volt.

Remove the light processor from its compartment and replace the malfunction Peltier.
If problem persist, contact Barco for further instructions.

Code 5993: dmd blue front - temperature low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

DMD temperature low.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs. Let the projector acclimate to
the normal room temperature which should be higher then 10C (50F) and lower then
35C (95F). Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensate.

Malfunction Fan Control board. TEC

(Peltier) is continuously on.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

The temperature on the front side of

the DMD of the blue channel is low.

If this problem persist, contact Barco for further instructions.

Code 5994: dmd blue front - temperature sensor open (Error)

80

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 3 image 4-50)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
backplane.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal Backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor which measures
the temperature at the front side of
the DMD of the blue channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction light processor.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the blue
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction light processor.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 5995: dmd blue front - temperature sensor short (Error)
Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire unit

of the temperature sensor which
measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the blue
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 3image 4-50)
of the temperature sensor from the
Signal Backplane the error code
is changed to dmd blue front temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction light processor.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature at the
front side of the DMD of the red
channel.

Replace the whole Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair
the malfunction light processor.

Code 6000: block front - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 6001: block front - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 6001: block front - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Interruption of the liquid cooling

circuit.

Check if the loop of the liquid cooling circuit is closed.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor Unit is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit.

Reconnect the cooling circuit of the Light Processor Unit with the pump and heat
exchanger.

The pump of the water cooling is

electrical disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-51) of the pump is properly connected.

Blocked high density filter of the heat

exchanger (bottom side).

Clean or replace the high density filter. See "Clean the dust filter on the bottom side",
page 389.

No or insufficient liquid inside the

cooling circuit. The pump is sucking
air and sounds noisier then normal.

Start the top up procedure to fill the cooling circuit with liquid. See "Filling the liquid
cooling circuit", page 220.

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.
See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor", page 228 or "Replacement of
the complete cooling pump", page 232.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See "Cleaning
the cooling pump", page 226.

Image 4-51
Pump connections

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

81

4. Troubleshooting
Code 6004: block front - temperature sensor open (Error)
Situation

Solution

Wire unit of the temperature sensor

is disconnected from the Signal
backplane (reference 1 image 4-52.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor which measures
the temperature of the common
water cooling block of the heat pipes
which drain the heat from the front
of the DMDs.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
common water cooling block of the
heat pipes which drain the heat from
the front of the DMDs.

Replace the Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair the
malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Image 4-52

Code 6005: block front - temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit of the temperature sensor
which measures the temperature
of the common water cooling block
of the heat pipes which drain the
heat from the front of the DMDs.
When disconnecting the wire the
wire unit of the temperature sensor
from the Signal backplane the error
coded is changed to block front temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further
instructions to repair the malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Defect temperature sensor which

measures the temperature of the
common water cooling block of
the heat pipes which drain the
heat from the front of the DMDs.
When disconnecting the wire the
wire unit of the temperature sensor
from the Signal backplane the error
coded is changed to block front temperature sensor open.

Replace the Light Processor Unit. Contact Barco for further instructions to repair the
malfunction Light Processor Unit.

Code 6010: block red - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 6011: block red - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 6011: block red - temperature high (Warning)

82

Situation

Solution

Interruption of the liquid cooling

circuit.

Check if the loop of the liquid cooling circuit is closed.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor Unit is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit.

Reconnect the cooling circuit of the Light Processor Unit with the pump and heat
exchanger.

The pump of the water cooling is

electrical disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-51) of the pump is properly connected.

Blocked high density filter of the heat

exchanger (bottom filter).

Clean or replace the high density filter. See "Clean the dust filter on the bottom side",
page 389.

No or insufficient liquid inside the

cooling circuit. The pump is sucking
air and sounds noisier then normal.

Start the top up procedure to fill the cooling circuit with liquid. See "Filling the liquid
cooling circuit", page 220.

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.
See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor", page 228 or "Replacement of
the complete cooling pump", page 232.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See "Cleaning
the cooling pump", page 226.

Code 6014: block red - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 1 image 4-53)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
backplane.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor (Reference
1 image 4-53) which measures the
temperature of the water cooling
block of the red channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on

the water cooling block of the red
channel.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Image 4-53
Temperature sensor connection DMD blocks

Code 6015: block red- temperature sensor short (Error)

Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit of the temperature sensor
which measures the temperature of
the water cooling block of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 1 image 4-53)
of the temperature sensor from the
Signal backplane the error code is

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

83

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

changed to block red - temperature

sensor open.
Defect temperature sensor on
the water cooling block of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit of the temperature sensor
from the Signal backplane the error
code is changed to block red temperature sensor open.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Code 6020: block green - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 6021 : block green - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 6021: block green - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Interruption of the liquid cooling

circuit.

Check if the loop of the liquid cooling circuit is closed.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor Unit is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit.

Reconnect the cooling circuit of the Light Processor Unit with the pump and heat
exchanger.

The pump of the water cooling is

electrical disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-51) of the pump is properly connected.

Blocked high density filter of the heat

exchanger (bottom filter).

Clean or replace the filter. See "Clean the dust filter on the bottom side", page 389.

No or insufficient liquid inside the

cooling circuit. The pump is sucking
air and sounds noisier then normal.

Start the top up procedure to fill the cooling circuit with liquid. See "Filling the liquid
cooling circuit", page 220.

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.
See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor", page 228 or "Replacement of
the complete cooling pump", page 232.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See "Cleaning
the cooling pump", page 226.

Code 6024: block green - temperature sensor open (Error)

84

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 2 image 4-53)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
backplane.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor (Reference
2 image 4-53) which measures the
temperature of the water cooling
block of the red channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on

the water cooling block of the red
channel.

Replace the temperature sensor.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 6025: block green - temperature sensor short (Error)
Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit of the temperature sensor
which measures the temperature of
the water cooling block of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 2image 4-53)
of the temperature sensor from
the Signal backplane the error
code is changed to block green temperature sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on

the water cooling block of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit of the temperature sensor
from the Signal backplane the error
code is changed to block green temperature sensor open.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Code 6030: block blue - temperature too high (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 6031: block blue - temperature high. The same troubleshooting table
can be applied.

Code 6031: block blue - temperature high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Interruption of the liquid cooling

circuit.

Check if the loop of the liquid cooling circuit is closed.

The liquid cooling circuit of the

Light Processor Unit is mistakenly
excluded from the main liquid cooling
circuit.

Reconnect the cooling circuit of the Light Processor Unit with the pump and heat
exchanger.

The pump of the water cooling is

electrical disconnected.

Check if the wire unit (reference 1 image 4-51) of the pump is properly connected.

Blocked high density filter of the heat

exchanger (bottom filter).

Clean or replace the high density filter. See "Clean the dust filter on the bottom side",
page 389.

No or insufficient liquid inside the

cooling circuit. The pump is sucking
air and sounds noisier then normal.

Start the top up procedure to fill the cooling circuit with liquid. See "Filling the liquid
cooling circuit", page 220.

Malfunction pump of the cooling

circuit. You dont feel any vibrations
when touching the pump after
activating the Refill mode via the
Communicator software.

1.

Check the electrical resistance of the pump winding. Replace the pump if infinite.
See "Replacement of the pump motor and rotor", page 228 or "Replacement of
the complete cooling pump", page 232.

2.

Drain the liquid cooling circuit, open the pump and check if the pump rotor is not
blocked. If so, remove the rotor and clean the bearings of the pump. See "Cleaning
the cooling pump", page 226.

Code 6034: block blue - temperature sensor open (Error)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 3image 4-53)

of the temperature sensor is
disconnected from the Signal
backplane.

Plug in the wire unit of the temperature sensor into its socket on the Signal backplane.

Damaged wire unit of the

temperature sensor (Reference
2 image 4-53) which measures the
temperature of the water cooling
block of the blue channel.

1.

Repair the wire unit.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on the

water cooling block of the blue
channel.

Replace the temperature sensor.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

85

4. Troubleshooting
Code 6035: block blue - temperature sensor short (Error)
Situation

Solution

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit of the temperature sensor
which measures the temperature of
the water cooling block of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit (reference 3image 4-53)
of the temperature sensor from the
Signal backplane the error code is
changed to block blue - temperature
sensor open.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and temperature sensor.

Defect temperature sensor on

the water cooling block of the red
channel. When disconnecting the
wire unit of the temperature sensor
from the Signal backplane the error
code is changed to block blue temperature sensor open.

Replace the temperature sensor.

Code 6050: dmd - temperature hardware protection warning (Warning)

Situation

Solution

DMD temperature low.

Make sure that the ambient temperature is within specs. Let the projector acclimate to
the normal room temperature which should be higher then 10C (50F) and lower then
35C (95F). Do not ignite the lamp, otherwise there is a risk for condensate.

DMD temperature high.

Check all cooling systems: Liquid cooling, air extraction system, dust filters, ...

Code 6061: +24v - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

24
+24V

+VTEC
13
++12V

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13

24

GND

13

Image 4-54

Code 6062: +24v - voltage too low (Error)

This error code is probably preceded by the warning code 6063: +24v - voltage low. The same troubleshooting table can be
applied.

86

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 6063: +24v - voltage low (Warning)
Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
If the measured voltage is about 24V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections. Ensure that all wire units are
well connected.
(Note that the +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane)

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

Code 6071: ++12v - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the ++12V voltage on pin 1, 2 or 3 of the connector of
the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
If the measured voltage is about12V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 6073: ++12v - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the ++12V voltage on pin 1, 2 or 3 of the connector of
the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
If the measured voltage is about 12V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections.

Code 6082: lens motors - voltage too low (Error)

Situation

Solution

The supply voltage for the lens

motors is below its minimum.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the +24V voltage on pin 9, 10, 11 or 12 of the
connector of the wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
(The supply voltage for the lens motors is derived form the +24V on the Cinema
Controller board. The +24V supply is generated on the SMPS board and enters the Fan
Control board and Cinema Control board via the Signal Backplane. )
If the measured voltage is about 24V then:
1.

reseat the Cinema Controller board. See "Removing a board in the card cage",
page 263.

2.

if the problem remains, replace the Cinema Controller board.

If the measured voltage is not OK then:

1.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections or short circuits. Ensure that all
wire units are well connected.

2.

Check the wiring of the Anode fan for short circuits.

3.

Check the wiring of the Cathode fan for short circuits.

4.

replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

5.

replace the SMPS board. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply",
page 327.

Code 6123: icp fan - speed low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Wire unit (reference 2 image 4-55)

disconnected from the Signal
Backplane.

Remove the Card Cage cover from the projector and check if the wire unit (reference 2
image 4-55) is inserted in the Signal Backplane.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

87

4. Troubleshooting
Situation

Solution

Blocked fan (reference 1

image 4-55).

Remove the Fan Control board and look inside the compartment to check if the fan is
not blocked. Unblock the fan. Ensure that the fan can turn freely. See "Removing a
board in the card cage", page 263.

Damaged wire unit.

Remove the Fan Control board and look inside the compartment to check the wire unit
of the ICP fan. Repair if possible, otherwise replace with new one. See "Integrated
cinema processor fan", page 384.

Malfunction Fan Control board.

Replace the Fan Control board. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

Fan end of life.

Replace the fan. See "Integrated cinema processor fan", page 384..

2
1

Image 4-55
ICP fan connection

Code 6131: icp fan - voltage high (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the ++12V voltage on pin 1, 2 or 3 of the connector of
the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
If the measured voltage is about12V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Code 6133: icp fan - voltage low (Warning)

Situation

Solution

Malfunction Fan Control board or

SMPS board.

Measure on the Signal Backplane the ++12V voltage on pin 1, 2 or 3 of the connector of
the black wire unit which comes from the SMPS board. See image 4-54.
If the measured voltage is about12V then replace the Fan Control board. See
"Removing a board in the card cage", page 263. Otherwise replace the SMPS board.
See"Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.

Short circuit or bad connection.

Check the Signal Backplane for bad connections.

Damaged insulation of the wire

unit of the fan (reference 1 & 2
image 4-55) Note that this fan is
in the Card Cage compartment
underneath the Fan & Motor Control
board.

Check the insulation of the wire unit of the fan.

1.

Repair the insulation of the wire unit using shrink sleeve.

2.

If not repairable, replace the whole wire unit and/or fan. See "Integrated cinema
processor fan", page 384.

Code 6200: maintenance - maintenance required (Notification)

Situation

Solution

Projector requires maintenance.

Go to the menu Maintenance Smart maintenance in the Communicator

software.
See also maintenance program of the projector (included in the service manual).

88

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Code 6210: lens - no lens parameter file has been activated (Warning)
Situation

Solution

No lens parameter file has been

activated.

Select a suitable lens parameter file for the installed lens using the Communicator
software.
>Installation >Advanced >Lens parameters >Select

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

89

4. Troubleshooting

4.2

Log files
Creating and downloading log files
A diagnostic package can be created with the Communicator software. Start up the software and go to Diagnostics Package. A
zip file will be created with the following information:

ICP log file

Security log file

Projector log

These log files can be red with the Diagnostic package reader which was delivered as separate program together with the Communicator software. For more information about the use of this Diagnostic package reader, consult the User Guide of the Communicator
software.

ICP Log File

Records events listed below:

Handshakes with server

TI system initialization

Reading of TI board status

Opening of TCP connection

Failure of TI boards

Security Log File

Records events listed below:

Monitoring of security switches

Monitoring of key exchange

Authorizing of Dallas key

Projector Log
Records events listed below:

Lamp control commands

Booting of Barco software

Detection of TI boards

Log on details of users

Detection of Barco modules (LPS, FCB, etc.)

DP2K Log file analysis

Example of log file content
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
...

31 17:00:17 localhost local0.info license-manager[221]: main - starting application (version 1.0.1)

31 17:00:17 localhost local0.info router[224]: main - starting application (version 1.0.1)
31 17:00:17 localhost local0.info router[231]: network - wan ip-address is 0.0.0.0
31 17:00:18 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: main - starting application (version 1.0.7)
31 17:00:18 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: main - projector type is "DP2K-20C"
31 17:00:21 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: ti-icp - wait until ready
31 17:00:34 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: system - synchronize date to 20100406124925
6 12:49:25 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: system - ti-link-decryptor login started...
6 12:49:41 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: system - ti-link-decryptor login successful
6 12:49:41 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: system - load lens encoder file "R9855931"
6 12:49:41 localhost local0.info dp60[233]: command (port = internal) - execute lens file .init

Format :
Time localhost facility code.severity code component name [pid]:

90

message

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

4. Troubleshooting
Where :

Time = the time when the event occurred

facility code = component level that generates a log message

severity code = the severity can be : info debug warning alert err.

component name = component name that generates a log message.

-

dp60 = main process

kernel = Linux kernel

router = component which manages the router

TI_marriage = component which handles the marriage

clo = component which handles Light Sensor logic

license-manager = internal license manager

crypto memory = process which handles communication with crypto memory module (ID card)

pid = Process identifier. The internal process identifier, of the component generating the log message.

message = The actual error message.

The Barco controller inserts every hour an unique entry in the Barco log file and in the TI log file. This is done to be able to synchronize
events in both log files, when the clocks are not aligned. It will also be used for a tool, that is still to be implemented, that will merge
both log files, to make better analysis.
Example of such an entry :
Feb 3 02:41:16 localhost local0.info dp60[233]:

log mark - 0000003c1b84 - 8

Each Barco entry into a TI log is proceeded with a B.

What does the id means (as in the example) :

0000003c
-

the first 4 bytes give a hex interpretation of how many time the system has been booted.

3c hex is 60 in decimal. It means that this system has been booted 60 times. Every boot cycle increases the timer with 1.

1b84 = the last two bytes, are random unique 2 bytes.

8 = the last digit indicates the number of hours passed in this boot cycle (in a decimal value). Every boot cycle resets this
number to 0.

Ethernet connection messages in log file (some examples).

Apr 6 14:05:19 localhost local0.info dp60[233]:
150.158.197.64:43680 (keep-alive time expired)

main - closing connection of

after 15 minutes of inactivity projector will close connection.

Apr 6 14:08:55 localhost local0.info dp60[233]:
150.158.192.133:43680

main - accepted connection from

connection from communicator, from pc with ip address 150.158.192.133

Apr 6 14:08:58 localhost local0.info dp60[233]:
gon-phmt-barco-default

log (port = 150.158.192.133:43680:1e) - lo-

communicator inserts in log file, who logged on to projector

Apr 6 14:09:07 localhost local0.info dp60[233]:
lamp on

command (port = 150.158.192.133:43680:1e) - set

Command messages also indicate originator.

Apr 6 14:09:07 localhost local0.info dp60[233]:

system - load fcb file "lamp-on

on fan controller board, lamp-on state is set.

External commands received by the Barco controller are preceded with the command (port = xxx) string
Where xxx can be :

/dev/ttyS0:0 = Command comes from the serial connection labeled (RS232 IN"). That can be from a touch panel which is
connected through a RS232 cable, or from a communicator which is connected serially.

/dev/ttyS2:0 = Command comes from a touch panel attached with a dedicated cable to the back of the projector (touch
panel input).

/dev/ttyS3:0 = Command comes from the TI board. This is typically a command that is part of a macro stored on that board.

10.36.62.17:43680 = Command comes from a remote machine with indicated IP address, followed by the local of the remote
machine that send this command internal. The command is initiated internally, due to an internal reason.

button = button is triggered from the keypad, attached to the projector.

Some examples :

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

91

4. Troubleshooting

command (port = /dev/ttyS2:0) - set network ip-address to 10.140.162.141 (dhcp off) = From the
touch panel, the IP address of the projector was set to 10.140.162.141

command (port = 10.36.62.17:43680) - set network ip-address to 10.36.62.62 (dhcp off) = From a
device with IP address 10.36.63.17, the IP address of the projector was changed to 10.36.63.17

command (port = /dev/ttyS0:0) - set dowser open. = From a touch panel or PC, connected serially (connector
labeled "Touch panel"), the dowser was set to open.

command (port = /dev/ttyS0:0) - set lamp off = From a touch panel or PC, connected serially (connector labeled
"Touch panel"), the lamp was powered off.

command (port = internal) - set lamp off = For an internal reason the state of the lamp was set to off.

command (port = button) - set dowser closed = The dowser was closed from the keypad.

The error messages are explained in the troubleshooting list - code 5831

ICP log files

Example of log file content :
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
2010/04/06
...

09:02:40.964797
09:02:40.980964
09:02:41.039022
09:02:41.049829
09:02:41.051245
09:02:41.051755
09:02:41.052149
09:02:41.052897
09:02:43.632304
09:02:43.633017
09:02:43.633476
09:02:43.792939

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
D

ICP application 1.2(126) init Shows the ICP package

successfully initialized the LoginLevelProtection mutex
Autotiming initialized
Autotiming using VSyncs
Started Autotiming Port threads
Autotiming started
Port thread running
Port thread running
Started Autotiming Main thread
Autotiming thread running
Autotiming: blank the image
Autotiming: unblank the image

Format
Date Time Severity message
Where :

Date Time = the time when the event occurred.

Severity = One character severity indication can be : D (Debug) E (Error) I (Informational) - U (User).

message = The actual error message.

Example :
24.03.2010 17:17:12.185 TPPL = 2848, APPL = 2048, TLPF = 4095, ALPF = 128
This line is entered when the auto timing on the ICP computes values that are not within valid ranges.
Where :

TPPL = Total Pixels Per Line

APPL = Active Pixels Per Line

TLPF = Total Lines Per Frame

ALPF = Active Lines Per Frame

512 <= APPL <= TPPL <= 8191

288 <= ALPF <= TLPF <= 4095

In this example ALPF = 128 which is less than the minimum of 288. When this happens, auto timing will attempt to blank the image.

92

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE PROJECTOR

COVERS
About this chapter
Most maintenance and servicing procedures demand removing one or more of the projector covers to gain access to the parts to
maintain or to service. To avoid redundancy, all procedures about cover removing or installing are grouped together in this chapter.
The maintenance and servicing procedures also refer to this chapter if required. The procedures in this chapter describe, with
detailed step by step actions and illustrations, how to remove or install the projector covers. Note that some covers may only be
removed by qualified service personnel, see remarks above each procedure.

WARNING: Disconnect the power to the unit mains terminals and unplug power cord at UPS inlet for removal
of all power from the unit

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

93

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.1

Removal of the lamp cover

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to remove the lamp cover of the projector?

1. Release the two captive screws at the right side, top and bottom, of the lamp cover, using a flat screw driver.

Image 5-1
Release lamp cover

2. Remove the lamp cover from the projector doing the following:
a) gently pull out the left bottom corner (A) of the lamp cover,
b) then gently pull out the left top corner (B) of the lamp cover,
c) then move the lamp cover away from the projector (C).

A
C
Image 5-2
Remove lamp cover

94

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.2

Removal of the input cover

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to remove the input cover of the projector?

1. Release the two captive screws at the top and bottom left side of the input cover, using a flat screw driver.

Image 5-3
Release input cover

2. Remove the input cover from the projector doing the following:
a) gently pull out the right bottom corner (A) of the input cover,
b) then gently pull out the right top corner (B) of the input cover,
c) then move the input cover away from the projector (C).

A
C
Image 5-4
Remove input cover

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

95

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.3

Removal of the front cover

The input cover and the lens have to be removed before removing the front cover. See procedures "Removal
of the input cover", page 95, and "Lens removal", page 239.

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver

How to remove the front cover of the projector

1. Check if the input cover and the lens are removed.
2. Remove the rubber dust ring from the lens holder. See the detail at the right side of image 5-5.
3. Release the captive screw at the middle bottom of the front cover, using a flat screw driver.

Image 5-5
Release front cover

4. Remove the front cover from the projector doing the following:
a) standing in front of the projector, pull the upper right corner (A) of the front cover toward you until the latch releases,
b) pull the lower right corner (B) of the front cover toward you until the latch releases,
c) then move the front cover away from the projector.

B
C

Image 5-6
Remove front cover

96

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.4

Removal of the side cover

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to remove the side cover of the projector?

1. Release the captive screw at the middle bottom of the side cover, using a flat screw driver.

Image 5-7

2. Remove the side cover from the projector doing the following:
a) gently pull out the bottom corners (A) of the side cover,
b) then gently pull out the top corners (B) of the side cover,
c) then move the side cover away from the projector (C).

B
B
A
A

Image 5-8

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

97

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.5

Removal of the rear cover

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

Necessary tools
Flat screwdriver.

How to remove the rear cover from the projector?

1. Release the two captive screws at the bottom corners of the rear cover, using a flat screw driver.

Image 5-9
Release rear cover

2. Remove the rear cover of the projector doing the following:

a) gently pull out the top corners of the rear cover,
b) then move the rear cover away from the projector.

B
Image 5-10
Remove rear cover

98

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.6

Removal of the top cover

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

All side covers, front cover and back cover have to be removed before removing the top cover.

Necessary tools
Allen key 3 mm

How to remove the top cover of the projector?

1. After all side covers, front and back cover are removed, turn all 3 fixation screws.

Image 5-11
Top cover removal

2. Left up the top cover and take it off.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

99

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

Image 5-12
Top cover removal

100

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.7

Open the sealed compartment

This procedure assumes that the left side cover of the projector is already removed.

Necessary tools
3 mm Allen wrench.

How to open the sealed compartment of the Light Processor Unit?

1. Release the three hexagon head cap screws as illustrated. Use for that a 3 mm Allen wrench.
Note: A washer is mounted between the plate and the screw head.

Image 5-13

2. Lift up the cover plate slightly, using the two lower lips provided, and then remove the cover plate away from the projector.

Image 5-14

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

101

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.8

Close the sealed compartment

Necessary tools
3 mm Allen wrench.

How to close the sealed compartment of the Light Processor Unit?

1. Place the cover plate in its place as illustrated.
Caution: Do not damage the micro switch at the top of the projector.

Image 5-15

2. Fasten the three hexagon head cap screws as illustrated. Use for that a 3 mm Allen wrench.
Note: Insert a washer between the each screw and the plate.

Image 5-16

102

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.9

Installation of the top cover

Necessary tools
Allen key 3 mm

How to install the top cover of the projector?

1. Place the top cover on the projector so that both holes matches the adjustment studs on top of the projector.

Image 5-17
Mount top cover

2. Turn all 3 fixation screws. Insert the washer between the screw and the top cover.

Image 5-18
Fixate top cover

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

103

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.10 Installation of the rear cover

Necessary tools
Flat screwdriver.

How to install the rear cover of the projector?

1. Install the rear cover of the projector doing the following:
a) Bring the rear cover towards it final position,
b) then gently push the locking studs of the top corners into their receivers

A
Image 5-19
Install rear housing

2. Secure the rear cover by locking the captive screws at the bottom corners of the rear cover.

Image 5-20
Fasten rear housing

104

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.11 Installation of the side cover

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to install the side cover of the projector?

1. Check if the bottom and top filters are present.
2. Install the side cover of the projector doing the following:
a) Bring the side cover towards its final position (A),
b) then gently push the locking studs of the top corners (B) into their receivers,
c) then gently push the locking studs of the bottom corners (C) into their receivers.

B
B
C
A

Image 5-21

3. Secure the side cover by locking the captive screw in the middle at the bottom of the side cover.

Image 5-22

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

105

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.12 Installation of the front cover

The input cover and the lens may not be installed yet.

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to install the front cover of the projector?

1. Check if the front filter is present.
2. Ensure that no lens is mounted and that the input cover is not installed.
3. Install the front cover of the projector doing the following:
a) first hook in the side of the front cover at the front filter,
b) then gently push the other side of the front cover into position,
c) ensure that the locking studs in the corners click into their receivers.

C
A

Image 5-23
Install front cover

4. Secure the front cover by locking the captive screw in the middle at the bottom of the front cover.

Image 5-24
Fasten front cover

5. Reinstall the rubber dust ring around the lens holder. See detail at the right of image 5-24.

106

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

5.13 Installation of the input cover

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to install the input cover of the projector?

1. Install the input cover of the projector doing the following:
a) Bring the input cover towards its final position (A),
b) then gently push the locking stud at the right top corner (B) into its receiver,
c) then gently push the locking stud at the right bottom corner (C) into its receiver.

C
A
Image 5-25
Install input cover

2. Secure the input cover by locking the two captive screws at the left side of the input cover.

Image 5-26
Fasten input cover

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

107

5. Removal and installation of the projector covers

108

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

6. LAMPS AND LAMP HOUSE

About this chapter
This chapter enumerates all the supported xenon lamps for the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx digital projector and how to replace the xenon lamp in the lamp house. Also included is the procedure to reset the lamp parameters, which is required after a
xenon lamp replacement, and the procedure to realign the lamp in its reflector for optimal performance.

WARNING:

DO NOT PERMIT UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TO PERFORM OR ATTEMPT ANY PHASE OF

XENON LAMP HANDLING OR SERVICE. ONLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED TECHNICAL SERVICE PERSONNEL
ARE ALLOWED TO HANDLE THE XENON LAMP.

CAUTION: Xenon compact arc lamps are highly pressurized. When ignited, the normal operating temperature
of the bulb increases the pressure to a level at which the bulb may explode if not handled in strict accordance
to the manufacturers instructions. The bulb is stable at room temperature, but may still explode if dropped or
otherwise mishandled. Whenever the lamp house, containing a xenon lamp, has to be dismantled or whenever
the protective container or cloth has to be removed from the xenon lamp, authorized protective clothing MUST
be worn!

WARNING: Always wear face protection (full face shield) when handling xenon lamps.

WARNING: Always wear protective clothing (welders jacket) when handling xenon lamps.

WARNING: Always wear clean leather gloves with wrist protectors when handling xenon lamps.

Overview

Introduction

Removal of the lamp house

Removal of the xenon lamp

Installation of the Xenon lamp

Installation of the lamp house

Resetting the lamp parameters

Realignment of the lamp in its reflector

Replacement of the Lamp Info module

Replacement of the UV blocker

Replacement of the lamp reflector

Cleaning the Reflector of the Lamp House

Cleaning the UV blocker of the Lamp House

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

109

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.1

Introduction
Lamp & lamp house
Normally the lamp house of the DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX projector is delivered with a mounted 4000 watt lamp. The lamp house of
the DP2K-15C projector is delivered with a mounted 3000 watt lamp. In case the xenon lamp is delivered separately the lamp has
to be installed on site by a qualified service technician.

Image 6-1
A
Lamp house.
B
Xenon lamp.

The xenon lamp is packed in a protective container or wrapped in a protective cloth. Never remove this protective container or
protective cloth without wearing adequate protective clothing (face shield, clean leather glovers, welders jacket).

Image 6-2
Left: Xenon lamp in protective container. Right: Xenon lamp wrapped in protective cloth.

CAUTION: Xenon compact arc lamps are highly pressurized. When ignited, the normal operating temperature
of the bulb increases the pressure to a level at which the bulb may explode if not handled in strict accordance
to the manufacturers instructions. The bulb is stable at room temperature, but may still explode if dropped or
otherwise mishandled. Whenever the lamp house, containing a xenon lamp, has to be dismantled or whenever
the protective container or cloth has to be removed from the xenon lamp, authorized protective clothing MUST
be worn!

Cathode adaptor
A cathode adaptor is required to mount the xenon lamp in the lamp house. The cathode adapter has to be mounted upon the cathode
side of the xenon lamp prior to mounting the lamp in the lamp house. The purpose of the cathode adapter is to position the arc of
the xenon lamp in the middle of the reflector inside the lamp house.

Image 6-3
Cathode adaptor (R858100K)

110

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Supported xenon bulb lamps (without lamp house)
Lamp

Type

Order info

Osram xenon lamp of 4 kW

4kW DHP

R9855937

Osram xenon lamp of 3 kW

3kW DHP

R9855938

Osram xenon lamp of 2 kW

2kW DHP

R9855956

Osram xenon lamp of 1.2kW

1200W DHP

R9855959

Ushio xenon lamp of 4 kW

DXL40BAF

R9855939

Ushio xenon lamp of 3 kW

DXL30BAF

R9855940

Ushio xenon lamp of 2 kW

DXL20BAF

R9855955

Ushio xenon lamp of 2 kW

DXL20BAF/2

R9855965

Ushio xenon lamp of 1.2kW

DXL12BAF

R9855961

Philips xenon lamp of 4 kW

XDC-4000B

R9856370

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Only for DP2K20C/DP2K-18CX

Only for DP2K20C/DP2K-18CX

Only for DP2K20C/DP2K-18CX

111

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.2

Removal of the lamp house

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

CAUTION: Lamp casing is very hot after operation. To avoid burns, let the projector cool down for at least 15
minutes before proceeding to the lamp unit replacement.

CAUTION:

Due to its high internal pressure, the lamp may explode in either hot or cold states if improperly

handled.

Necessary tools

Flat screw driver or

Nut driver 8mm

How to remove the lamp house of the projector

1. Switch off the projector.
2. Remove the lamp cover.
3. Release the three spring lock screws of the lamp house as illustrated.

Image 6-4
Release lamp house

4. Take the lamp house by the handles and pull it out of the projector.
Caution: Be aware of the weight of the lamp assembly. Take the necessary precautions to avoid personal injury.

112

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-5
Remove lamp house

5. Place the lamp house on a stable support.

While starting up the projector, the electronics detect if a lamp is installed. If no lamp is installed, it is not
possible to start up the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

113

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.3

Removal of the xenon lamp

WARNING:

DO NOT PERMIT UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TO PERFORM OR ATTEMPT ANY PHASE OF

XENON LAMP HANDLING OR SERVICE. ONLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED TECHNICAL SERVICE PERSONNEL
ARE ALLOWED TO HANDLE THE XENON LAMP.

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

CAUTION: Xenon compact arc lamps are highly pressurized. When ignited, the normal operating temperature
of the bulb increases the pressure to a level at which the bulb may explode if not handled in strict accordance
to the manufacturers instructions. The bulb is stable at room temperature, but may still explode if dropped or
otherwise mishandled. Whenever the lamp house, containing a xenon lamp, has to be dismantled or whenever
the protective container or cloth has to be removed from the xenon lamp, authorized protective clothing MUST
be worn!

WARNING: Always wear face protection (full face shield) when handling xenon lamps.

WARNING: Always wear protective clothing (welders jacket) when handling xenon lamps.

WARNING: Always wear clean leather gloves with wrist protectors when handling xenon lamps.

Necessary tools

Flat blade screw driver.

5 mm Allen wrench.

17 mm open-end wrench (2 pieces).

Lamp protective container or protective cloth with two binders.

How to remove the xenon lamp from the lamp house?

1. Release the xenon lamp from its socket by removing the hexagon socket head cap screw and washer as illustrated. Use a 5 mm
Allen wrench.

Image 6-6

2. Remove the Lamp House side cover by releasing the two retaining thumbscrews as illustrated.

114

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-7

3. Release the four retaining thumbscrews of the UV blocker assembly as illustrated. Make sure that the UV blocker assembly
remains in its position while releasing the screws.

Image 6-8

4. Support the xenon lamp inside the Lamp House with one hand while removing the UV blocker assembly from the Lamp House.
Note that some xenon lamps are installed with an anode adaptation bushing.
Caution: Ensure that you wear protective clothing, a full face shield and protective gloves.

Image 6-9

5. Slide the white anode socket, which is connected via a thick wire with the xenon lamp, upwards away from its position and then
remove the xenon lamp with anode socket from the Lamp House.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

115

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-10

6. Place the xenon lamp into a protective container or wrap a protective cloth around the xenon lamp prior to proceed with this
procedure.
7. Remove the anode wire lug from the anode socket. Use for that two open end wrenches of 17 mm. Hold one nut (reference
7) with one wrench while releasing the other nut (reference 4) with the other wrench. Note that a plain washer (reference 5) is
provided between the lock nut (reference 4) and the anode wire lug (reference 6).

5
4

Image 6-11

Note:

The electrical connection pins of older Lamp Houses may contain two flat washers, one on each side of the wire lug. New
Lamp Houses can contain only one flat washer due to the shorter thread clearance of the new improved connection pins.

8. Remove the cathode lamp adaptor (reference 11) from the xenon lamp (reference 13) as illustrated. Use a 5 mm Allen wrench
to release the adaptor fixation screw (reference 12) of the adaptor.

13
12

12
11

Image 6-12

116

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

CAUTION:

Expired xenon lamps.

Dispose of expired bulbs that are beyond warranty in the following manner: wrap the bulb tightly in several
layers of canvas or heavy cloth. Place it on hard surface and shatter the envelope with a sharp hammer blow.
DO NOT place a non shattered bulb in any ordinary refuse container.

CAUTION: Small amounts of radioactive material (< 1000 Bq per lamp) are deliberately added to Xenon lamps
for functional reasons. These lamps are manufactured under regulatory control as consumer product according to IAEA basic safety standard BSS 115. Disposal according to national regulations is required e.g. in
Europe covered by WEEE regulation. See also related user manual of the lamp supplier for more guidance.

When returning a xenon lamp for warranty adjustment, pack it in its original shipping container. Complete
and return all required warranty information.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

117

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.4

Installation of the Xenon lamp

WARNING:

DO NOT PERMIT UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TO PERFORM OR ATTEMPT ANY PHASE OF

XENON LAMP HANDLING OR SERVICE. ONLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED TECHNICAL SERVICE PERSONNEL
ARE ALLOWED TO HANDLE THE XENON LAMP.

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

CAUTION: Xenon compact arc lamps are highly pressurized. When ignited, the normal operating temperature
of the bulb increases the pressure to a level at which the bulb may explode if not handled in strict accordance
to the manufacturers instructions. The bulb is stable at room temperature, but may still explode if dropped or
otherwise mishandled. Whenever the lamp house, containing a xenon lamp, has to be dismantled or whenever
the protective container or cloth has to be removed from the xenon lamp, authorized protective clothing MUST
be worn!

WARNING: Always wear face protection (full face shield) when handling xenon lamps.

WARNING: Always wear protective clothing (welders jacket) when handling xenon lamps.

WARNING: Always wear clean leather gloves with wrist protectors when handling xenon lamps.

Necessary tools

17 mm open ended wrench.

Torque wrench with 17 mm hexagon socket

Torque wrench with 5 mm Allen socket.

Necessary parts

Lamp cathode adapter.

Hexagon socket head screw M6 x 40.

Flat washer.

How to install the xenon lamp into the lamp house

1. Remove the UV blocker and side cover of the lamp house by releasing the retaining thumbscrews as illustrated.
Note: In case of a lamp replacement, the UV blocker will be already removed.

118

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-13
Remove UV blocker and side cover

2. Install the lamp cathode adaptor (reference 1) upon the xenon lamp (reference 3) as illustrated. Tighten the adapter fixation
screw (reference 2) with a torque of 2,5 Nm (1.84 lbf*ft). Use for that a torque wrench with a 5 mm Allen socket. Make sure that
there is full contact between the cathode adapter and the lamp base.
Note: Do not take the lamp out of its protective container or protective cloth while mounting the adapter.

2,5 Nm

2
1

Image 6-14
Mount cathode adaptor

3. Install the anode wire lug (reference 6) upon the anode socket. Use an 17 mm open-end wrench to hold the first nut (reference
7) while fastening the lock nut (reference 4) on the rod with a torque of 9 Nm (6,64 lbf*ft) using a torque wrench with 17 mm
hexagon socket. Ensure that there is a flat washer (reference 5) between the lock nut and the wire lug.
Caution: Do not tighten the first nut (reference 1) against the connector housing. There must be some play (1 mm maximum).
This is important to insert the Lamp House smoothly into the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

119

6. Lamps and lamp house

5
4

9 Nm
6

Image 6-15
Anode lug installation

4. Remove the protective container or unwrap the protective cloth from the xenon lamp.
Warning: Ensure that you wear protective clothing, a full face shield and protective gloves.
Tip:

Write down the serial number of the lamp. You will need this while updating the lamp parameters after installation of the
lamp. The serial number of the lamp is engraved in the neck of the xenon lamp.

5. Gently guide the xenon lamp into position inside the Lamp House as illustrated. Anode socket hanging vertical down. While
inserting the lamp, rotate it slightly, engaging the pins of the cathode adapter in the foreseen slots. This is to ensure the lamp
cathode is completely inserted.

Image 6-16
Lamp bulb installation

Warning:

Make sure that the both pins of the cathode adapter are engaged in the foreseen slots.

Image 6-17

6. Insert the anode socket into position as illustrated.

Caution:
Avoid any tension on the anode wire, ensuring there is no mechanical stress on the lamp.

120

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-18
Anode socket installation

7. Reinstall the UV blocker assembly as illustrated. Make sure that the xenon lamp is properly supported by the lamp supporting
mechanism in the centre of the UV blocker. Use the opening at the side of the Lamp House to guide the supporting pin of the
xenon lamp into the anode supporting mechanism.

Image 6-19
UV blocker installation

8. Secure the UV blocker by fastening the four retaining thumbscrews as illustrated.

Note: Please ensure that the thumb screws turning wires are flush with the cover or interference will occur while inserting the
lamp house into the projector.

Image 6-20
Secure UV blocker

9. Fasten the cathode side of the xenon lamp using a hexagon socket head screw M6 x 40 and a plain washer as illustrated. Use a
torque of 2,5 Nm (1,84 lbf*ft) to fasten the hexagon socket head screw. Use for that a torque wrench with a 5 mm Allen socket.
Caution: Make sure that the both pins of the cathode adapter remain engaged in the foreseen slots. Use one hand to keep
the xenon lamp into position while inserting the hexagon socket head screw.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

121

6. Lamps and lamp house

10

2,5 Nm

Image 6-21
Fasten cathode side

10.Check the cathode connection inside the Lamp House. Use a 17 mm open-end wrench to hold the first nut while fastening the
second nut on the rod with a torque of 9 Nm (6,64 lbf*ft) using a torque wrench with 17 mm hexagon socket. Ensure that there
is a flat washer (reference 3) between the lock nut and the wire lug.
Caution: This cathode connection must be checked with every lamp change!
Caution:

Do not tighten the first nut (reference 1) against the connector housing. There must be some play (1 mm maximum).
This is important to insert the Lamp House smoothly into the projector.

9Nm

Image 6-22
Check cathode connection

Note:

The electrical connection pins of older Lamp Houses may contain two flat washers, one on each side of the wire lug. New
Lamp Houses can contain only one flat washer due to the shorter thread clearance of the new improved connection pins.

11. Reinstall the side cover of the Lamp House as illustrated.

Note: Please ensure that the thumb screws turning wires are flash with the cover or interference will occur while inserting the
Lamp House into the projector.

122

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-23
Close side cover

CAUTION: The LAMP INFO parameters MUST be updated after each installation of a xenon lamp inside the
lamp house. Neglecting this update will result in poor performance and short life time of the xenon lamp. See
procedure Resetting the lamp parameters.

A realignment of the xenon lamp in its reflector is required after the installation of the xenon lamp in the lamp
house. See procedure "Realignment of the lamp in its reflector", page 127.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

123

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.5

Installation of the lamp house

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

CAUTION:

Due to its high internal pressure, the lamp may explode in either hot or cold states if improperly

handled.

Necessary tools
Flat screw driver.

How to install the lamp house

1. Ensure the projector is switched off.
2. Remove the lamp cover.
3. Hold fast the lamp house by its handles and gently slide the lamp house into its socket. Note that the compartment is provided
with guides (G) to position the lamp house correctly.

Image 6-24
Mount lamp house

4. Push the lamp house forward until it slides fully into the projector.
5. Secure the correct position of the lamp house by tightening all three spring lock screws as illustrated.

Image 6-25
Secure lamp house

6. Reinstall the lamp cover of the projector.

124

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

While starting up the projector, the electronics detect if a lamp is installed. If no lamp is installed, it is not
possible to start up the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

125

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.6

Resetting the lamp parameters

CAUTION: The LAMP INFO parameters MUST be updated after each installation of a xenon lamp inside the
Lamp House. Neglecting this update will result in poor performance and short life time of the xenon lamp.

How to reset the lamp parameters?

1. Start up the projector but do not ignite the lamp.
2. Go via the Communicator touch panel to the menu Installation > Lamp > Lamp information.
3. While the Lamp information window is displayed, tap on Reset (1).
A reset message is displayed (2).
4. Tap on Select (3) to display a list of possible article numbers (4). Select a article number (5) and tap OK (6).
The software will validate the selected article number (7).
5. Fill out the serial number of the lamp (8).
6. Click Reset (9).

Image 6-26
Reset lamp info

CAUTION: For more information about using the Communicator Touch Panel consult the users guide of the
Communicator Touch Panel.

126

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.7

Realignment of the lamp in its reflector

Each xenon lamp installation requires a realignment of the lamp in its reflector for optimal performance of the
xenon lamp. Furthermore, it is recommended to realign the lamp after the first run time of 100 and 200 hours.
Especially the Z-axis of the lamp.

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

How to realign the lamp in its reflector?

1. Remove the cover of the lamp compartment to gain access to the X-, Y-, and Z-axis adjustment thumbscrews of the lamp.
2. Some lamp houses may have lock nuts on the X and Y adjustment screws which are locked. Before starting the adjustment, fully
turn these lock nuts against the thumbscrew.

Image 6-27
Lock nuts

3. Switch on the projector and start up the lamp.

4. Go via the Communicator touch panel to the menu Installation > Lamp > Light output.
5. Set the Light output mode in normal mode and the Lamp Dimming on maximum (255).
Note: This window on the Communicator touch panel shows in the upper left corner the measured value of the built-in light
sensor of the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

127

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-28
Light mode selection

6. Adjust the X-axis (ref X image 6-29), the Y-axis (ref Y image 6-29) and the Z-axis (ref Z image 6-29) for maximum current light
output (Footlambert Measured). Carefully turn the thumbscrew for maximum light output. Once over the maximum, turn slightly
in opposite direction to reach the maximum light output again. Do this for each direction and repeat this adjustment cycle twice.

Y
Z

Image 6-29
Lamp adjustment

7. If lock nuts are available, these nuts can be locked again.

8. Switch off the projector.
9. Reinstall the cover of the lamp compartment.

128

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.8

Replacement of the Lamp Info module

This procedure requires that the lamp house is removed from the projector. See procedure "Removal of the
lamp house", page 112.

Necessary tools

2,5 mm Allen wrench.

5 mm nut driver.

How to replace the Lamp Info module?

1. Remove the cover of the Lamp Info module by releasing the hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1) as illustrated. Use
a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.

Image 6-30

2. Disconnect the wire unit (reference C) from the Lamp Info module as illustrated.

Image 6-31

3. Remove the Lamp Info module from the lamp house by releasing the four spacers (reference 2) as illustrated. Use a 5 mm nut
driver. Do not loose the isolating rings (reference 3).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

129

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-32

4. Reinstall a new Lamp Info module and fasten with four spacers (reference 2 image 6-32). Make sure to place a isolating ring
(reference 3 image 6-32) between the module and the spacer. Use a 5mm nut driver.
5. Reconnect the wire unit (reference C) as illustrated.

Image 6-33

6. Reinstall the cover of the Lamp Info module. Fasten with four hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1 image 6-30). Use
a 2,5 mm Allen wrench

130

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.9

Replacement of the UV blocker

This procedure is only valid when replacing an UV blocker with an glued or screwed anode support.

This procedure requires that the lamp house is removed from the projector. See procedure "Removal of the
lamp house", page 112.

CAUTION: The person that performs this procedure MUST be wearing a full face shield with neck protector, a
welders jacket and clean leather gloves with wrist protectors. This is required to safely dismantle or assemble
the lamp house, which contains a xenon lamp.

Necessary tools
2,5 mm Allen wrench.

How to replace the UV blocker

1. Ensure that you wear protective clothing, a full face shield and protective gloves.
2. Remove first the lamps house side cover and then the lamp house UV blocker assembly by releasing the retaining thumbscrews
as illustrated. Support the xenon lamp while removing the UV blocker assembly.

Image 6-34

3. Replace the UV blocker with integrated anode support as illustrated. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench to loosen/fasten the three
hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 3). Make sure that the anode support is on the inner side of the assembly.
Caution: Do not touch the new UV blocker with bare fingers. You should wear clean leather gloves to protect your hands
against the danger of explosion of the high pressurized xenon lamp and to avoid that the UV blocker gets contaminated with grease or dirt. You may wear latex or cotton gloves in case there is no danger of a highly pressurized
xenon lamp.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

131

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-35

4. Reinstall the UV blocker assembly as illustrated. Make sure that the xenon lamp is properly supported by the lamp supporting
mechanism in the centre of the UV blocker. Use the opening at the side of the lamp house to guide the supporting pin of the
xenon lamp into the anode supporting mechanism.

Image 6-36

5. Secure the UV blocker by fastening the four retaining thumbscrews as illustrated.

Note: Please ensure that the retaining thumb screws turning wires are flash with the cover or interference will occur while
inserting the lamp house into the projector.

Image 6-37

6. Reinstall the side cover of the lamp house as illustrated.

Note: Please ensure that the retaining thumb screws turning wires are flash with the cover or interference will occur while
inserting the lamp house into the projector.

132

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-38

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

133

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.10 Replacement of the lamp reflector

Lamp reflector assembly
The reflector of the lamp has three major parts. One mounting plate, one spheric glass mirror and one elliptic glass mirror. Both
mirrors are glued on the mounting plate and are perfectly aligned with each other. The mounting plate serves also as a reference
plate between the reflector and the projector optics. The mounting plate has two positioning pins which ensure a correct alignment
of the reflector assembly with respect to the projector once the lamp house is inserted in the projector.

1
2
3

Image 6-39
1
Positioning pin.
2
Mounting plate.
3
Spheric glass mirror.
4
Elliptic glass mirror.

This procedure assumes that there is no lamp installed inside the lamp house. If so, see procedure "Removal
of the xenon lamp", page 114.

CAUTION:

Do not touch the glass of the reflector assembly while unpacking and installing. Hold fast the
reflector assembly by its metal mounting plate.

Necessary tools

Two 17 mm open-end wrenches.

Torque wrench with 17 mm hexagon socket.

2,5 mm Allen wrench.

How to replace the reflector of the lamp house?

1. Remove the side cover of the lamp house by releasing the two retaining thumbscrews as illustrated.

Image 6-40

2. Disconnect one end of the cathode wire from the lamp house as illustrated. Use two open-end wrenches to release the nuts.
Tip:
Place the washers and nuts back on the socket.
134

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

Image 6-41

3. Guide the cathode wire through the hole out of the lamp house.

Image 6-42

4. Place the lamp house upon the anode side as illustrated and remove the bottom profiles. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench to release
the hexagon socket head cap screws of the bottom profiles.
Caution: Do not damage the UV blocker or the blue electrical socket of the lamp house.
Tip:

Let the three spacers of the UV blocker rest upon a clean flat surface (e.g. a thick book).

Image 6-43

5. Remove the cathode side of the lamp house by releasing 8 hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 6, two screws per side)
as illustrated in image 6-44. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.
6. Remove the reflector assembly of the lamp house by releasing 8 hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 7, two screws per
side) as illustrated. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench. Note that these screws are longer than those screws which you removed in the
previous step.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

135

6. Lamps and lamp house

6

Image 6-44

7. Place a new reflector assembly upon the anode side of the lamp house and fasten with 8 hexagon head cap screws (reference
7 image 6-44). Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench. These screws must have a length of 10 mm. Make sure to position the reflector
assembly correctly.
Caution: Do not touch the glass of the reflector assembly. Hold fast the reflector assembly by its metal mounting plate.
8. Reinstall the cathode side of the lamp house (see middle drawing of image 6-44). Fasten with 8 hexagon head cap screws
(reference 6 image 6-44). Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.
9. Reinstall the bottom profiles. See image 6-43. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.
10.Guide the cathode wire inside the lamp house as illustrated.

Image 6-45

11. Reconnect the cathode wire with the lamp house. Make sure to place a washer (reference 2 and 4 ) between the nuts and the
eye of the cathode wire (reference 3). Use a torque of 9 Nm to fasten the nuts (reference 1 and 5). Block the first nut (reference
1) with a 17 mm open-end wrench while applying a torque of 9 Nm on the second nut (reference 5) with a torque wrench.

9 Nm

Image 6-46

12.Reinstall the side cover of the lamp house.

136

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.11 Cleaning the Reflector of the Lamp House

When cleaning the Reflector?
Clean the Reflector on a regular basis to maintain light output level.
This procedure requires that the xenon lamp is removed from the Lamp House.

Necessary tools

Compressed air.

Clean Toraysee cloth or any micro fiber lens cleaning cloth.

Clean cotton cloth.

Necessary parts
Lens cleaner (e.g. Carl Zeiss lens cleaner or Purasol or any waterbased lens cleaner)

How to clean the Reflector of the Lamp House?

1. Blow off dust with clean compressed air (or pressurized air cans).
2. Clean with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth to remove the dust and contamination. Use big wipes.
3. Use a dry lens cleaning cloth to remove left liquid or stripes. Polish with small circles.
4. If there are still fingerprints on the surface, wipe them off with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth. Polish again
with a dry one.

CAUTION:

Never use a Lamp House with cracked or damaged Reflector. Neglecting this may result in irreversible damage of the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

137

6. Lamps and lamp house

6.12 Cleaning the UV blocker of the Lamp House

When cleaning the UV blocker?
Clean UV blocker on regular basis to maintain light output level.
This procedure requires that the UV blocker is removed from the Lamp House.

Necessary tools

Compressed air.

Clean Toraysee cloth or any micro fiber lens cleaning cloth.

Clean cotton cloth.

Necessary parts
Lens cleaner (e.g. Carl Zeiss lens cleaner or Purasol or any waterbased lens cleaner)

How to clean the UV blocker of the Lamp House?

1. Blow off dust with clean compressed air (or pressurized air cans).
2. Clean with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth to remove the dust and contamination. Use big wipes.
3. Use a dry lens cleaning cloth to remove left liquid or stripes. Polish with small circles.
4. If there are still fingerprints on the surface, wipe them off with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth. Polish again
with a dry one.

CAUTION: Never reinstall a UV blocker which is cracked or has a damaged coating. Neglecting this will result
in irreversible damage of optical parts in the projector.

138

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

7. Cold mirror assembly

7. COLD MIRROR ASSEMBLY

About this chapter
This chapter describes how to replace the cold mirror and top fan as complete assembly. It also describes the necessary adjustments
for the cold mirror.

CAUTION:

Typically the Cold Mirror should never be readjusted in the field except when the Cold Mirror or
Lamp Reflector have been replaced. In case a readjustment is required follow the instructions in this chapter
precisely. Only qualified technicians who have experience with adjusting the Cold Mirror may adjust the Cold
Mirror. A misaligned Cold Mirror may cause irreversible damage to other parts of the projector!

Overview

Introduction

Removal of the cold mirror assembly

Replace the Cold Mirror

Installation of the cold mirror assembly

Adjusting the cold mirror

Cleaning the Cold Mirror

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

139

7. Cold mirror assembly

7.1

Introduction
Functionality of the cold mirror
The location of the cold mirror in the light path is between the light source (xenon lamp) and the light pipe. The cold mirror reflects
the visible light and absorbs the infra red light. Due to this absorbing, a lot of heat is produced. The cold mirror is mounted with the
rear side upon a big heat sink. The fan above the heat sink blows cold air upon the heat sink and cold. The hot air is transported to
the outside of the projector. The cold mirror has three adjustment screws to modify the position of the cold mirror so that the centre
of the light spot is precisely reflected in the centre of the integration rod entrance for optimal performance.

Image 7-1
Cold mirror assembly
1

Cold mirror adjustment screws

Diagnostic
The easiest way to check the condition of the cold mirror is by removing the lamp unit. When the lamp unit is removed, the cold
mirror becomes visible at the end of the lamp compartment. In case the cold mirror is not damaged but dirt is clearly visible upon
the surface of the mirror it is recommended to clean the cold mirror. Always replace the cold mirror with a new one in case the cold
mirror is damaged. Possible damages are:

140

Cold mirror is broken.

Coating peels off.

Cold mirror is cracked.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

7. Cold mirror assembly

7.2

Removal of the cold mirror assembly

The cold mirror cannot be replaced separately. Always replace the whole assembly (mirror + heat sink + fan).

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench

Nut driver 7 mm

How to remove the cold mirror assembly

1. Remove cover plate of the sealed compartment. See "Open the sealed compartment", page 101.
2. Remove the cover of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated. This cover is secured with 5 hexagon socket head cap screws.
Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.

Image 7-2
Remove SPG cover

3. Disconnect the fan wire (reference 1).

Tip:
Pull out the top filter for easy access to the fan wire connection.

Image 7-3
Electrical disconnection

4. Turn out the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws at the right side (reference 2).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

141

7. Cold mirror assembly

Image 7-4
Remove cold mirror

5. Remove both nuts at the left side (reference 3).

Support the assembly while removing the nuts.
6. Slide out the cold mirror assembly.

142

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

7. Cold mirror assembly

7.3

Replace the Cold Mirror

Necessary tools

7mm nut driver.

7mm open-end wrench.

3mm Allen wrench.

Latex or cotton gloves.

Slide caliper.

How to replace the Cold Mirror?

1. Loosen the three nuts (reference 11) at the rear side of the Cold Mirror. Use a 7mm open-end wrench.
2. Loosen the three lock nuts (reference 10) at the rear side of the Cold Mirror. Use a 7mm open-end wrench.
3. Loosen the three long screws (reference 1) at the front side of the Cold Mirror. Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.
4. Remove the small components (reference 5, 6, 7, 8 & 9) from the long screws (reference 1) and take of the Cold Mirror.
5. Install the new Cold Mirror. Ensure that all mounting parts (reference 1 to 9) upon the three long screws are placed in that order
as illustrated.
Caution: Do not touch the surface of the Cold Mirror. Use cotton gloves to handle the Cold Mirror.

10
5 6
1

11

Image 7-5

6. Tighten the three long screws until the distance between the Cold Mirror and frame is 17.4mm. Tighten the lower lock nut until
the distance between the Cold Mirror and the frame is 17.4mm.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

143

7. Cold mirror assembly

Image 7-6

7. Place a lock nut (reference 10) and a cap nut (reference 11) at the end of each long screw (reference 1).
Note: While tightening the lock nuts ensure that the distance between the Cold Mirror and frame remains 17.4mm. This position
of the screws correspond with nearly an optimal position of the mirror.

144

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

7. Cold mirror assembly

7.4

Installation of the cold mirror assembly

The cold mirror cannot be replaced separately. Always replace the whole assembly (mirror + heat sink + fan).

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench

Nut driver 7 mm
When unpacking the cold mirror assembly, check if there is no foam piece between the support plate and the
backside of the cold mirror. If so, remove that piece gently.
Remove the protective layer on the mirror side. Do not touch the mirror with your fingers or other object.

How to install the cold mirror assembly

1. Insert the cold mirror assembly on its place and hold the cold mirror assembly in its place. Secure with the two nuts (reference
1) at the left side. Use a 7 mm nut driver.
Caution: Make sure that the wire unit of the fan does not get jammed between the assembly and the projector chassis.
Caution:

Do not touch the surface of the cold mirror.

2
1

Image 7-7
Mount cold mirror

2. Fasten the right side of the cold mirror assembly using two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 2). Use a 3 mm Allen
wrench.
3. Reconnect the wire unit (reference 3) of the fan.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

145

7. Cold mirror assembly

Image 7-8

4. Install the cover of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated. The cover has to be fasten with 5 hexagon socket head cap screws.
Use for that a 3 mm Allen wrench.

Image 7-9

5. Close the sealed compartment. See "Close the sealed compartment", page 102.
6. Readjust the cold mirror. See "Adjusting the cold mirror", page 147.

146

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

7. Cold mirror assembly

7.5

Adjusting the cold mirror

The position of the xenon bulb in its reflector effects the position of the cold mirror with respect to the entrance
of the integration rod. Hence the adjustment of the cold mirror requires simultaneous adjustment of the xenon
bulb in its reflector for maximum light output. Once the cold mirror and xenon bulb are optimally adjusted,
the cold mirror should never be adjusted again. A xenon bulb replacement only requires realignment of the
lamp in its reflector. Only when a cold mirror is replaced, should it be readjusted.

Necessary tools

10 mm open-end wrench.

7 mm nut driver.

Light meter.

Slide caliper.

How to setup the projector for adjusting the cold mirror?

1. Remove the left cover and lamp cover of the projector.
2. Loosen the three lock nuts (reference 4 image 7-10) of the cold mirror adjustment screws. Use for that a 10 mm open-end wrench.

3
1

2
4

Image 7-10

32,5

17
,

32

,5

3. Check the nominal position of the cold mirror and if required adjust. The distance between the head of the each adjustment screw
(reference 1, 2 & 3 image 7-10) and the assembly plate should be 32,5 mm for nominal position. This distance corresponds with
17,4 mm between the cold mirror and its mounting surface. This nominal position is the best position to start the adjustment
procedure. Normally the cold mirror spare part is delivered with the cold mirror in its nominal position.

Image 7-11

4. Project a white test pattern.

5. Place the light meter in the center of the projected image.

How to adjust the cold mirror?

1. Turn the adjustment screw 2 (reference 2 image 7-12) in or out until the maximum light output is measured. Use for that a 7 mm
nut driver.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

147

7. Cold mirror assembly

Y
Z
1

2
X

Image 7-12

2. Turn the adjustment screw 3 (reference 3 image 7-12) in or out until the maximum light output is measured.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 until the maximum light output is measured.
4. Adjust the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis (reference X, Y & Z image 7-12) of the xenon lamp in the Lamp House for maximum light
output. Carefully turn the thumbscrew for maximum light output. Once over the maximum, turn slightly in opposite direction to
reach the maximum light output again. Do this for each direction and minimum repeat this adjustment cycle twice.
5. Turn the adjustment screw 1, 2 and 3 (reference 1, 2 & 3 image 7-12) equally in or out until the maximum light output is measured.
6. Repeat from step 1 until the maximum light output is measured.
7. Check the brightness uniformity. In most cases it will be OK.
If not OK, turn slightly on the adjustment screws 2 and 3 (reference 2 & 3 image 7-12) until a uniform brightness is obtained.
-

Screw 2 (reference 2 image 7-12) will correct the difference between the left and the right side of the projected image.

Screw 3 (reference 3 image 7-12) will correct the difference between the top and the bottom side of the projected image.

Check again and repeat if necessary.

8. When the adjustment is finished, secure the position of the cold mirror by turning the lock nuts (reference 4 image 7-12) against
the plate (hold on the screws while securing the nuts).

148

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

7. Cold mirror assembly

7.6

Cleaning the Cold Mirror

When cleaning the Cold Mirror?
Clean the Cold Mirror on a regular basis to maintain light output level.
This procedure requires that the Lamp House is removed from the projector.

Necessary tools

Compressed air.

Clean Toraysee cloth or any micro fiber lens cleaning cloth.

Clean cotton cloth.

Necessary parts
Lens cleaner (e.g. Carl Zeiss lens cleaner or Purasol or any waterbased lens cleaner)

How to clean the Cold Mirror?

1. Blow off dust with clean compressed air (or pressurized air cans).
2. Clean with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth to remove the dust and contamination. Use big wipes.
3. Use a dry lens cleaning cloth to remove left liquid or stripes. Polish with small circles.
4. If there are still fingerprints on the surface, wipe them off with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth. Polish again
with a dry one.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

149

7. Cold mirror assembly

150

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

8. 3D color wheel

8. 3D COLOR WHEEL
About this chapter
This chapter contains information about the optional 3D color wheel.

Preparations
Take out the light processor assembly from the projector. See "Light Processor assembly", page 163.
To replace the current mounted 3D color wheel, continue with "Remove the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series
projector", page 154 and follow then the installation procedure for a new 3D color wheel starting with "Unpacking", page 157.
To mount a 3D color wheel for the first time on the light processor assembly, start with "Remove rod entrance cooling block of a
DP2K- or DP4K-series projector", page 156 and continue with "Unpacking", page 157.

CAUTION: Remove the light processor of the projector only in a clean and dust free area. Never remove the
side cover in an area which is subject to airborne contaminants such as that produced by smoke machines
or similar.
Overview

Introduction

Parts location

Remove the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector

Remove rod entrance cooling block of a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector

Unpacking

Installation of the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector

Finalizing the installation

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

151

8. 3D color wheel

8.1

Introduction
Introduction of the 3D color wheel
The Barco digital projectors mentioned in the where to use list can be upgraded for 3D digital cinema by installing the 3D color
wheel. This 3D color wheel upgrade kit is designed by Barco and fits precisely upon the light pipe entrance of the digital projector.
When 3D content is applied to the digital projector, a rotating filter wheel is inserted between the lamp and the picture element. As
a result, the digital projector projects alternating full color images for the left eye and the right eye that are not quite identical with
respect to their primary color frequencies. The audience wears passive glasses with filtering lenses that are precisely tuned to these
differences, thereby preventing each eye from seeing the images intended for the other eye. Note that the rotating filter wheel is
retracted for 2D projection. This new technology eliminates the need for the impractical silver screens or the active-shutter glasses
of other systems.
The entrance and exit of the liquid cooling circuit, which passes through the 3D color wheel assembly, are equipped with respectively
a short and a long tube with a valved fitting for DP2K projectors. Extra valved fittings for the DP-xx00 series are delivered separately
and can be used to replace the current mounted fittings.
For DP2K-12C, remove the cooling tubes from the assembly.

Image 8-1
1
Female valved fitting on the tube of the liquid cooling circuit exit side.
2
Male valved fitting on the tube of the liquid cooling circuit entrance side.

Purpose of the upgrade kit

The 3D color wheel upgrade kit designed by Barco may only be used to upgrade Barco digital projector for 3D digital cinema.

152

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

8. 3D color wheel

8.2

Parts location
Parts location of the 3D color wheel assembly

6
1
7
2
8
3

9
4
5
Image 8-2
1
Socket for connection with the Formatter Interface Board (FIB) on a DP-xx00 series projector or with the backplane on a DP2K C series, DP2K/DP4K B series, or DP2K-S
series.
2
Color wheel retraction motor.
3
Liquid cooling circuit entrance (tube needs to be removed from assembly if the projector is not equipped with a liquid cooling circuit)1.
4
Light path exit.
5
Liquid cooling circuit exit (tube needs to be removed from assembly if the projector is not equipped with a liquid cooling circuit)1.
6
Cover plate 3D color wheel.
7
Spinning motor 3D color wheel.
8
3D color wheel.
9
Light path entrance.

1. DP2K-12C and DP2K-S series are not water cooled

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

153

8. 3D color wheel

8.3

Remove the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector

Necessary tools
Torx T10 screw driver

How to remove
1. Disconnect the data/power wire (reference 1) of the 3D color wheel assembly. Cut the wire ties. and remove the screw of the
temperature sensor (reference 3)

2
3

Image 8-3
Data/power cable connection

2. Uncouple the cooling circuit2 of the Light Processor from the cooling circuit (short tube) of the 3D color wheel assembly.

Image 8-4
Uncouple cooling circuit

3. Remove the mask (reference 2) by turning out both countersunk head screws (3). Use a Torx screw driver.
Caution: Take care not to damage the color wheel.

2. No liquid cooling circuit available in a DP2K-12C projector

154

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

8. 3D color wheel

Image 8-5
Remove mask

4. Turn out both countersunk head screws (1) and then, carefully slide the 3D color wheel backwards. Take care not to touch the
light pipe (4). It is very important to look straight into the light pipe (reference 4) via the light path opening (reference 3) of the
3D color wheel when doing this.
Caution: Any contact with the integration rod may cause damage.

3
4

Image 8-6
Remove 3D color wheel

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

155

8. 3D color wheel

8.4

Remove rod entrance cooling block of a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector

Cooling block for DP2K-12C has no cooling tubes.

Necessary tools

2 mm Allen wrench

2.5 mm Allen wrench

Torque wrench set to 2 Nm

How to remove
1. Check if nut C is still correctly secured. Use a torque wrench with a torque of 2Nm.
2. Remove the temperature sensor from the cooling block. Use a 2.5 mm Allen wrench.

C
1

Image 8-7

3. Uncouple the cooling circuit between the Light Processor unit and the cooling block by unplugging the two valved fittings.
To interrupt a valved fitting, press on the knob and pull out the connector.
4. Remove the cooling block at the light pipe entrance by removing the two socket head screws. Use a 2.5 mm Allen wrench.

Image 8-8

Caution:

156

Danger of damage to the integration rod (reference 1). Look through the opening (reference 2) of the cooling block
(Z-direction) while removing.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

8. 3D color wheel

8.5

Unpacking
Color wheel protection
To protect the color wheel during transport from scratches and dust, the color wheel is sealed with two covers (reference 2 & 5
image 8-9). These must be removed prior to installation. Note that all screws need to be reused.

Necessary tools
Torx screwdriver T10.

Unpacking the 3D color wheel assembly

1. Remove the three counter sunk screws (reference 1 image 8-9) which fasten the large cover (reference 2 image 8-9). Use a Torx
screwdriver T10.
2. Remove the large cover (reference 2 image 8-9).
3. Remove the two counter sunk screws (reference 3 image 8-9). Use a Torx screwdriver T10.
Caution: Makes sure that the color wheel is retracted (non acting position) so you can freely look through the light path opening.
Any contact with the integration rod may cause damage.
4. Remove the two counter sunk screws (reference 4 image 8-9) which fasten the small cover (reference 5 image 8-9). Use a Torx
screwdriver T10.
5. Remove the small cover (reference 5 image 8-9).

4
3
2
1
Image 8-9

6. Reinsert the three counter sunk screws (reference 1 image 8-10) as illustrated. Use a Torx screwdriver T10.

1
Image 8-10

CAUTION:

Do not touch the optical part of the color wheel.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

157

8. 3D color wheel

8.6

Installation of the 3D color wheel assembly on a DP2K- or DP4K-series projector

Necessary tools
Torx T10 screw driver

How to install
1. Make sure that the color wheel is retracted (non acting position) so you can freely look through the light path opening.

Image 8-11
Check color wheel

2. Carefully bring the 3D color wheel towards the light pipe. It is very important to look straight into the light pipe (reference 4)
via the light path opening (reference 3) of the 3D color wheel when doing this.
Caution: Any contact with the integration rod may cause damage.

3
4

Image 8-12
Mount 3D color wheel

3. Secure the 3D color wheel with two Torx countersunk head screws (reference 1 image 8-12) in combination with thread fastener,
Permabond type A130. Use a Torx screw driver.
Caution: Before fixing the 3D color wheel module with the countersunk screws provided, it is critical that the module is
seated-up fully against the light pipe reference surface. See reference 6 on image 8-12. This will ensure the module
is correctly positioned while allowing secure fixing. Failure to do this could result in wheel breakage.
4. Install the mask (reference 2) into its socket as illustrated.
-

For a DP2K-xxC series projector, use the mask plate with engraved number R858504..

For a DP2K-xxB series projector, use the mask plate with engraved number R858505.

For a DP4K-xxB series projector, use the mask plate with engraved number R8760120.

Fasten with two Torx countersunk head screws (reference 3). Use a Torx screw driver.
Caution: Do not use any screws other than the 4 countersunk screws provided to avoid wheel breakage.
Caution:

158

Do not touch the color wheel while inserting the mask.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

8. 3D color wheel

Image 8-13
Mask plate

5. Fasten the temperature sensor (reference 2) with a hexagon socket head screw (reference 1) onto the 3D color wheel assembly
as illustrated. Use a 2.5 mm Allen wrench.

1
2

Image 8-14
Temperature sensor

6. Couple the cooling circuit3 of the Light Processor together with the cooling circuit (short tube) of the 3D color wheel assembly.

3. No liquid cooling circuit available in a DP2K-12C projector

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

159

8. 3D color wheel

Image 8-15
Cooling connection

7. Connect the data/power wire (reference 1) with the control board of the 3D color wheel assembly. Secure the data/power wire
unit (1) and the temperature sensor wire unit (reference 3) with cable ties (reference 2) as illustrated. Guide the other side of the
data/power wire from the cooling tube to the cable tree.
Caution: Make sure the temperature sensor is properly fixed and makes good contact with the module.
Caution:

Make sure when strapping the data/power wire unit to the cooling tube, there is no stress on the cable.

2
3

Image 8-16
Data/power cable connection

8. Guide the other end of the data/power wire unit (reference 3) next to the wire tree.
After installation of the 3D color wheel assembly proceed with installing the Light Processor unit. Then fill up
the cooling circuit.

After installation, the 3D color wheel assembly still needs to be calibrated. Use the 3D calibration kit (Order
No. R9856230) which includes the software and manual with instructions on how to calibrate your 3D color
wheel.

160

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

8. 3D color wheel

8.7

Finalizing the installation

Execute the following steps :
1. Install the light processor assembly in the projector.
2. Top up the cooling liquid reservoir.
3. Close all covers again.
4. Clear the security warning due to opening the sealed compartment.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

161

8. 3D color wheel

162

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9. LIGHT PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY

About this chapter
This chapter describes how to replace the complete light processor assembly. Furthermore, this chapter includes the replacement
procedure of some sub assemblies. The information about the convergence adjustment and the integration rod is grouped in separate chapters.

Overview

Introduction

Light Processor diagnostic

Remove light processor top cover

Electrical disconnection

Light processor assembly removal

Preparing the new light processor assembly

Installation of the light processor assembly

Electrical connections

Mount light processor cover

Finalize the installation of the light processor assembly

Replacement of the dowser (shutter)

Replacement of the Light Sensor Module

Adjusting the Fold Mirror

Adjusting the notch filter

Cleaning the Prism exit side

Replacement of the Peltier element from the DMD

Replacement of a Peltier element from the heat pipe cooling block

Preparations
First execute the following steps to access the light processor assembly:

Remove the side cover, see "Removal of the side cover", page 97.

Remove the top cover, see "Removal of the top cover", page 99.

Open the sealed compartment, see "Open the sealed compartment", page 101.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

163

9. Light Processor assembly

9.1

Introduction
Light Processor assembly
The light processor assembly has three major sub assemblies, namely: the Light Processor Unit (reference 1) with dowser (reference
2) and the Light Pipe assembly (reference 3).

1
2

Image 9-1
Light processor assembly

Light Pipe
The Light Pipe transforms the light emitted by the lamp into a homogeneous light beam and focuses this beam precisely on the active
surface of the DMDs. The Light Pipe contains the Integration Rod at the Light Pipe entrance, the Light Pipe focus and rotation knobs
which matches the size of the light beam with the size of the DMDs, the Folding Mirror which folding up the light path of the projector
to make the projector more compact, and the Light Sensor Module which ensures a Constant Light Output (CLO) of the projector.
Furthermore, the Light Pipe has a Notch filter on the exit which applies some small color corrections on the light coming out of the
Light Pipe.

8
7
5

4
2
1

Image 9-2
Light pipe assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

164

Light sensor unit

Fold mirror cover
Notch filter adjustment
Rod entrance
Rod lock nut
Rod focus knob
Rod focus lever
Notch filter
Fold mirror

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

Light Processor
The Light Processor is the heart of the projector. The prism of the Light Processor splits up the homogeneous white light coming
from the Light Pipe into red, green and blue light. The video information on the three DMDs is integrated with these red green and
blue light beams. The prism merges the three integrated light beams back in to one full color video image, which is projected via
the lens onto the screen.
Each DMD has its own formatting board which drives the micro mirrors to integrate the video signal into the light beam. A lot of heat is
produced during the integration of the video information. To protect the DMDs for overheating the Light Processor is equipped with a
liquid cooling circuit. Each channel has its own cooling block. To improve the heat extraction a Peltier element is mounted between
the rear side of the DMD and its cooling block. Heat pipes are used to drain the heat from the front of the DMDs to a common
cooling block. To improve the heat extraction from the front of the DMDs three extra Peltier elements are mounted between these
heat pipes and common cooling block. Note that the cooling circuit of the Light Processor includes a cooling block for the Light Pipe
entrance.
The Light Processor is equipped with 12 temperature sensors. Each channel has one temperature sensor at the front of the DMD,
one at the rear of the DMD and one on its cooling block. The common cooling block (front cooling via heat pipes) has also one
temperature sensor and the cooling block for the Light Pipe entrance has also one temperature sensor. One temperature sensor is
used the measure the ambient temperature of the compartment of the Light Processor assembly. These temperature sensors helps
to drive the six Peltier elements and to protect the Light Processor for overheating.
The red and green channel are equipped with three extended adjustment knobs to convergence the DMD with the DMD of the blue
channel which is the reference channel for convergence alignment.
The air gab between the prism and DMD is sealed to protect the DMDs for dust. It is important to know that a misaligned light path
which reflects upon the sealing will damage the sealing very rapidly. At the bottom of the prism exit a touch sensor is mounted
to protect the prism against accidental lens movements. Note that the Light Processor Unit is equipped with a motorized shutter
(dowser) in front of the prism exit.

3
2
5

Image 9-3
Light processor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Formatting board blue channel

Common cooling block DMD front cooling
Formatting board green channel
Convergence adjustment knob
Cooling circuit
Cooling block DMD
Cooling block for light pipe entrance
Prism exit

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

165

9. Light Processor assembly

9.2

Light Processor diagnostic

Troubleshooting of the Light Processor assembly
There are several reasons why a removal or a replacement of the Light Processor is required. Nevertheless, try to avoid unnecessary removal of the Light Processor. The list below gives an overview of the most common problems which require removal or
replacement of the Light Processor. Check this list to ensure the problem is caused by the Light Processor.

Artifacts in the projected image. These artifacts are also visible on the internal service patterns of the FIB or Formatter boards.

A crack in the prism, which can result in convergence problems and may disables you to focus the projected image.

Defect Peltier element, which causes a too high DMD temperature.

Damaged integration rod, which causes permanent spots in the projected image.

Unacceptable amount of dark, bright or flat state pixels on one or more DMDs.

Blocked dowser (shutter). Dowser does not respond when pressing the DOWSER button.

Leakage in liquid cooling circuit.

Check the projector log files for errors or warnings and look for a solution in the chapter "Troubleshooting",
page 29

166

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.3

Remove light processor top cover

Necessary tools
No tools.

How to remove
1. Slide the cover forward so that the side hooks are unlocked (1).

Image 9-4
Light processor top cover

2. Take off the cover (2)

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

167

9. Light Processor assembly

9.4

Electrical disconnection
Where to find the connections
When looking from the top side, the connections are situated left and right of the big fan.
The left side are the formatter connections.
The right side are temperature controls, such as Peltier elements, sensors and motor controls for the shutter.

Image 9-5
Light processor cables, connector locations

Where to disconnect
1. Unplug all cables at the right and the left side of the fan.
Caution: The connectors of the formatter cables are with lock mechanism. Push on that the unlock mechanism to pull out the
cables.
Note:

168

Do not unplug the connectors just below the fan.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.5

Light processor assembly removal

Necessary tools

Flat screw driver 6 x 150

Allen wrench 4 mm

How to remove
1. Remove the lens (see user guide of the projector).
2. Release the two captive screws at the base of the light processor (1 and 2). Use a 6 mm flat screw driver or a 10 mm nut driver.

2
1

Image 9-6
Light processor fixation

3. Turn out the hexagon head screw at the left side of the light processor (3).
4. Interrupt the liquid cooling circuit by uncoupling both valved fitting4. Once valved fitting is located in the tube coming from the
pump and leading to the light processor. The second valved fitting is located in the tube coming from the light pipe entrance and
leading to the heat exchanger.
To interrupt a valved fitting, press on the knob (1) and pull out the connector (2).

4. not for DP2K-12C

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

169

9. Light Processor assembly

Image 9-7
Open cooling circuit

5. Take the light processor unit by its handles and gently pull out the light processor assembly of its compartment.

Image 9-8
Remove light processor assembly

6. Place the light processor assembly on a stable table.

170

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.6

Preparing the new light processor assembly

How to remove from the flight case
1. Open all flight case locks and open the flight case.
2. Release the two captive screws at the base of the light processor (1 and 2). Use a 6 mm flat screw driver or a 10 mm nut driver.

Image 9-9
Loosen light processor assembly fixations

3. To take out the light processor assembly, take it by both handles (1 & 2), slide it forward until the positioning pin are free and lift
it up to remove from the flight case.

Image 9-10
Remove light processor assembly

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

171

9. Light Processor assembly

The flight case must be reused to send back the removed light processor assembly.

172

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.7

Installation of the light processor assembly

Necessary tools

Flat screw driver 6 x 150

Allen wrench 4 mm

How to install
1. Make sure there is no lens mounted.
2. Check if the corner bracket is mounted on the new assembly. If not yet mounted, remove the corner bracket of the removed
assembly and mount it on the new one.

Image 9-11
corner bracket light processor assembly

3. Take the light processor assembly by its handles and gently slide in the assembly into the compartment of the projector.
Make sure that the positioning pins (P) at the backside of the assemble match the positioning holes (H) in the projector.
Note: While inserting the assembly, guide the cables to the back plane side. Guide LVDS and power cables through the hole
(1) in the back plate and all other cables (2) around the back plate.

Image 9-12
Cable routing

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

173

9. Light Processor assembly

P
Image 9-13
Light processor installation

4. Secure the light processor assembly by fastening both captive screws (1 & 2).

174

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

2
1

Image 9-14
Light processor fixation

5. Fixate the corner bracket to the projector frame with an hexagon head screw (3).
6. Close the cooling circuit.
Plug in the connector with the tube coming from the pump into the connector going to the light processor.
Plug in the connector, mounted on the tube coming from the light pipe cooling block into the connector, mounted on the tube
going to the heat exchanger.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

175

9. Light Processor assembly

Image 9-15
Close cooking

176

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.8

Electrical connections
Preparations
Guide all cables to the connector side of the backplane.

Formatter connections
All formatter cables, data and power, have a colored cable tie. There are 2 cables per color available, both with a different connector.
The color name is screen on the printed circuit board. Plug in the cable with e.g. a red cable tie into the connector with the same
size and with the indication red. Repeat for all other cables.

Other connections (right side)

Color convention for the connections.

J282

J283

J270

J271

J272

J279

J14

J273

J274

J275

J276

J277

J278

J262

J261

J260

J291

J253

J254

J255

J250

J251

J252

J280

Image 9-17
Color coding cables, image

J281

Image 9-16
Color coding cables

The color indication on the socket corresponds with the colored cable tie on the cable next to the connector.
The screened color indication just above the sockets corresponds with the color of the wires in the cable tree.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

177

9. Light Processor assembly

9.9

Mount light processor cover

How to mount
1. Place the cover on top of the projector (1) so that the hooks (H) on both sides match with the holes (F).

H
F

Image 9-18

2. Slide the cover backwards until the hooks slide under the top frame (2).

178

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.10 Finalize the installation of the light processor assembly

Execute the following steps :
1. Close the sealed compartment, "Close the sealed compartment", page 102.
2. Install the top cover, "Installation of the top cover", page 103.
3. Install the side cover, "Installation of the side cover", page 105.
4. Clear the security warning due to opening the sealed compartment.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

179

9. Light Processor assembly

9.11 Replacement of the dowser (shutter)

Dowser assembly
The dowser or shutter (dowser is more common in the cinema market and shutter in the events market) of the projector is mounted
upon the Light Processor just above the light output path of the prism. The dowser assembly has an open and a close state. In
the close state the dowser blade shuts off the light beam between the Light Processor (DMDs) and lens. In the open state, the
dowser is retracted from the light beam. Note that the local keypad has a dedicated button DOWSER to operate the dowser.
The Light Processor has to be removed from the projector before replacing the dowser. This procedure assumes that the Light Processor is already removed from the projector.

Necessary tools
2,5 mm Allen wrench.

How to replace the dowser of the Light Processor

1. Disconnect the wire unit of the dowser.

Image 9-19
Dowser connection

2. Remove the dowser assembly from the Light Processor be releasing both hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1) as
illustrated. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.

Image 9-20
Remove fixation screws

3. Place a new dowser assembly in position and fasten with two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1). Use a 2,5 mm
Allen wrench.

180

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

Image 9-21
Mount new dowser

4. Reconnect the wire unit of the dowser image 9-19.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

181

9. Light Processor assembly

9.12 Replacement of the Light Sensor Module

Purpose of the Light Sensor in the Light Pipe
To obtain a Constant Light Output (CLO) from the projector a light sensor is mounted just behind the fold mirror. On a regular base
the controller of the projector read the measured values of this light sensor and, if required, sends corrective information to the Lamp
Power Supply (LPS).
The left cover has to be removed from the projector to replace the Light Sensor Module. This procedure assumes that the left cover is already removed from the projector.

Necessary tools

TX10 Torx screw driver.

Light meter.

How to replace the Light Sensor Module of the Light Processor

1. Disconnect the wire unit from the Light Sensor Module.

Image 9-22
Light sensor connection

2. Remove the Light Sensor Module by releasing the two Torx screws (reference 1). Use a TX10 Torx screw driver.

Image 9-23
Light sensor unit removal

3. Install a new Light Sensor Module. Use a TX10 Torx screw driver to fasten both screws (reference 1).
4. Reconnect the wire unit with Light Info Module (image 9-22).
5. Place a light meter in the center of the screen and calibrate the Light Sensor Module. For detailed instructions see user guide of
the Communicator software.

182

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.13 Adjusting the Fold Mirror

Purpose of the Fold Mirror
The fold mirror is folding up the light path of the projector to make the projector more compact. The fold mirror is located at the left
side of the light pipe and reflects the light, which entrance the light pipe via the integration rod, upon the prism of the light processor.
The position of the light spot upon the DMDs can be adjusted with the fold mirror.

CAUTION: Normally the Fold Mirror should never be readjusted in the field. In case a readjustment is required

follow the instructions in this chapter precisely. Only qualified technicians who have experience with adjusting the Fold Mirror may adjust the Fold Mirror. A misaligned Fold Mirror may cause irreversible damage to
other parts of the projector!

To access all three adjustment screws of the Fold Mirror the left side cover has to be removed from the projector. Both top adjustment screws are easy accessible but to reach the bottom screw, the Fold Mirror cover
plate together with the light sensor unit has be removed from the Light Pipe. This procedure assumes that
the left side cover is already removed from the projector.

In most cases the Fold Mirror can be correctly aligned by turning the upper two adjustment screws of the Fold
Mirror. These upper two screws can be accessed with a nut driver through the holes of the Fold Mirror cover.
So, the removal of the Fold Mirror cover is unnecessary.

How to adjust the Fold Mirror

1. Disconnect the wire unit from the Light Sensor Module.
2. Remove the Fold Mirror cover and the Light Sensor Module as a whole from the Light Pipe as illustrated. Remove both indicated
Torx screw (reference 1).

Image 9-24
Fold mirror, access adjustments

3. Start up de projector and display a white test pattern with maximum dimming.
Caution: Projecting a misaligned light spot for more then 10 seconds may cause irreversible damage to the Light Processor.
Therefore, it is important to maximum dim the light output and adjust the light spot as quickly as possible.
4. Turn the adjustment screws A, B or C in or out until the light spot (5) matches with the outline of the DMDs (4). Use a 5,5 mm open
end wrench. The illustration below shows the movements of the light spot (5) upon the screen (6) for each adjustment screw.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

183

9. Light Processor assembly

4
5

Image 9-25
Fold mirror, adjustment

5. Reinstall the cover of the Fold Mirror.

6. Reconnect the Light Sensor Module.
7. Place a light meter in the center of the screen and calibrate the Light Sensor Module. For detailed instructions see user guide of
the Communicator software.

184

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.14 Adjusting the notch filter

Purpose of the notch filter
The notch filter is a coated glass plate located at the end of the light pipe assembly. The notch filter applies some small color
corrections of the light coming out of the light pipe, which is emitted by the xenon lamp of the projector. This is done to achieve an
optimal color calibration of the native colors. The notch filter can slightly turn, with respect to the light path, which allows a small
adjustment of the native colors. Note that, next to the pure optical color calibration by the notch filter, there is also a software color
calibration.
0.9

520

0.8

540

0.7
560
0.6
500
0.5

580

0.4
0.3

600
620
490

700

0.2
480

0.1
0.0
0.0

470
460
0.1

380
0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

Image 9-26
Color gamut.

Target range for x, y Chroma values

Uncorrected GREEN: (changes together with red)

-

x : 0.245 0.285

y : 0.67 0.71

Uncorrected RED: (changes together with green)

-

x : 0.67 0.69

y :0.31 0.33

Uncorrected BLUE: (no impact)

-

x : 0.12 0.16

y : 0.02 0.8
To access the notch filter, the left side cover has to be removed from the projector. This procedure assumes
that the left side cover is already removed from the projector.

Necessary tools
No tools.

How to adjust the notch filter

1. Release the Thumb screw (reference 1) of the notch filter.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

185

9. Light Processor assembly

Image 9-27
Notch filter, adjustment button

2. Start up the projector and display an uncorrected red test pattern.

Tip:
See user guide of the Communicator software for detail instructions about color calibration
3. Measure the X and Y values of the projected red test pattern. Use for that a colorimeter. Make sure that the red test pattern is
uncorrected.
4. Slightly move the adjustment button up or down until the measured X and Y values are within the required specs. (See above)
Note: The adjustment range of the notch filter is limited. For most projectors the mid position gives also the most optimal result.
5. Fasten the thumb screw again (reference 1), to secure the position of the notch filter. Make sure that the position of the notch
filter remains unchanged while fastening the thumb screw.

186

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

9.15 Cleaning the Prism exit side

When should one clean the Prism exit side?
Clean the Prism exit on a regular basis to maintain light output level.
This procedure requires that the lens is removed from the projector.

Necessary tools

Compressed air.

Clean Toraysee cloth or any micro fiber lens cleaning cloth.

Necessary parts
Lens cleaner (e.g. Carl Zeiss lens cleaner or Purasol or any waterbased lens cleaner)

How to clean the Prism exit side?

1. Wipe off the dust of the Prism exit. Use for that a clean Lens cleaning cloth.
Tip:
Limit the number of wipe movements. This to protect the optical coating. It is better to wipe off the dust with one good
wipe movement than with 10 soft wipe movements.
2. Is all dust removed from the Prism exit?
If yes, stop this cleaning procedure.
If no, wipe off the dust of the Prism exit with a clean lens cleaning cloth and lens cleaner.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

187

9. Light Processor assembly

9.16 Replacement of the Peltier element from the DMD

To replace the Peltier from the DMD the Light Processor must be removed from the projector. This procedure
assumes that the Light Processor is already removed.

The illustration in this procedure are from the red channel. Nevertheless the same procedure is applicable for
the green and blue channel as well.

Necessary tools

Torque wrench with a 2,5 mm Allen socket.

Set of pliers.

Clean cloth.

Necessary parts

Peltier element.

Tube with thermal paste.

Cable ties.

How to replace
1. Cut the connector of the Peltier element and pull the wires out of the cable tree.
Or,
remove the spiral around cable tree and take out the wires of the Peltier element.
2. Remove the cooling block by releasing the four hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1) as illustrated. Note that the
screws are captured with a plastic ring.

1
1

1
2

Image 9-28

3. Remove the Peltier element (reference 2 of image 9-28) and remove all old thermal paste from the Peltier socket and bottom
side of the cooling block. Use a clean cloth to remove the old thermal paste.
4. Rub some thermal paste on both sides of the new Peltier element .
5. Place the new Peltier element in its socket, slide a little bit up and down to ensure a good contact and finally slide it against the
upright sides of both studs (reference 3).
Caution: Make sure that the cold side (reference 4) of the Peltier element is facing the socket and make sure that the Peltier
element is not laying on the studs.

188

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

3
4

Image 9-29

6. Reinstall the cooling block upon the new Peltier element. Use a torque wrench with a 2,5 mm Allen socket to fasten the four
screws (reference 1 of image 9-28) crosswise with a torque of 0,9 Nm.
7. Reinstall the spiral around the cable tree.
Or,
use cable ties to secure the wires.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

189

9. Light Processor assembly

9.17 Replacement of a Peltier element from the heat pipe cooling block
To replace the Peltier from the heat pipe cooling block the Light Processor must be removed from the projector. This procedure assumes that the Light Processor is already removed.

The illustration in this procedure shows a replacement of the Peltier of the red channel. Nevertheless the
same procedure is applicable for the green and blue channel.

Necessary tools

Torque wrench with a 2,5 mm Allen socket.

Set of pliers.

Clean cloth.

Necessary parts

Peltier element.

Tube with thermal paste.

Cable ties.

How to replace
1. Cut the connector of the Peltier element and pull the wires out of the cable tree.
Or,
remove the spiral around cable tree and take out the wires of the Peltier element.
2. Remove the common cooling block by releasing the eleven hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1, 3 & 5) as illustrated.
Note that two screws (reference 3) are sunken and one screw (reference 5) has an additional washer (reference 7) and nut
(reference 8).

2
6

8
Image 9-30

3. Remove the Peltier element (reference 2 of image 9-30) and remove all old thermal paste from the Peltier socket and bottom
side of the common cooling block. Use a clean cloth to remove the old thermal paste.
4. Rub some thermal paste on both sides of the new Peltier element .
5. Place the new Peltier element in its place as illustrated. Slide a little bit up and down to ensure a good contact.
Caution: Make sure that the cold side (reference 4) of the Peltier element is facing downwards.
190

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

9. Light Processor assembly

Image 9-31

6. Reinstall the common cooling block upon the new Peltier element. Use a torque wrench with a 2,5 mm Allen socket to fasten
the eleven screws (reference 1, 3 & 5 of image 9-30) crosswise with a torque of 0,9 Nm. Note that two screws, which are longer
(reference 3), are sunken and one screw (reference 5) has an additional washer (reference 7) and nut (reference 8).
7. Reinstall the spiral around the cable tree.
Or,
use cable ties to secure the wires.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

191

9. Light Processor assembly

192

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

10. Convergence

10. CONVERGENCE
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to prepare the projector for convergence adjustment and how to adjust the convergence with the extenders.

Overview

Convergence controls

Preparing the convergence adjustment

Red on Blue convergence

Green on Blue convergence

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

193

10. Convergence

10.1 Convergence controls

Extended control knobs
As the DMD of the blue channel is not accessible in the projector, the image of this DMD will be taken as reference. Red and green
will be aligned on blue when a small convergence drift is recognized. So, the DMD of the blue channel is fixed and can not be
adjusted. The red and green channel is equipped with three extended control knobs for convergence adjustment. The adjustment
knobs are numbered from 1 to 6 and have the same color as the channel which they effect (1, 2 and 3 for red and 4, 5 and 6 for
green).

1
4

2
6

Image 10-1
Convergence knobs
1
2
3
4
5
6

194

Red channel, knob number 1

Red channel, knob number 2
Red channel, knob number 3
Green channel, knob number 4
Green channel, knob number 5
Green channel, knob number 6

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

10. Convergence
Convergence test pattern

6
3

2
5

2
5

Image 10-2
Convergence test pattern

The test pattern illustrated above is specially designed for convergence purposes. The test pattern has three red arrows numbered
from 1 to 3 and three green arrows numbered from 4 to 6. These numbers and colors correspond with the numbers and colors of
the extended control knobs (image 10-1). The direction of the arrow shows the movement of the channel color (red or green) when
turning the corresponding knob in the direction indicated by the arrow marked on the knob.
The three convergence control knobs of one channel stand in relation with each other. So, a change to one
of them will also effect the adjustment results of the two others. Therefore, all three control knobs have to
be alternately and repeatedly adjusted until the projected color is perfectly converged with the blue reference
color of the test pattern.

Adjustment range

The adjustment range is limited to approximately 30 pixels in both directions.

One turn (360) of a control knob relates to an approximately 30 pixel displacement on the screen.

When changing the adjustment direction there will be some play of approximately one turn (360).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

195

10. Convergence

10.2 Preparing the convergence adjustment

Necessary tools
Flat blade screwdriver

Prepare projector for convergence adjustment

1. Remove all side covers and top cover of the projector, see "Removal and installation of the projector covers", page 93.
2. Open the sealed compartment of the light processor, see "Open the sealed compartment", page 101.
3. Remove the convergence cover plate as follow:
a) Slide the plate forwards until all hooks at both sides of the plate become free.
b) Take off the plate.

B
A
2
1

Image 10-3
Convergence cover plate

4. Reinstall the lens and start up the projector.

5. Use the Communicator software to activate the convergence test pattern.
3
6

2
5

Image 10-4
Convergence test pattern

196

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

10. Convergence

10.3 Red on Blue convergence

This procedure can only be executed when all preparations are taken to converge the image.

Necessary tools
No tools.

How to converge
1. Slightly turn the red colored control knob number 1 until the red pattern in the center of the projected image converges with the
blue pattern. Note that a turn of a few degrees corresponds with one full pixel.
Note: When start turning the knob, a little resistance can be felt. This resistance is part of the internal locking mechanism of
the adjustment.

Image 10-5
Clockwise turning will move line downwards.

2. Slightly turn the red colored control knob number 2 until the red pattern in the lower left of the projected image converges with
the blue pattern.

2
5
Image 10-6
Clockwise turning will move the line upwards.

3. Slightly turn the red colored control knob number 3 until the red pattern in the upper right of the projected image converges with
the blue pattern.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

197

10. Convergence

3
6
Image 10-7
Clockwise turning will move the line upwards

4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 until coincidence is obtained of the red pattern in the lower left and upper right of the projected image.
5. Repeat from step 1 until full coincidence is obtained of the red pattern in the center, lower left and upper right of the projected
image.

198

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

10. Convergence

10.4 Green on Blue convergence

This procedure can only be executed when all preparations are taken to converge the image.

Necessary tools
No tools.

How to converge
1. Slightly turn the green colored control knob number 4 until the green pattern in the center of the projected image converges with
the blue pattern. Note that a turn of a few degrees corresponds with one full pixel.
Note: When start turning the knob, a little resistance can be felt. This resistance is part of the internal locking mechanism of
the adjustment.

4
Image 10-8
Clockwise turning will move the line downwards.

2. Slightly turn the green colored control knob number 5 until the green pattern in the lower left of the projected image converges
with the blue pattern.

2
5
Image 10-9
Clockwise turning will move the line upwards.

3. Slightly turn the green colored control knob number 6 until the green pattern in the upper right of the projected image converges
with the blue pattern.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

199

10. Convergence

3
6
Image 10-10
Clockwise turning will move the line upwards.

4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 until coincidence is obtained of the green pattern in the lower left and upper right of the projected image.
5. Repeat from step 1 until full coincidence is obtained of the green pattern in the center, lower left and upper right of the projected
image.
6. Close the sealed compartment and reinstall all covers of the projector.

200

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11. Integrator rod

11. INTEGRATOR ROD

About this chapter
Overview

Introduction

Rod diagnostic

Removal of the integrator rod

Installation of a new integrator rod

Adjusting the integrator rod

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

201

11. Integrator rod

11.1 Introduction
Functionality of the integrator rod
The integrator rod is made of fused silica. The cross-section of the rod has the same aspect ratio as the active surface of the DMDs
used in the light processor. The function of the integrator rod is to match the shape of the light path to the shape of the DMDs and
to neutralize the hot spot effect caused by the light source. Futhermore, the integration rod ensures that the light beam is focused
on the DMDs, which results in an optimally focused light beam on the screen.
The integrator rod is located at the entrance of the light pipe. The light emitted by the lamp is reflected via the cold mirror into the
rod, which integrates the incoming light into a homogeneous rectangle shaped beam of light.

Image 11-1

The entrance and exit side of the integrator rod are coated to achieve optimal performance. Clearly the rod may never be contaminated with grease, dirt, liquid or the such. for optimal protection the rod is mounted inside an aluminium tube, which requires
replacing together with the rod. This aluminum tube also contains an adjustment mechanism to position the rod inside the light pipe.
The integrator rod, the aluminium tube and the adjustment mechanism together form the integrator rod assembly.

CAUTION: Use cotton gloves to handle the integrator rod.

Greasy fingerprints or other dirt on the integrator

rod will burn into the rod and cause permanent damage.

202

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11. Integrator rod

11.2 Rod diagnostic

General
Due to bad environmental conditions the integration rod may become contaminated with grease, dust, dirt or other particles, which
will burn into the rod and cause permanent damage. As a result spots may become visible in the projected image on the screen. To
confirm that these spots are caused by a damages to the rod please diagnose the rod as described in the following procedure.

How to diagnose the integrator rod of the projector

1. Remove the side cover of the projector.
Caution: Remove the side cover of the projector only in a clean and dust free area. Never remove the side cover in an area
which is subject to airborne contaminants such as that produced by smoke machines or similar.
2. Switch on the projector and project a white test pattern. See users manual of the projector to do so. Make sure that the projected
white test pattern is focused.
3. Loosen the lock nut on the light pipe (1)

3
1

Image 11-2

4. Gently move the handle (3) forward or backward while watching the projected image.
5. Do you see spots in the projected image rotate along with the movements of the rod?
If yes, these spots are caused by damages to the integration rod. Replace the rod assembly.
If no, integration rod is OK. Re-adjust and secure the integration rod and reinstall the side cover of the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

203

11. Integrator rod

11.3 Removal of the integrator rod

To remove the integrator rod from the light pipe the light processor unit has to be removed from the projector
first.

CAUTION: All servicing to the Light Processor unit has to be done in a dust free area. Use compressed air to
blow away all dust on the outside of the Light Processor unit before entering the unit into the dust free area.

Necessary tools

Allen wrench 2.5 mm

Allen wrench 3 mm

How to remove
1. Disconnect the cable of the light sensor unit.
2. Turn out both screws ( reference 1) and slide out the eye plate.
Note: Light processor may be placed on the pins and the top of the processor mechanics. without damaging any part inside
the assembly.

Image 11-3

3. Turn out the screws of the light pipe housing (4 times 2 screws)

204

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11. Integrator rod

4

3
2

Image 11-4
Light pipe housing

4. Take off the housing.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

205

11. Integrator rod

Image 11-5
Inner side light processor

5. Take out the lens.

6. Squeeze the spring and take it out.
7. Remove the 4 screws of the rod cover.
8. Slide the rod to the left until it comes out of the cooling block.
Then, take out the rod.

Image 11-6
Moving rod

206

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11. Integrator rod

11.4 Installation of a new integrator rod

CAUTION: Use cotton gloves to handle the integrator rod.

Greasy fingerprints or other dirt on the integrator

rod will burn into the rod and cause permanent damage.

How to install
1. Unpack the new integrator rod very carefully.
Be careful not to damage the integrator rod.
2. From the left, slide the integrator rod into the opening in the cooling block (1) Do not touch the entrance of the integration rod to
any mechanical part of the cooling block. That can damage the rod severely with a bad image as result.

Image 11-7
Mount integration rod

3. Slide it in so that the front of the other side of the integrator rod is equal with entrance of the rod holder (2)
Again, do not slide in the integrator rod too far to avoid damage to the entrance of the rod.
4. Place the integrator rod cover plate on its place (1) and secure with the 4 screws (2).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

207

11. Integrator rod

1
2
4
3

Image 11-8
Light pipe, inside

5. Take the spring, squeeze it and insert it in the compartment (reference 3, image 11-8).
Do not touch the output of the integrator rod while inserting the spring.
Release the spring once it is on its place.
6. Insert the lens with the convex side to the left (away from the rod entrance cooling block) (reference 4, image 11-8).
7. Place the light pipe housing back on its place and secure with 4 x 2 screws.

208

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11. Integrator rod

3
2

Image 11-9
Light pipe cover, mount

8. Insert the eye plate and secure with both screws.

Image 11-10
Eye plate, insert

9. Connect the light sensor cable to the light sensor unit.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

209

11. Integrator rod

Normally the adjustment of the integrator rod should be correct. If not correct, continue with "Adjusting the
integrator rod", page 211.

210

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

11. Integrator rod

11.5 Adjusting the integrator rod

Necessary tools

Wrench 7 mm

Torque wrench 7 mm

How to adjust
1. Loosen the lock nut on the light pipe.

3
1

Image 11-11
Integrator rod adjustment

2. start up the projector but do not activate the lamp yet.

3. By using the Communicator software, set up the projector to display a white internal pattern with minimum lamp power. Do not
activate the lamp yet !
a) Switch on the projector. Do not activate the lamp yet.
b) Log on to the Communicator as Service technician and select: Installation > Lamp > Light output, and adjust
lamp dimming slider to 0.
c) Select : Control > Test patterns > Full white
Caution:

Maximum five (5) seconds are allowed of minimum light output on an non-adjusted Integration Rod. Otherwise, the
sealing between the DMDs and the prism will be damaged.

4. Activate the lamp and zoom the projector lens in or out until the projected image is focused.
Note: Test pattern must be displayed sharp.
5. Remove the Fold Mirror cover and the Light Sensor Module as a whole from the Light Pipe as illustrated. Remove both indicated
Torx screw (reference 1).

Image 11-12
Fold mirror, access adjustments

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

211

11. Integrator rod

6. Turn the lower nut of the folding mirror until the upper and left edge of the rod can be seen on the screen.
7. Gently rotate ring 2 back or forward to a position which projects the sharpest possible edges on the screen.

Image 11-13

8. Gently move the handle 3 back or forward to a position so that the projected light beam matches the projected outline of the
DMDs
Note: No spots in the projected image may move along with the movements of the rod. Spots which move with the movements
of the rod indicates that the exit side of the integrator rod is contaminated with dust. If this is the case, remove the
integrator rod and try to blow away the dust. If this doesnt help replace the integration rod.

Image 11-14

9. Fasten the lock nut (1) with a torque of 2 Nm.

10.Turn the lower nut of the folding mirror back to its original position (see alignment procedure of the folding mirror for the correct
alignment)
11. Mount the Fold Mirror cover and the Light Sensor Module.

212

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12. LIQUID COOLING CIRCUIT

About this chapter
This chapter describes how to maintain the liquid cooling circuit of the projector.

WARNING:

All actions performed on the Liquid Cooling Circuit should occur in normal ambient conditions
(approximately 25 C). The projector should have sufficiently cooled down (minimum 2 hours).

WARNING: Hazardous product:

Blue antifreeze diluted 1,2 ethanediol (1/3 ethanediol 2/3 Demi water).

Not for household use. Keep out of reach of children. Harmful by oral intake. Avoid exposure to pregnant
women. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Avoid inhalation of the noxious fumes.

WARNING: Only use Barco approved cooling liquid to refill the liquid cooling circuit of the projector. Neglecting this may lead to irreversible damage of the projector.

Handling the cooling liquid

Avoid contact of the liquid with Eyes, Skin and Clothing.

Avoid inhaling of the noxious fumes.

Conserve the product in the original package and in a well ventilated room.

Personal protection rules

Handle the cooling liquid in a well ventilated room.

Under no circumstances eat, drink and smoke while handling the liquid.

Wear gloves (Butylrubber, PVC....) and Goggles.

Wear suitable protection clothing.

Overview

Check cooling liquid level

Cooling liquid refill

Tools used in the liquid cooling servicing procedures

Draining the liquid cooling circuit

Filling the liquid cooling circuit

Excluding the Light processor Unit

Removal of the heat exchanger

Installation of the heat exchanger

Cleaning the cooling pump

Replacement of the pump motor and rotor

Replacement of the complete cooling pump

Preparations for a draining an refilling of the cooling liquid circuit

1.

Removal of all side covers, back and front cover.

2.

Removal of the top cover.

3.

Opening the sealed compartment.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

213

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.1 Check cooling liquid level

What should be done ?
The projector is liquid cooled. When running with a low liquid cooling level then the cooling capacity is strongly reduced which results
in higher temperatures inside the projector. These higher temperatures can cause an interruption of your film projection as the lamps
can be switched off by the software as a precaution.
To avoid this problem, we strongly advise to check at least every 3 months the cooling liquid level in the cooling reservoir of the
projector.

How to check
1. Remove the side cover on the light processor side, see "Removal of the side cover", page 97.
2. Look through the small window in the security cover of the light processor and check the liquid cooling level in the reservoir.

Max

Min

Image 12-1
Cooling liquid check

If the current liquid cooling level is somewhere between Min and Max, then no action should be taken.
If the current liquid cooling level is lower than Min, start the refill procedure.
If you cannot see the level , remove the top cover and shine with a torch on the filler cap while looking through
the small window.

Image 12-2
Filler cap

214

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.2 Cooling liquid refill

WARNING: This procedure may only be performed by qualified technical service personnel.

Order info cooling liquid

B1909086K : bottle of 1 liter cooling liquid.

Necessary parts
Cooling liquid

How to refill
1. Remove all side covers, back and front cover.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Open filler cap by turning it anti clockwise.

Max

Min

Image 12-3
Refilling

4. Fill the reservoir with cooling liquid until the level is equal with the Max indication on the reservoir. Look through the small window
to see the indication.
5. Close the reservoir again. Turn the filler cap clockwise to close the reservoir.
6. Reinstall all covers.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

215

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.3 Tools used in the liquid cooling servicing procedures

Overview
2

60

cm

60

cm

Image 12-4

216

Female and male connector for DP2K projector

tube 60 cm with male DP connector (to be replaced for DP2K projector)

tube 60 cm with female DP connector (to be replaced for DP2K projector)

filler cap with pressure valve

bottle with cooling liquid

empty bottle

bicycle pump

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.4 Draining the liquid cooling circuit

How to drain
1. Remove the filler cap (1).

2
Image 12-5
Replace filler cap

2. Turn the filler cap with pressure valve, out of the cooling refill kit, on the reservoir (2).
3. Interrupt the liquid cooling circuit between the light processor and the pump by uncoupling the valved fitting.

Image 12-6
Interrupt cooling circuit

4. Take a 60 cm tube with female connector and connect to the male fitting going to the light processor.
Insert the open end of the tube into an empty bottle.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

217

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-7
Draining circuit

5. Connect a bicycle pump to the filler cap and start pumping until no more liquid is coming out of the tube.
6. Disconnect the extension tube.
7. Take a 60 cm long tube with a male connector and connect to the female connector going to the pump (5).
Insert the open end of the tube into an empty bottle.

218

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-8
Draining circuit

8. Start pumping again until all liquid is out of the circuit (6).
9. Disconnect the bicycle pump and remove the filler cap.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

219

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.5 Filling the liquid cooling circuit

WARNING: Only use Barco approved cooling liquid to refill the liquid cooling circuit of the projector. Neglecting this may lead to irreversible damage of the projector.

How to fill
1. Bring the free end of the connected extension tube a few centimeter above the filler opening (1).
Note: Make sure that the original tube is still below the reservoir.

Max

2
Min

Image 12-9

2. Fill up the reservoir slowly with fresh cooling liquid until liquid is visible inside the extension tube (2).
3. Uncouple the extension tube and pour out the tube into the bottle.
4. Reestablish the connection with the light processor cooling circuit.
5. Fill up the reservoir to its maximum.
6. Reestablish the power connection to the projector and start up the refill mode (Installation Advanced Refill mode)
Air bubbles will be visible inside the reservoir.
The cooling circuit will be filled with liquid and the air will be pushed out.
When the liquid level in the reservoir becomes to low, fill up with fresh liquid.
7. When the liquid level in the reservoir does not lower anymore, let run the pump for a few more minutes to expel the last air
bubbles.
8. Stop the refill mode.
Fill up the reservoir until the level is equal with the Max indication on the reservoir.
9. Close the reservoir with the filler cap.
10.Reinstall all covers
11. Clear the security warning. See projectors installation manual, chapter Maintenance.

220

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.6 Excluding the Light processor Unit

When excluding the liquid cooling circuit of the Light Processor?
When service actions are required to the pump, heat exchanger, or other parts of the liquid cooling circuit which are not mounted on
the Light Processor unit then the cooling circuit of the Light Processor unit can be excluded from the cooling circuit in the projector.
Excluding the Light Processor unit will minimize the risk on air bubbles in the cooling system.
The service procedures for the liquid cooling system such as draining and filling are described for the whole cooling circuit. Nevertheless, you can use the same procedures and exclude the Light Processor if applicable.

CAUTION:

Do not exclude the light processor when starting the refill process.

How to exclude the light processor unit

1. Interrupt the liquid cooling circuit by uncoupling the valved fitting at the heat exchanger. This tube comes from the cooling block
on the Light Pipe entrance.

Image 12-10
Excluding light processor

2. Interrupt the liquid cooling circuit by uncoupling the valved fitting at the Light Processor unit. This tube comes from the pump exit.
3. Draining procedure can be started in the same way as described in "Draining the liquid cooling circuit", page 217.
Connect the tube which comes from the cooling block on the Light Pipe entrance with the valved fitting at the
Light Processor.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

221

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.7 Removal of the heat exchanger

This procedure assumes that the left side cover and the cover of the sealed compartment is already removed.

Necessary tools

2,5 mm Allen wrench.

3 mm Allen wrench.

Pair of pliers.

Universal pliers.

7 mm open-end wrench.

How to remove
1. Drain the liquid cooling circuit, see "Draining the liquid cooling circuit", page 217.
Tip:
Exclude the light processor unit from the draining process.
2. Disconnect the fan (reference F) of the heat exchanger and the wire unit of the pump (reference P) as illustrated. Use a set of
pliers to cut the cable tie which fasten the wire unit of the pump with the tubing.

Image 12-11
Disconnection of hear exchanger fan

3. Pull out the tube out of the tube fixation.

Image 12-12

4. Release the two fixation screws of the heat exchanger assembly and pull out the assembly.

222

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-13
Remove heat exchanger assembly

5. Remove the tubing from the heat exchanger inlet (reference 1) and outlet (reference 2). Use a universal pliers to push both clip
tongs to each other in order to open the clip, which securing the tube, and move the clip away.

Image 12-14
Remove tubing

6. Disassembly the heat exchanger assembly by removing the eight indicated nuts (reference 3). As a result the heat exchanger
(reference 5) comes loose from the fan assembly (reference 4) and from the filter assembly (reference 6).

6
Image 12-15
Separate heat exchanger

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

223

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.8 Installation of the heat exchanger

Necessary tools

2,5 mm Allen wrench.

3 mm Allen wrench.

Pair of pliers.

Universal pliers.

7 mm open-end wrench.

Necessary parts
Cable tie.

How to install
1. Slide a clip (reference 7 of image 12-16) over the copper inlet tube of the heat exchanger.
2. Mount the heat exchanger (reference 5), the fan assembly (reference 4) and the filter assembly (reference 6) together as illustrated. Use a 7 mm open-end wrench to fasten the eight nuts (reference 3).

7
3

3
7

6
Image 12-16
Mount heat exchanger

3. Push the short tube + valved fitting through the hole in the plate on the inlet of the heat exchanger. Use a universal pliers to
secure the tube with the clip (reference 1 of image 12-16) which you provided in step 1.
4. Push the long free tube he outlet of the heat exchanger. Use a universal pliers to secure the tube with a clip (reference 2).

Image 12-17
Mount tubes

5. Slide the heat exchanger assembly in its place and fasten the two fixation screws.

224

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-18
Insert assembly

6. Insert the cooling fixation into the plate.

7. Reconnect the wire unit of the fan (reference F) and the wire unit of the pump (reference P). Use a cable tie (reference T) to
secure the wire unit of the pump with the tubing.

T
F
P

Image 12-19
Fan connection

8. Reinstall the complete cooling circuit and start up the refill procedure.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

225

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.9 Cleaning the cooling pump

What can happen?
Due to crystallization inside the pump, the rotor can be jammed. This crystallization can be easily removed and the pump can be
reused again. In most cases it will be sufficient to clean the pump instead of replacing it with a new one. However, note that the
bearings of the pump are subject to wear. Because of that the complete pump (pump house included) has to be replaced every 4
years.
This procedure assumes that the Light Processor is removed from the projector (see chapter Light processor
removal) and that the liquid cooling circuit is drained (see Draining the liquid cooling circuit).

Necessary tools

PH2 Phillips screwdriver.

Soft cloths.

Cotton swabs (Q-tips, ear buds).

How to clean
1. Remove the four screws (reference 1) which fasten the pump house to the pump motor.

1
1

1
1

Image 12-20
Pump house, remove

2. Slide the pump house with hose backwards. Use a cloth to absorb the remaining cooling liquid.

Image 12-21
Pump house removal

3. Take the rotor between thumb and finger and slide it out of the pump motor.

226

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-22
Rotor

4. Clean the pump house, the rotor and the pump motor with a clean soft cloth. Use cotton swabs to clean the bearing inside the
pump motor and pump house.
Caution: The bearings of the Pump are fragile. Be careful when cleaning.
5. Reinsert the rotor and try to turn it smoothly. If not successful stop this procedure and replace the pump completely.
6. Slide the pump house with hose back on the pump motor.
Caution: Make sure the sealing ring of the Pump motor is not damaged and is on its place.
7. Fasten the four screws (reference 1) of the pump house crosswise.

1
1

1
1

Image 12-23
Pump house, close

Refill the liquid cooling circuit in case the pump is successfully cleaned. If cleaning is not possible, replace
the pump completely.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

227

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.10 Replacement of the pump motor and rotor

When replacing the pump motor and pump rotor?
In case of an electrical failure of the pump you can replace the pump motor and pump rotor without replacing the pump house.
This way you do not have to cut the hoses from the pump house which simplify the replacement procedure. However, note that the
bearings of the pump are subject to wear. Because of that the complete pump (pump house included) has to be replaced every 4
years.
You have to order a complete pump but you only have to use the pump motor and pump rotor.

This procedure assumes that the Light Processor is removed from the projector (see chapter Light processor
removal) and that the liquid cooling circuit is drained (see Draining the liquid cooling circuit).

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench with ball point.

7 mm open-end wrench.

PH2 Phillips screwdriver.

Cloths.

Cotton swab.

How to replace the pump motor and pump rotor

1. Disconnect the wire unit of the cooling pump.

Image 12-24
Electrical connection pump

2. Remove the four screws (reference 1) which fasten the pump house to the pump motor.

1
1

1
1

Image 12-25
Pump house, fixation

3. Slide the pump house with hose backwards. Use a cloth to absorb the remaining cooling liquid.
228

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-26
Pump house, remove

4. Release the two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 2) which fasten the pump motor to the seating of the pump. Use a
3 mm Allen wrench to release the screws and a 7 mm open-end wrench to hold the nut (reference 3) when releasing the screw.

2
2

Image 12-27
Pump, removal

5. Replace the pump motor and pump rotor.

Image 12-28
Pump motor & rotor

6. Secure the pump motor with two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 2). Use a 3 mm Allen wrench to fasten the screws
and a 7 mm open-end wrench to hold the nut (reference 3) while fasten the screw.
Caution: Make sure that the pump is mounted upon two rubber vibration rings (reference 4).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

229

12. Liquid cooling circuit

2
2

4
3

Image 12-29
Pump, fixation

7. Clean the pump house with a clean soft cloth. Use cotton swabs to clean the bearing of the pump house.
8. Slide the pump house with hose on the new pump motor.
Caution: Make sure that the new Pump motor is provide with a new rotor and a new sealing ring.

Image 12-30
Pump house, installation

9. Fasten the four screws (reference 1) of the pump house crosswise using a PH2 Phillips screwdriver.

1
1

1
1

Image 12-31
Pump house, fixation

10.Reconnect the wire unit of the pump.

230

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-32
Electrical connection

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

231

12. Liquid cooling circuit

12.11 Replacement of the complete cooling pump

This procedure assumes that the Light Processor is removed from the projector (see chapter Light processor
removal) and that the liquid cooling circuit is drained (see Draining the liquid cooling circuit).

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench with ball point.

7 mm open-end wrench.

PH2 Phillips screwdriver.

Cloths.

Universal pair of pliers.

Knife.

How to replace the pump

1. Disconnect the wire unit of the pump.

Image 12-33
Electrical disconnection

2. Cut both hoses from the pump house. Cut just next to the clip to have a minimal loss in length of the hose.

Image 12-34
hose cutting

3. Remove both clips from the pump house. Use an universal pair of pliers to push both clip tongs to each other in order to open
the clip.
Note: It is almost impossible to remove first the clip and then to pull off the hose.
4. Release the two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 2) which fasten the pump motor to the seating of the pump. Use a
3 mm Allen wrench to release the screws and a 7 mm open-end wrench to hold the nut (reference 3) when releasing the screw.

232

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

12. Liquid cooling circuit

2

Image 12-35
Pump, removal

5. Install a new pump on the seating and fasten with two screws (reference 2), two rubbers reference 4), two washers (reference 5)
and two nuts (reference 3). Use a 3 mm Allen wrench to fasten the screws and a 7 mm open-end wrench to hold the nut while
fasten the screw.
Caution: Make sure that the pump is mounted upon two rubber vibration rings.

2
5

3
4

Image 12-36
Pump, mounting

6. Provide both hoses with a clip (reference 7 & 9) and push the hoses over their respective nipple of the pump house. Note that
the thick nipple (reference 6) is the input side of the pump house and has to be connected with the thick hose that comes from
the pressure vessel. The small nipple (reference 8) is the output side of the pump house and should be connected with the hose
that comes from the Light Processor.

6
7

Image 12-37
Hose connection

7. Slide the clip of both hoses over the connection. Use an universal pair of pliers to push both clip tongs to each other in order to
open the clip and to move the clip over the connection.
8. Reconnect the wire unit of the pump.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

233

12. Liquid cooling circuit

Image 12-38
Electrical connection

234

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13. LENSES AND LENS HOLDER

Overview

Available lenses

Lens selection

Lens removal

Lens installation

Cleaning the lens

Remove the lens holder

Install the lens holder

Scheimpflug adjustment

Replacement of the Vertical Shift stepper motor

Replacement of the Horizontal Shift stepper motor

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

235

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.1 Available lenses

Which lenses are available for my projector?
The table below is subject to changes and was last updated on 01/06/2012. Consult my.barco.com for the most
recent information about available lenses.

Product Number

236

Type

Zoom range

Image

R9855957

Motorized

1,2 1,81

R98559571

Manual

1,2 1,8

R9855931

Motorized

1,4 2,05

R98559311

Manual

1,4 2,05

R9855932

Motorized

1,6 2,5

image 13-3

R9855933

Motorized

1,6 2,5

image 13-4

R98559321

Manual

1,6 2,5

image 13-5

R98559331

Manual

1,6 2,5

R9855934

Motorized

1,95 3,2

R9855935

Motorized

1,95 3,2

image 13-7

R98559341

Manual

1,95 3,2

image 13-8

R98559351

Manual

1,95 3,2

R9855936

Motorized

2,4 3,9

R98559361

Manual

2,4 3,9

image 13-1

image 13-2

image 13-6

image 13-9

Image 13-1
R9855957

Image 13-2
R9855931

Image 13-3
R9855932

Image 13-4
R9855933

Image 13-5
R98559321

Image 13-6
R9855934

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

Image 13-7
R9855935

Image 13-8
R98559341

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Image 13-9
R9855936

237

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.2 Lens selection

Which lens do I need?
1. Go to Barcos website on www.barco.com and click on myBarco
2. Login on.
If you are not yet registered create a login and password. With the created login and password, it is possible to enter myBarco.
When your login is correct, the start page is displayed.
3. Click the Support tab, then Digital cinema calculator (on the left of the screen) and select the appropriate lens calculator.
The lens calculator (see screenshot, image 13-10) will be displayed.
The lens calculator allows you to have an overview of which lenses are suitable for your specific projector setup. Just make your
selection of parameters and all possible configurations are displayed.

Image 13-10
Digital cinema lens calculator

Take into account that when the projector is tilted the Screen Width you have to fill in should be larger than
the physical screen width due to the keystone distortion of the projected image. How much larger depends
on the amount of tilt.

Due to production tolerances the real distances can differ by 2% from the calculated values.
For critical situations (fixed installs that use the lens at one of its extreme zoom positions) this should be
taken into account.

238

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.3 Lens removal

How to remove a lens from the projector lens holder ?
1. Support the lens with one hand while you unlock the lens holder by sliding the lock handle towards the unlocked position as
illustrated.

Image 13-11

2. Gently pull the lens out of the lens holder.

Image 13-12
Remove lens

Its recommended to place the Lens caps of the original Lens packaging, back on both sides of the removed
Lens to protect the optics of the Lens.

Its recommended to place the foam rubber of the original projector packaging, back into the Lens opening to
prevent intrusion of dust. Note that this foam rubber is packed in a plastic bag to prevent the dust, emitted by
the foam, from entering the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

239

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.4 Lens installation

How to install a lens into the projector lens holder ?
1. Remove the foam rubber in the opening of the lens holder if not removed yet.
2. Take the lens assembly out of its packing material and remove the lens caps on both sides.
3. Close the lens locking mechanism prior to lens insertion (1). Lens locking mechanism is closed by pushing the lens lock to the
right.

1
Image 13-13
1
Lens holder lock
2
Power connector lens
3
Alignment pin

4. Ensure that the lens holder stands in the On-Axis position (horizontal and vertical mid position).
Note: The lens holder is placed default in the On-Axis position at factory.
5. Gently insert the lens in such a way that the lens connector matches the socket (B).

Image 13-14

6. Insert the lens until the connector seats into the socket.
Warning: Do not release the Lens yet, as the Lens may fall out of the Lens Holder.
A clear click should be heard when the retainer springs engage into the slot provided on the lens. Besides the clear click, the
springs actually help to guide the lens into position and hence prevent jamming.
7. Check if the lens is really secured by trying to pull the lens out of the lens holder.

240

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

CAUTION:

Never transport the projector with a Lens mounted in the Lens Holder. Always remove the Lens
before transporting the projector. Neglecting this can damage the Lens Holder and Prism.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

241

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.5 Cleaning the lens

To minimize the possibility of damage to optical coatings, or scratches to lens surfaces follow the cleaning
procedure as described here precisely.

Necessary tools

Compressed air.

Clean Toraysee cloth or any micro fiber lens cleaning cloth.

Clean cotton cloth.

Necessary parts
Lens cleaner (e.g. Carl Zeiss lens cleaner or Purasol or any water-based lens cleaner)

How to clean the lens?

1. Blow off dust with clean compressed air (or pressurized air cans5) .
2. Clean with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth to remove the dust and contamination. Use big wipes in one
single direction.
Warning: Do not wipe back and forwards across the lens surface as this tends to grind dirt into the coating.
3. Use a dry lens cleaning cloth to remove left liquid or stripes. Polish with small circles.
4. If there are still fingerprints on the surface, wipe them off with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth. Polish again
with a dry one.
If smears occur when cleaning lenses, replace the cloth. Smears are the first indication of a dirty cloth.

5. Pressurized air cans are not efficient if there is too much dust on the surface, the pressure is too low

242

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.6 Remove the lens holder

Necessary tools

Nut driver 5.5 mm or an open spanner with SW 5.5

Allen wrench 5 mm

Electrical disconnections
1. Remove the nut, securing the EMC cable to the frame (image indication 1).

Image 13-15
Electrical connections, location

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

243

13. Lenses and Lens holder

Image 13-16
Electrical connections, image view

2. Unplug the connector of the top motor (image indication 2) (brown and red wires).
3. Unplug the connector of the side motor (image indication 3) (yellow and orange wires).
4. Disconnect all connectors of the wire set (4x 2 pins connectors and 2x 6 pins connectors) (image indication 4).
If necessary, cut the wire ties.

Remove lens holder

1. Remove the 4 hexagon socket heat screws (1 to 4).

244

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

1
2

4
3

Image 13-17
Remove lens holder

2. Take out the lens holder from the front side of the projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

245

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.7 Install the lens holder

Necessary tools

Nut driver 5.5 mm or an open spanner with SW 5.5

Allen wrench 5 mm

2 spindles of 4 mm or 2 Torx screw drivers T10

Install lens holder

1. Push a spindle or T10 screw driver (P) through the positioning hole A and B.

A
1

B
P

4
3
Image 13-18
Mount lens holder

2. Push the end of the spindle into the positioning sockets (a and b (not visible on the drawing).
3. Push the lens holder against the lens holder plate.
Caution: Make sure that no cables are stuck.
4. Drive in the hexagon socket head screws (1 to 4).

246

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

Electrical connections
1. Slide the EMC cable eye on the stud mounted on the frame (image indication 1).
Secure by turning on the nut.

Image 13-19
Electrical connections, location

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

247

13. Lenses and Lens holder

Image 13-20
Electrical connections, image view

2. Plug in the connector of the top motor (image indication 2) (brown and red wires).
3. Plug in the connector of the right motor (image indication 3) (yellow and orange wires).
4. Connect all connectors of the wire set (4x 2 pins connectors and 2x 6 pins connectors) (image indication 4).
Connect those connectors with each other that have the same colored wires and exact the same position.
5. Bundle the cables together with a wire tie.

248

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.8 Scheimpflug adjustment

What has to be done ?
The lens holder has to be adjusted so that the sharp focus plane of the projected image falls together with the plane of the screen
(Fp1Fp2). This is achieved by changing the distance between the DMD plane and the lens plane (Lp1Lp2). The closer the lens
plane comes to the DMD plane the further the sharp focus plane will be. It can sometimes happen that you wont be able to get a
complete focused image on the screen due to a tilt (or swing) of the lens plane with respect to the DMD plane. This is also known
as Sheimpflugs law. To solve this the lens plane must be placed parallel with the DMD plane. This can be achieved by turning the
lens holder to remove the tilt (or swing) between lens plane and DMD plane (Lp3Lp4).
Lp1

Fp1

Lp2

Fp2

Fp4

SCREEN

Lp3
Lp4

(Scheimpflug)

Fp3

SCREEN

DMD

DMD

Image 13-21
Scheimpflug principle

Scheimpflug principle
The "plane of sharp focus" can be changed so that any plane can be brought into sharp focus. When the DMD plane
and lens plane are parallel, the plane of sharp focus will also be parallel to these two planes. If, however, the lens
plane is tilted with respect to the DMD plane, the plane of sharp focus will also be tilted according to geometrical and
optical properties. The DMD plane, the principal lens plane and the sharp focus plane will intersect in a line below the
projector for downward lens tilt.

Scheimpflug adjustment points

A

3
D

Image 13-22
Scheimpflug adjustments

Indication on drawing

Function

Locking nut

1, 2 and 3

Scheimpflug adjustment nuts

A, B, C and D

Set screws

a, b, c and d

lock nuts

1, 2 and 3 are adjustment points.

4 is a locking point and NOT used during Scheimpflug adjustment.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

249

13. Lenses and Lens holder

Necessary tools

Allen key 3 mm

Nut driver 13 mm

Nut driver 10 mm

How to adjust
1. Project a green focus pattern.

Image 13-23

2. Loosen the lock nuts (a, b, c and d). See image 13-22.
3. Loosen the 4 set screws (A, B, C and D) by 1 cm. See image 13-22.
4. Fully loosen lock nut 4. See image 13-22.
5. Optimize the focus of the projected image as follows:
a) Place the zoom lens in TELE position (smallest projected image) and adjust the focus using the lens focus barrel or motorized
focus control.
b) Place the zoom lens in WIDE position (largest projected image) and adjust the focus by turning equally on nut 1, 2 and 3.
c) Repeat steps a and b until the projected image is as sharp as possible.

Image 13-24
Center focusing

6. Sharpen bottom left corner of the screen by adjusting nut 1.

250

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

Image 13-25
Left bottom focusing

7. Sharpen bottom right corner of the screen by adjusting nut 2.

Image 13-26
Right bottom focusing

8. Sharpen top right corner of the screen by adjusting nut 3

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

251

13. Lenses and Lens holder

F

Image 13-27
Corner focusing

9. Repeat from step 6 until the projected focus pattern is as sharp as possible in the center, left, right, top and bottom of the screen.

How to fix the Scheimpflug

Start the fixation as follows (steps must be followed strictly) :
1. Turn in set screw A, B and C. Tighten lightly (by hand).
Tip:
Any movement of the image will affect the Scheimpflug adjustment
2. Fasten lock nuts a, b and c.
3. Turn in set screw D lightly (by hand) allowing the image to move slightly (1/3 to 1/2 of a square).

1/3 to 1/2

Image 13-28

4. Fasten lock nut d.

5. Tighten nut 4 until the offset of the image movement created in step 3 is canceled.
Tip:
The amount of image movement in step 3 will determine how tight the nut in step 5 will need to be turned to return the
image to its original position.

252

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.9 Replacement of the Vertical Shift stepper motor

This procedure assumes that the Lens Holder is removed from the projector.

Necessary tools

3mm Allen wrench.

2.5mm Allen wrench.

13mm open end wrench.

10mm open end wrench.

How to replace the Vertical Shift stepper motor

1. Remove the front plate from the Lens Holder. Use a 13mm open end wrench to loosen the four big nuts (reference 2) as illustrated.
Its not necessary to disconnect the Ground wire from the front plate. Just turn the front plate away for accessing the stepper
motor.
Caution: Do not loosen the three big springs of the adjustment mechanism.

Image 13-29

2. Remove the Vertical stepper motor from the assembly by loosing the four screws (reference 9) as indicated. Use a 3mm Allen
wrench.

Image 13-30

3. Remove bracket and other parts from the old stepper motor and install these parts on the new stepper motor as illustrated. Use
a 2.5mm Allen wrench for the four screws (reference 10) and a 10mm open end wrench (reference 11).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

253

13. Lenses and Lens holder

11

10

Image 13-31

4. Reinstall the stepper motor on the assembly as illustrated in image 13-30. Fasten the four screws (reference 9) with a 3mm Allen
wrench.
5. Reinstall the front plate from the Lens Holder. Use a 13mm open end wrench to fasten the four big nuts (reference 7 image 13-29).
Fasten the big nuts crosswise bit by bit. Ensure that the upper two rods and the lower left rod contain a big spring.
Proceed with reinstalling the Lens Holder. See procedure "Install the lens holder", page 246.

The Lens Holder has to be adjusted after installation. See procedure "Scheimpflug adjustment", page 249.

254

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

13. Lenses and Lens holder

13.10 Replacement of the Horizontal Shift stepper motor

This procedure assumes that the Lens Holder is removed from the projector.

Necessary tools

3mm Allen wrench.

2.5mm Allen wrench.

13mm open end wrench.

10mm open end wrench.

How to replace the Horizontal Shift stepper motor

1. Remove the front plate from the Lens Holder. Use a 13mm open end wrench to loosen the four big nuts (reference 2) as illustrated.
Its not necessary to disconnect the Ground wire from the front plate. Just turn the front plate away for accessing the stepper
motor.
Caution: Do not loosen the three big springs of the adjustment mechanism.

Image 13-32

2. Remove the Horizontal stepper motor from the assembly by loosing the four screws (reference 9) as indicated. Use a 3mm Allen
wrench.

9
Image 13-33

3. Remove bracket and other parts from the old stepper motor and install these parts on the new stepper motor as illustrated. Use
a 2.5mm Allen wrench for the four screws (reference 10) and a 10mm open end wrench (reference 11).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

255

13. Lenses and Lens holder

11

10

Image 13-34

4. Reinstall the stepper motor on the assembly as illustrated in image 13-33. Fasten the four screws (reference 9) with a 3 mm
Allen wrench.
5. Reinstall the front plate from the Lens Holder. Use a 13mm open end wrench to fasten the four big nuts (reference 2 image 13-32).
Fasten the big nuts crosswise bit by bit. Ensure that the upper two rods and the lower left rod contain a big spring.
Proceed with reinstalling the Lens Holder. See procedure "Install the lens holder", page 246.

The Lens Holder has to be adjusted after installation. See procedure "Scheimpflug adjustment", page 249.

256

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14. CARD CAGE

Overview

Fan controller board

Integrated Cinema Processor (ICP) board

HD-SDI board + link decryptor

Cinema controller board

Removing a board in the card cage

Inserting a board in the card cage

Removing the button unit

Installation of the button unit

Replacement of the Button module (first generation Keypad)

Replacement of the Keypad (first generation Keypad)

Replacement of the Keypad assembly (second generation Keypad)

Replacement of the signal back plane

Replacement of the Link Decryptor

Authorization to clear security warning on the projector

Replacement of the Status Light

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

257

14. Card Cage

14.1 Fan controller board

Functionalities

Image 14-1
Fan controller board

Monitors and controls all fans.

Monitors and controls all voltages provided by the SMPS board.

Monitors all temperature sensors.

Controls and monitors the Peltiers on rear of the DMDs.

Controls the front active cooling.

Monitors pump speed.

LEDs on front plate can be used to monitor the output voltages of the SMPS board.

Drives the dowser (shutter).

Contains all hardware protections for the projector.

Controls error line to the LPS and will shut down lamp accordingly.

Conditions included on this board :

258

DMD over temperature

Lamp over temperature

Lamp cooling down

Lamp house not connected

Light processor not connected

Ambient temperature below 10.C

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.2 Integrated Cinema Processor (ICP) board

Functionalities

Image 14-2
ICP board

Stores all projector files. When board is replaced; clone package must be reloaded.

Stores and generates test patterns.

Scaling to native resolution, resizing, masking, line-insertion de-interlacing, subtitle overlay, color space conversion, de-gamma,
color correction

Source Selection between alternative content and cinema content.

Stores a Certificate and Private Key needed for Playback validation

Contains a real time clock, which must be synchronized with the GMT/UTC time stored in the link decryptor module or Integrated
Media Block (see Communicator software)

Handles unpacking of special video formats

The ICP board spare part kit is programmed for a DP2K C series projector. When using this board in a DP2K
B series projector or a DP4K series projector, the software must be re-installed after installation of the board.
See chapter "ICP software upgrade", page 301.

LED indications
LED 1

Software state

LED 2

Error state : Red or orange

Operating System State

Normal operation : flashing green

Normal operation : green

LED 3

Error state : off, red or yellow

FMT Fpga State
Normal operation : green
Red : Unable to configure the Fpga

LED 4

Yellow : Fpga is loaded with the Boot application

ICP Fpga State
Normal operation : green
Red : Unable to configure the Fpga
Yellow : Fpga is loaded with the Boot application

CAUTION: Make sure not to short circuit the battery on the board.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

That will destroy the board completely !

259

14. Card Cage

14.3 HD-SDI board + link decryptor

Functionality

Image 14-3
HD-SDI + Link Decryptor

Converts all HD/SDI video formats to ICP compliant pixel mapping

Contains 7 Full-HD test patterns (e.g. Color Bars, H-Ramp, Moir, ...)

Decryption of Cinelink-2 encrypted content

Permanent Security monitoring (with battery back-up) : intrusion detection; voltage monitoring; temperature monitoring; security
switches; build in self test; ...

Handles communication with content servers.

Contains a real time clock (GMT/UTC time); a Certificate and a Private Key

Battery shelf life: 6 months

Replace board
To replace the board, follow the procedure as described in Replacement of a Card Cage board. Remove the Link decryptor as
described in Replacement of the Link Decryptor
Place the link decryptor on the new board and insert the assembly in the Card Cage.

260

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.4 Cinema controller board

Functionality

Image 14-4
Cinema controller board

Ethernet Communication to ICP, Media block or Link decryptor.

Two DVI ports (with HDCP) for alternative content.

RS232 port to BARCO Controller.

Standardized 3D interface on board.

GPIO controls

Peripheral Port

Lensholder motors (stepper motors)

Stores lens files and lens type / Controls lens

Lens motor drivers (DC motors)

Stores Dallas key

Controls lamp power supply

Stores SNMP key

Stores Barco IP address and host name

Handles reporting of errors, version info & Barco logs to Communicator

Controls ICP board

Controls Dolby 3D color wheel

Controls and monitors keypad

Controls and monitors status lights

Stores Macro, Input, Lens file, 3D file and LSC file.

Prior to replace the Cinema Controller board try to read out the SMNP key. Use for that the Communicator
software. In case it is not possible to read out the SNMP key a new SNMP key has to be requested. See chapter
Request for new SNMP key in the user guide of the Communicator software.

When inserting a new Cinema Controller board the SNMP key must be reprogrammed in the new board and the
Dallas key must be re-identified with the new board. See user guide Communicator for precise instructions.

Ethernet network communication

The DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector can be connected to a LAN (local area network) using one of the 10/100/1000
base T ports on the communication interface. Once connected to the LAN, users are capable of accessing the projector from any
location, inside or outside (if allowed) their company network using the control software (Communicator touch panel). This toolset
locates the projector on the network in case there is a DHCP server or the user can insert the correct IP-address of the projector to
access the projector. Once accessed, it is possible to check and manipulate all the projector settings. Remote diagnostics, control
and monitoring of the projector can then become a daily and very simple operation. The network connectivity permits to detect
potential errors and consequently improve the time to servicing.
As there is a need to daisy chain projectors when they are in Ethernet network, an Ethernet switch is build in, the incoming network
is hereby available for the internal PC and for the next device in the chain. In this way a star network interconnection can be avoid.
The switch used is a stand alone 10/100Mbit Ethernet switch. This assures no influence on the network speed. Whenever a slow
(10Mbit) device is connected the speed between the 100Mbit devices remains 100Mbit.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

261

14. Card Cage

Both Ethernet ports are equipped with a yellow and a green LED. The yellow LED lights up in case the port is connected with a
100Mbit network. The green LED blinks in case there is network activity.
The connectors used for both Ethernet ports are of the type RJ45, which is compatible with standard RJ45
cable connector. Straight (most common) as well as cross linked network cables can be used. The 2 ports
are functionally identical. Both ports are connected via the projector hub (Auto sensing enabled).

RS232 serial communication

The communication interface of the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx supports RS232 serial communication. You can use the
RS232 input port to connect a local PC to your DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector. This way you can configure and control
your DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector from your local PC.
Do not forget to set the projectors baud rate (default = 115200) to match that of the computer.

Advantages of using RS232 serial communication:

easy adjustment of the projector via PC (or MAC).

wide range of control possibilities.

address range from 0 to 255.

sending data to the projector (update).

copying data from the projector (backup).

RS232
An Electronic Industries Association (EIA) serial digital interface standard specifying the characteristics of the communication path between two devices using either D-SUB 9 pins or D-SUB 25 pins connectors. This standard is used for
relatively short-range communications and does not specify balanced control lines. RS-232 is a serial control standard
with a set number of conductors, data rate, word length and type of connector to be used. The standard specifies component connection standards with regard to computer interface. It is also called RS-232-C, which is the third version
of the RS-232 standard, and is functionally identical to the CCITT V.24 standard. Logical 0 is > + 3V, Logical 1 is < 3V. The range between -3V and +3V is the transition zone.

GENERAL PURPOSE IN/OUT (GPIO)

This female 37 pins D-SUB connector can be used to send or receive trigger signals from other devices. These input/output pins
can be programmed by macros created via the Communicator touch panel. See users guide of the Touch panel, section Macro
editor, for more information about this functionality.

262

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.5 Removing a board in the card cage

About the procedure
The same procedure can be used to replace one of the following boards:

Fan controller board

Integrated cinema processor board

HD-SDI board + Link Decrypter

Cinema controller board

CAUTION: Wear a wrist band which is connected to the ground while handling the electrostatic discharge
sensitive parts.

Necessary tools
Phillips screw driver

How to replace a board

1. Remove the input cover.
2. Turn out both fixation screws (1).

2
1

Image 14-5
Removal of a board

3. Take the board by both handles (2) and pull it out.

All connections are made via the board to board connection with the back plane.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

263

14. Card Cage

14.6 Inserting a board in the card cage

CAUTION: Wear a wrist band which is connected to the ground while handling the electrostatic discharge
sensitive parts.

Necessary tools
Phillips screw driver

How to insert
1. Take the board by both handles (2).

2
1

Image 14-6
Insertion of a board

2. Slide the board into both groves.

3. Push on both handles until the board is fully inserted and the connection is made with the back plane.
4. Secure the board by turning in both fixation screws (1).
When inserting a new ICP board in the card cage, the ICP software must be re-installed. See "Software update
via Communicator (DC update companion)", page 293.

264

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.7 Removing the button unit

Preparations
Before starting with the replacement of the button unit, remove first:

Side covers and top cover, see Removal and Installation of the projector covers.

Light processor top cover (Convergence cover plate).

Necessary tools

Allen wrench 3 mm

Phillips screw driver

How to remove
1. Unplug the wire unit at the backside of the button unit.

Image 14-7
Button unit, connections

2. Pull out all he cable from the cable holders.

Image 14-8
Button unit, cable holders

3. At the inner side, loosen both hexagon screws at the left side of the button unit (1).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

265

14. Card Cage

2
1

Image 14-9
Button unit fixations

4. Loosen also both hexagon screws at the right side (2).

5. Loosen both screws at the bottom plate (3) of the button unit.
6. Loosen the fixation screws of the fan controller board and pull the board a little out.
7. Slide out the button unit.

266

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

Image 14-10
Button unit removal

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

267

14. Card Cage

14.8 Installation of the button unit

How to install
1. Insert the button module so that the bottom plate of the unit fits into the support grooves at both sides of the card cage.

Image 14-11
Button unit, installation

2. Slide in the unit until it is completely inserted.

Note: The front of the unit must be equal with the front of the card cage.
3. Secure its position by driving in:
-

both fixation screws at the bottom plate of the unit (3).

both fixation screws at the left (1) and the right side of the unit (2).

4. Reconnect the wire unit with the back side of the button unit.
5. Secure the cables by pushing them back in the cable holders.

268

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.9 Replacement of the Button module (first generation Keypad)

This procedure assumes that the Button assembly is already removed from the Card Cage.

Necessary tools
5.5 mm nut driver

How to replace the Button module?

1. Disconnect the flat cable (reference 1, image 14-12) from the Button module (reference 2, image 14-12) by performing the following procedure:
a) Pull out the locks at both sides of the socket (step 2, image 14-13).
b) Pull out the flat cable from the socket (step 3, image 14-13).

Image 14-12

Image 14-13

2. Remove the 4 lock nuts (reference 3, image 14-14) from the Button module mounting bolts.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

269

14. Card Cage

Image 14-14

3. Remove the Button module (reference 4, image 14-15).

Tip:
Make sure the 4 washers (reference 5, image 14-15) dont drop off the Button module mounting bolts.

4
Image 14-15

4. Install the new Button module (reference 6, image 14-16).

6
Image 14-16

5. Tighten the 4 lock nuts (reference 7, image 14-17) on the Button module mounting bolts.

270

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

Image 14-17

6. Connect the flat cable to the Button module by performing the following procedure:
a) Make sure the locks at both sides of the socket are pulled out (step 1, image 14-18).
b) Insert the flat cable into the socket (step 2, image 14-18).
c) Lock the flat cable by pushing in the locks at both sides of the socket (step 3, image 14-18).

Image 14-18

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

271

14. Card Cage

14.10 Replacement of the Keypad (first generation Keypad)

This procedure assumes that the Button assembly is already removed from the Card Cage.

Necessary tools
5.5 mm nut driver

How to replace the Keypad?

1. Disconnect the flat cable (reference 1, image 14-19) from the Button module (reference 2, image 14-19) by performing the following procedure:
a) Pull out the locks at both sides of the socket (step 2, image 14-20).
b) Pull out the flat cable from the socket (step 3, image 14-20).

Image 14-19

Image 14-20

2. Remove the 4 lock nuts (reference 3, image 14-21) from the Button module mounting bolts.

272

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

Image 14-21

3. Remove the Button module (reference 4, image 14-22) and the 4 washers (reference 5, image 14-22) from the Button module
mounting bolts.

4
Image 14-22

4. Remove the 4 lock nuts (reference 6, image 14-23) from the Keypad mounting bolts.

Image 14-23

5. Remove the Keypad (reference 7, image 14-24).

Tip:
Make sure the 4 washers (reference 8, image 14-24) dont drop off the Keypad mounting bolts.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

273

14. Card Cage

Image 14-24

6. Install the new Keypad (reference 9, image 14-25).

Image 14-25

7. Tighten the 4 lock nuts (reference 10, image 14-26) on the Keypad mounting bolts.

10

Image 14-26

8. Install the new Button module (reference 11, image 14-27).

274

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

11
Image 14-27

9. Tighten the 4 lock nuts (reference 12, image 14-28) on the Button module mounting bolts.

12

Image 14-28

10.Connect the flat cable to the Button module by performing the following procedure:
a) Make sure the locks at both sides of the socket are pulled out (step 1, image 14-29).
b) Insert the flat cable into the socket (step 2, image 14-29).
c) Lock the flat cable by pushing in the locks at both sides of the socket (step 3, image 14-29).

Image 14-29

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

275

14. Card Cage

14.11 Replacement of the Keypad assembly (second generation Keypad)

How to replace the Keypad assembly?
1. Remove the 4 lock nuts (reference 1, image 14-30) from the Keypad assembly mounting bolts.
2. Remove the Keypad assembly (reference 2, image 14-30).
3. Install the new Keypad assembly (reference 2, image 14-30).
4. Tighten the 4 lock nuts (reference 1, image 14-30) on the Keypad assembly mounting bolts.

Image 14-30

276

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.12 Replacement of the signal back plane

About the Signal back plane

Provides direct connection between all components listed below:

-

Fan Controller

Integrated Cinema Processor

HD-SDI Board

Cinema Controller

ID card

All DC voltages are passed through this board from SMPS board to final board / module.

Provides cable connection between all components listed below:

-

SMPS board

Pump

Lens motors and lens holder

Light processor

CLO sensor

Dolby 3D controller

Fans

Security switches

Temperature sensors

Touch panel

Keypad

Prism switch sensor

Dowser

Necessary tools

Flat blade screwdriver

Allen key 2.5 mm

Preparations
1. Remove the front, input cover and top cover, see Removal and Installation of the projector covers.
2. Remove the convergence cover plate as follow:
a) Loosen both screws (reference 1 and 2).
b) Slide the plate forwards until all hooks at both sides of the plate become free.
c) Take off the plate.

B
A
2
1

Image 14-31
Convergence cover plate

3. Remove the button panel assembly, see "Removing the button unit", page 265.
Remove :
-

the fan controller board.

Integrated cinema controller board

the HD-SDI board

Cinema controller board

4. Pull the small handle a little backwards and then to the front of the projector until the filter frame is released and slide out the filter.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

277

14. Card Cage

Removing the signal backplane
1. Remove the first intermediary plate as follow:
a) Unplug the fan connection from the signal backplane (1).
b) Turn out both fixation screws (2).
c) Slide out the plate (3).

3
2
4

7
6

Image 14-32
Intermediary plate

2. To remove the next plate (5), turn out both fixation screws (4) and slide out the plate.
Repeat in the same way for the next plate (7).
3. Unplug all cables from the signal backplane. Those inside the card cage and those next to the fans accessible via the front side.

Image 14-33
Backplane connections

4. From inside the card cage, remove the screws 1 to 6

278

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

1
2
3

4
5
6
Image 14-34
Side card cage, screws

5. From the front side, pull the fan assembly a little bit forward and turn it to the left, or take it out completely.
The blue and black wires coming from the SMPS are tied to the fan assembly. To make it possible to move the assembly forward,
open the SMPS compartment and unplug the connector with the blue and black wires (reference 3 and 4 on image 14-36).

Image 14-35
Fan assembly removal

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

279

14. Card Cage

Image 14-36
SMPS connections

6. Pull out the hatch in the side of the card cage.

Image 14-37
Hatch removal

7. Remove the fixation screws 1 to 11 of the backplane unit.

280

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

7
1

3
6

10

11

Image 14-38
Backplane fixation screws

8. Pull the signal backplane a little bit forward Pivot the left side as far as possible and slide out the board.

Image 14-39
Signal backplane removal

9. Remove the projector ID card.

Push the card holder a few millimeters to the left until the lock opens.
Turn it over and slide out the projector ID card.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

281

14. Card Cage

Image 14-40
Projector ID card removal

Mounting new signal backplane

1. Open the Projector Id card holder by pushing it a few millimeters to the left and turn it over.
Insert the Projector ID card with the chip upwards.
Turn the holder back, push it a little bit down while sliding it to the right until it locks.

Image 14-41
Projector ID card, installation

2. Take the new backplane and slight the right side under an angle through the gap in the side of the card cage.
Pivot the backplane on its place.

282

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

Image 14-42
Signal backplane insertion

3. Drive in screw 1 to 11.

7
1

3
6

10

11

Image 14-43
Backplane fixation screws

4. Place the hatch back on its place.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

283

14. Card Cage

Image 14-44
Hatch installation

5. Mount the fan assembly back on its place.

Pull the blue and black wire unit towards the Switched mode power supply and plug-in both wire units (3 an d4).

Image 14-45
Fan assembly installation

284

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

Image 14-46
SMPS connections

6. From the inside of the card cage, drive in screw 1 to 6 to fixate the fan assembly.

1
2
3

4
5
6
Image 14-47
Side card cage, screws

7. Make all electrical connections. See Electrical connections further in this topic for more info
8. Insert the lower intermediary plate and drive in both fixation screws.
Repeat for the second intermediary plate and the upper plate (plate with fan)

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

285

14. Card Cage

3
2
4

7
6

Image 14-48
Intermediary plates

9. Reconnect the fan with the signal backplane.

Finalizing the procedure

1. Reinstall the SMPS cover plate.
Insert from top to bottom:
-

the fan controller board.

the Integrated cinema controller board

the HD-SDI board

the Cinema controller board

2. Mount the button panel, see "Installation of the button unit", page 268.
3. Mount the convergence cover plate.
4. Reinstall the housing, see Removal and Installation of projector covers.

Electrical connections
Formatter connections
All formatter cables, data and power, have a colored cable tie. There are 3 cables per color available, two with same connector but
one with one cable tie and one with 2 cable ties. The color name is screened on the printed circuit board (1, 2 and 3). Plug in the
cable with e.g. a red cable tie into the connector with the same size and with the indication red. For those with the same connector
plug the one with one cable tie into the upper connector (row A), The one with 2 cable ties into the second connector (row B). Repeat
for all other cables.

286

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

1

3
MH2

MH1

J3

J1

J5

J6

J4

J2

B
J8

J7

J9
PTC29

PTC28

PTC10

Image 14-49
Formatter connections
1
2
3
A
B

Red formatter connections

Green formatter connections
Blue formatter connections
Cables with one cable tie
Cables with two cable ties

Right side connections

Color convention for the connections.

J282

J283

J270

J271

J272

J279

J14

J273

J274

J275

J276

J277

J278

J262

J261

J260

J291

J253

J254

J255

J250

J251

J252

J280

Image 14-51
Color coding cables, image

J281

Image 14-50
Color coding cables

The color indication on the socket corresponds with the colored cable tie on the cable next to the connector.
The screened color indication just above the sockets corresponds with the color of the wires in the cable tree.
Connections below light processor compartment fan
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

287

14. Card Cage

1

J264

J51

J53

PTC9

J52

J263

J502

J50

PTC1

MH11

PTC14

J750

Image 14-52
Cabling below fan
1
2
3
4

ICP fan connection

Security door switches
Button module connection
Light processor compartment fan connection

The color indication on the socket corresponds with the color of the wires in the cable tree.
Connections accessible via front side

MH5
J701

J800

J801

PTC27

PTC26

J700

PTC24

PTC19

PTC18

PTC23

PTC22

PTC17

PTC21

PTC16

PTC15

PTC20

J18

J22

MH10

J12

J21

J11

PTC30

J20

PTC31

J10

J802

PTC7

PTC3

J19

J16

J1000

J40

J17

PTC5

PTC6
PTC2

J30
MH6

Image 14-53
Front connections

Image 14-54

The color indication on the socket corresponds with the color of the wires in the cable tree. If there are equal colors, look to the
cable tie.
All other connectors are different.

288

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.13 Replacement of the Link Decryptor

Location
The link decryptor is mounted on the HD-SDI board.

Necessary tools
Torx screwdriver T10

How to replace
1. Remove the HD-SDI board in the card cage. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.
2. Turn out the 4 fixation screws.

Image 14-55
Link decryptor fixation

3. Pull off the current mounted link decryptor board.

4. Unpack the new link decryptor board and plug it in both connectors at the same time (black and white connector on the link
decryptor must facing the board connectors of the HD-SDI board..

2
1

Image 14-56
Link decryptor, mounting

5. Drive in the 4 fixation screws.

6. Re-install the board in the card cage.
When inserting a new Link decryptor, the link decryptor software must be re-installed. See "Software update
via Communicator (DC update companion)", page 293.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

289

14. Card Cage

A marriage between the new link decryptor and the ICP board must be realized; Follow the procedure to clear
a security warning on the projector. See "Authorization to clear security warning on the projector", page 291.

290

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

14. Card Cage

14.14 Authorization to clear security warning on the projector

When is an authorization required to clear the security warning?
If a module has been removed or if the sealed compartment has been opened, an authorization will be required to clear the security
warning.

Necessary tools

Security key (Dallas iButton).

Authorization pin code.

Authorization procedure to clear security warning

1. Ensure that all modules are properly installed.
2. Start up the projector (standby mode).
3. Initiate authorization by holding the security key in the security socket D..

1
2
3
4
5
6

Image 14-57
Keypad

The color of the backlight of the numeric keys 1 to 6 of the local keypad changes from blue to yellow.
4. Enter pin code within 5 seconds.
-

In case no keys are pressed, the color of the backlight of the numeric keys 1 to 6 changes back to blue.

In case of an incorrect code entry, the color of the backlight of the numeric keys changes to red for 1 second and then back
to blue.

In case of a correct code entry, the color of the backlight of the numeric keys 1 to 10 changes to green for 1 second and
then back to blue.
Each attempt to clear the security warning and its result (successfully or unsuccessfully) is logged inside the
projector.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

291

14. Card Cage

14.15 Replacement of the Status Light

To access the Status Light board the rear cover of the projector has to be removed. This procedure assumes
that the rear cover is already removed.

Necessary tools
2,5 mm Allen wrench.

How to replace the Status Light from the projector?

1. Remove the two indicated screws (reference 1) of the Status Light board. As a result the board will come loose but remains
connected via the wire unit.
2. Disconnect the wire unit (reference 2) of the Status Light board.

2
1
Image 14-58

3. Connect a new Status Light board with the wire unit.

4. Fasten the new Status Light board with two screws. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.

292

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

15. SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA COMMUNICATOR (DC

UPDATE COMPANION)
Overview

Software upgrade, launch DC update companion

Software upgrade, projector, ICMP or touch panel

ICP software upgrade

Link decryptor software update

Update logging
During an upgrade, certificate (code 5815) and key errors (code 5816) are possible. Restarting the projector
will resolve these errors. If these errors remain after a restart, replace the ICP board.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

293

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

15.1 Software upgrade, launch DC update companion

What can now be done ?
The following updates of the software are possible with Communicator (DC update companion)

Barco DC package update:

-

Projector software

Touch panel software

Enigma link decryptor software

Integrated Cinema Processor (ICP) software

ICMP software

Download the corresponding update package from Barcos web site, http://www.barco.com on your PC. Select via the product name.
For Enigma link decrypor and ICP update package, unzip the package file into a new directory.
For the projector software, ICMP and the touch panel software package, unzipping is not possible. the file can be used as is.
The ICP and Linkdecryptor package file contains at least

a zipped version of the update program which contains a setup.exe file to install the program. Can also be unzipped.

a release file with the new software.

a release note (pdf document)

a Software Manifest for ICP Production Release (pdf document)

Image 15-1
Content ICP update package

DC Update Companion can also be started as a separate application. The start up button is located next to
the Communicator start button in the start programs tree.

How to launch
1. While in the Maintenance tab page, click on Software update (1).

294

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

Image 15-2
Launch DC update companion

2. Click on Launch DC update companion (2).

The DC update companion window starts up (3).
3. Click Next to continue (4).
4. Read the licence agreement and check accept. Click Next to continue.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

295

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

Image 15-3
Start up selection window

5. Continue with the specific procedure for each type of package.

296

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

15.2 Software upgrade, projector, ICMP or touch panel

How to update
1. Launch the DC Update Companion as described in "Software upgrade, launch DC update companion", page 294.
2. Select package type. Click on the drop down box (1) and select Barco DC Package (for projector or touch panel update) or ICMP
package (for ICMP update).

Image 15-4
Package file selection

3. Browse the package file name. Click on Browse (2) to open the Browser window (3).
The correct file type is already filled out (4).
4. Browse for the desired file (5), select the file and click on Open (6).
The Package file name line is filled out (7).
5. To read the release notes, click on Show Release Notes (8).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

297

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

Image 15-5
Barco release notes

6. Enter the device IP address (10) or click on Browse to open a device selection window (11).
Note: The IP of the connected projector is already filled out. When using the DC Update Companion as stand alone program,
then this field is blank.

298

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

Image 15-6
IP selection

7. Select the desired IP address (12) and click Select (13).

The selected IP address is filled out next to Device IP address.
8. Click Next to continue.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

299

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

The necessary information is gathered.
The current installed version is shown next to the package version (15).

Image 15-7
Projector software update

9. Select the way the wizard will update the package. Check the desired radio button (16).
10.If automatically is selected the wizard gathered the information (17). Then click Next to start the update (20).
If custom update (for advanced users) is selected, the wizard starts collecting the information (17) of the different software modules.
11. Select the modules to update (19) and click Next to start the update (20).
The update can take a lot of time. Make sure not to interrupt the power during the update process. At the end,
an update status will be displayed.

300

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

15.3 ICP software upgrade

About updating ICP board
The ICP board contains 2 slots to store software before this software can be installed. Therefore it is recommended to store the
previous version of the software in a location and the current version in the other. When an new update becomes available, overwrite
always the oldest version.
These 2 loaded versions make it possible to switch on an easy way between the current version and the previous one.

How to upgrade
1. Launch the DC Update Companion as described in "Software upgrade, launch DC update companion", page 294.
2. Select package type. Click on the drop down box (1) and select ICP Package .

Image 15-8

3. Browse the package file name. Click on Browse (2) to open the Browser window (3).
Note: File has extension release.
The correct file type is already filled out (4).
4. Browse for the desired file (5), select the file and click on Open (6).
The Package file name line is filled out (7).
5. Enter the device IP address (10) or click on Browse to open a device selection window (11).
Note: The IP of the connected projector is already filled out. When using the DC Update Companion as stand alone program,
then this field is blank.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

301

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

Image 15-9
IP selection

6. Click Next to continue.

302

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

The necessary information is gathered.
The current installed version is shown next to the package version (13).

Image 15-10
Load and install software

7. Select the way the wizard will update the package. Check the desired radio button (14).
8. If automatically is selected the wizard will load the software in the oldest slot and install the software immediately (15).
If custom update (for advanced users) is selected, the wizard displays the selection for slot A or slot B (16). Check the radio
button of your choice and press Next (17).
The software will be loaded to the selected slot and will be installed immediately
When the update is finished, an status window is displayed.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

303

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

15.4 Link decryptor software update

How to update
1. Launch the DC Update Companion as described in "Software upgrade, launch DC update companion", page 294.
2. Select package type. Click on the drop down box (1) and select Enigma Link Decryptor Package .

Image 15-11

3. Browse the package file name. Click on Browse (2) to open the Browser window (3).
The correct file type is already filled out (4).
4. Browse for the desired file (5), select the file and click on Open (6).
Note: File has extension pkg.
The Package file name line is filled out (7).
5. Enter the device IP address (10) or click on Browse to open a device selection window (11).
Note: The IP of the connected projector is already filled out. When using the DC Update Companion as stand alone program,
then this field is blank.

304

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

Image 15-12
IP selection

6. Click Next to continue.

The necessary information is gathered.
The current installed version is shown next to the package version (13).

Image 15-13

7. Click Next to start the software update (14).

When the update is finished, an status window is displayed.
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

305

15. Software update via Communicator (DC update companion)

15.5 Update logging

Installation logging
When the software update is finished, a status window is displayed. This window is almost equal for all possible updates.

Image 15-14
Status window.

To show the log file, click on Show log file.

All information about the update process is logged in this log file.

306

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

16. Communicator touch panel

16. COMMUNICATOR TOUCH PANEL

Overview

Introduction

Installing the touch panel interface

Reposition the touch panel interface

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

307

16. Communicator touch panel

16.1 Introduction
Communicator Touch Panel for digital cinema projectors
The Communicator Touch Panel is designed for multi-user command and control, the Communicator enables users to learn quickly
and operate efficiently - using an elegant and flexible touch panel interface. The interfaces commonality means that operators
can intuitively use any model in the product line, without restriction, and its user-friendly nature translates directly into a short and
enjoyable learning curve.

Image 16-1

Flexible touch panel interface

The touch panel interface can be mounted upon a swivel arm which easily fits on top of the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx
projector. One central locking mechanism of the swivel arm allows an instant fixation of the touch panel interface in any position.
The touch panel interface can also be installed further away from the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector. For that you can
use a serial (RS232) cable up to 10 meter or an Ethernet cable up to 50 meter to realize a direct data communication between the
DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector and the Communicator Touch Panel.
The touch panel interface can also be connected with a Local Area Network (LAN) just like the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx
projector. In this case both devices can communicate with each other as well.
The touch panel interface requires a voltage supply +12 VDC and 1,5 ampere. Note that the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx
projector has a 12 VDC output which can be used to power up the touch panel interface. Nevertheless, the use of a separate +12
VDC adaptor (1,5 ampere minimum) is required in case the touch panel interface is installed more then a few meters away from the
DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector.
A crossed DC cable has to be used when connecting the +12 VDC output from the Input & Communication
unit of the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx projector directly with the Touch Panel interface.

Parts location of the touch panel interface

A

E
C

Image 16-2
A
Touch screen.
B
Communication ports.
C
Knob to operate central swivel clamp.
D
Base of swivel arm.
E
Power input (12 VDC 1,5 A).
F
RS323 port (9 pins SUB-D ).
G
Ethernet port (RJ45).
H
Two USB ports to connect USB stick, mouse or keyboard.

308

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

16. Communicator touch panel

CAUTION: Refer to the user guide of the Communicator Touch Panel for more information about usage guidelines.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

309

16. Communicator touch panel

16.2 Installing the touch panel interface

Necessary tools

17 mm wrench.

10 mm wrench.

How to install the touch panel interface upon the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx?

1. Assemble the mounting plate and the swivel arm together as illustrated. First place the nut (N) upon the rod of the mounting
plate, then add the lock washer (L), then fasten the mounting plate and the swivel arm together. When the arm is mounted, turn
nut (N) against the arm to secure the position.

N
L

Image 16-3
Assemble swivel arm

2. Slide a washer (M) over the base of the swivel arm and Insert the base of the swivel arm into the mounting hole at the top of the
DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cxas illustrated.

Image 16-4
Mount swivel arm

3. Place the touch panel interface upon the mounting plate of the swivel arm and fasten the two wing nuts (W) as illustrated.

310

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

16. Communicator touch panel

Image 16-5
Mount touch panel

4. Connect the circular plug of the multi cable with the circular socket at the rear side of the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18Cx.

Image 16-6
Connections

5. Attach the multi cable to the swivel arm using the two Velcro strips.
6. Connect the DC plug, the RJ45 Ethernet plug and the D-SUB plug into their respective sockets on the touch panel interface.

Image 16-7
Connections

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

311

16. Communicator touch panel

16.3 Reposition the touch panel interface

How to reposition the touch panel interface?
1. Hold fast the touch panel interface.
2. Release the central swivel clamp by turning the big black knob (K) counterclockwise.

K
Image 16-8

3. Move the touch panel interface into the desired position.

4. Fasten the central swivel clamp by turning the big black knob clockwise.

CAUTION: Never release the central swivel lock without supporting the Touch Panel interface.

312

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17. Power input

17. POWER INPUT

About this chapter
This chapter describes the procedures to replace the power input components such as main switch, mains filter, ...

WARNING: Always disconnect the power cord from the local power net before start any service action on the
Mains Input of the projector.

Overview

Introduction

Getting access to the Mains Input components

Replacement of the mains ON/OFF switch

Replacement of the mains input filter

Closing the Mains Input compartment

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

313

17. Power input

17.1 Introduction
Power Input
The power input of the projector is located at the rear side of the projector. The electrical connection with the local power net is fixed
wired. The local power net is connected with a built-in 3-terminal strip. The power is applied to the mains filter via the mains switch.
Three power cables are connected with the output side (LOAD) of the mains filter. One cable leads via the 5,5 ampere protected
C13 power output socket and a C14 power input socket to the SMPS and is used to provide the electronics of the projector with
power. The two other cables go to the Lamp Power Supply module (one cable per LPS unit). By default the power output and input
socket are connected with a short power cable. When an Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) is required, the short cable is removed
and the UPS is connected to the power input C14 socket.

Power Input parts location

1

Image 17-1
Power input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

314

Terminator block.
Automatic circuit breaker with ON/OFF switch.
Mains input filter.
Power input C14 socket for projector electronics (UPS purpose).
Protected power output C13 socket.
Adjustable brackets for securing the power plugs.
Loop through power cable.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17. Power input

17.2 Getting access to the Mains Input components

This procedure explains how to disconnect the power cord and how to remove the terminator block in order
to get access to the mains filter and mains ON/OFF switch. This procedure assumes that the rear cover and
lamp cover of the projector are already removed.

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench.

Flat blade screw driver.

Torx screw driver T20

How to get access to the Mains Input components?

1. Make sure that the power cord of the projector is powerless.
2. Remove the cover of the AC compartment by releasing the three captive dumb screws.

Image 17-2
AC power compartment cover

3. Disconnect the AC power cord from the 3terminal strip and guide the AC power cord out of the compartment.
4. Remove the cover plate by releasing the 3 hexagon socket head cap screws and the 2 Torx screws as illustrated.

Image 17-3
Mains input cover

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

315

17. Power input

5. Disconnect the three wires from the 3-terminal strip. Use a flat blade screw driver.
6. Remove the 3-terminal strip together with its mounting plate by releasing the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws as illustrated.
Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.

Image 17-4
Mains input strip

316

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17. Power input

17.3 Replacement of the mains ON/OFF switch

This procedure assumes that the Mains Input components are accessible.

Necessary tools

2,5 mm Allen wrench.

Flat blade screw driver.

How to replace the mains ON/OFF switch

1. Remove the two hexagon socket head cap screws which securing the ON/OFF switch. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench. Note that
the ON/OFF switch is still connected with the mains input filter. Once the switch is detached from the projector chassis it will be
easier to disconnect the wires as described in the next step.

Image 17-5
ON/OFF switch assembly removal

2. Remove the connection screws at the back side of the ON/OFF switch and slide off the eye connectors. Do not drop the washers
inside the projector. Use a flat blade screw driver.
3. Connect the two wires from the mains filter (reference 3 image 17-6) with the two upper pins of the ON/OFF switch. Slide a lock
washer followed by a washer over the screw and then the eye connector of the wire. Turn in the screw and tighten completely.
Note: The top side of the ON/OFF switch is the upper side when holding the ON/OFF switch vertically with the indication 1
(reference 1 image 17-6) points to the top of the projector.
4. Connect the two loose wires (reference 2 image 17-6) with the two lower pins of the ON/OFF switch. Slide a lock washer followed
by a washer over the screw and then the eye connector of the wire. Turn in the screw and tighten completely.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

317

17. Power input

3
2

3
2

Image 17-6
Connections with main switch

5. Slide the new ON/OFF switch from the inside of the projector through the cabinet. Make sure that the indication 1 (reference
1) points to the top of the projector.

Image 17-7
Mount Main switch assembly

6. Fasten the ON/OFF switch with two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 4 image 17-7).

318

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17. Power input

17.4 Replacement of the mains input filter

This procedure assumes that the Mains Input components are accessible.

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench.

10 mm open-end wrench.

How to replace the mains input filter

1. Remove both nuts on the LOAD side (reference A and B of image 17-8) of the mains input filter and slide off all eye connections.
Do not drop the lock washers in the projector. Use a 10 mm open-end wrench.
2. Remove both nuts on the LINE side (reference C and D of image 17-8) of the mains input filter and slide off all eye connections.
Do not drop the lock washers in the projector. Use a 10 mm open-end wrench.

Image 17-8
LOAD connections

3. Remove the mains input filter by releasing the four hexagon socket head cap screws as illustrated. Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.

Image 17-9
Mains input filter removal

4. Place a new mains input filter on its position and fasten with four hexagon socket head cap screws. Make sure that the LOAD
side is facing downwards. Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.
5. Connect the wires with the same colors of the LPS cables and the wire from the mains output with the LOAD side of the mains
input filter (reference A and B of image 17-8). First slide the eye connections of the wires over the pin (same colors together),
then slide a washer followed by a lock washer over the pin and secure with a nut. Use a 10 mm open-end wrench.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

319

17. Power input

6. Connect both wires (reference C and D of image 17-8) from the ON/OFF switch with the LINE side of the mains input filter. First
slide the eye connections of the wire over the pin, then slide a washer followed by a lock washer over the pin and secure with a
nut. Use a 10 mm open-end wrench.

320

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17. Power input

17.5 Closing the Mains Input compartment

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench.

Flat blade screw driver.

Torx screw driver T20

How to close the Mains Input compartment?

1. Guide the ground wire and the two wires from the ON/OFF switch through the opening in the mounting plate of the 3-terminator
strip and secure the mounting plate with four hexagon socket head cap screws as illustrated.

Image 17-10

2. Connect the ground wire and the two wires from the ON/OFF switch with the lower pins of the 3-terminator strip. Make sure to
connect the ground wire with the marked ground pin of the 3-terminator strip.
3. Fasten the cover plate with 3 hexagon socket head cap screws and 2 Torx screws as illustrated.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

321

17. Power input

Image 17-11
Mains input cover, installation

4. Guide the AC power cord through the cable gland and connect the wires to the 3-terminal strip as illustrated.
Warning: Always connect first the ground wire (PE).

PE

Image 17-12
Wire connections

5. Reinstall the cover of the main AC compartment.

322

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

17. Power input

Image 17-13
Mains AC compartment cover

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

323

17. Power input

324

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

18. Switched mode power supply

18. SWITCHED MODE POWER SUPPLY

Overview

Diagnostic LEDs on the SMPS

Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply

Preparations
Before getting access to the Switched mode power supply, remove the input cover.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

325

18. Switched mode power supply

18.1 Diagnostic LEDs on the SMPS

Diagnostic LEDs
Not that the projector input cover must be removed to see the LEDs.
+12V

Indicates that the supply voltage of +12 volt is present for the electronics.

+ VTEC Indicates that the voltage to drive the Peltier elements (TEC), which are mounted on the Light Processor unit, is present
+24V

326

Indicates that the supply voltage +24 volt is present.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

18. Switched mode power supply

18.2 Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply

Necessary tools

7 mm nut driver or

flat screw driver

How to replace
1. Release the 4 spring locks (1).

1
Image 18-1
SMPS cover

2. Take off the cover.

3. Disconnect the following connectors:
-

Mains input (1)

Ground wire (2)

Control connector (blue wires) (3)

Power out connector (black wires) (4)

Image 18-2
SMPS connections

4. Slide out the Switched Mode Power Supply board.

Image 18-3

5. Take a new unit and inset the board in the guides.

Pull it completely in.
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

327

18. Switched mode power supply

6. Make the electrical connections (image 18-2):
-

Mains input (1)

Ground wire (2)

Control connector (blue wires) (3)

Power out connector (black wires) (4)

7. Place the cover on its place and secure with the 4 spring locks.

1
Image 18-4
Mount SMPS cover

328

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

19. Lamp power supply

19. LAMP POWER SUPPLY

About this chapter
This chapter describes briefly the functionality, the different parts, the diagnostic LEDs and the replacement of the Lamp Power
Supply (LPS).
Not used in a DP2K-18CX.

Overview

Introduction

LPS diagnostic LEDs

Removing the LPS module

Installation of the LPS module

Preparations
Remove first the rear cover of the projector, see "Removal of the rear cover", page 98.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

329

19. Lamp power supply

19.1 Introduction
Functionality of the Lamp Power Supply
The Lamp Power Supply (LPS) of the DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C digital projector is actually a dual LPS connected in parallel. Both LPS
units are enclosed in one casing. The front side of the LPS casing contains the input/output connectors and diagnostic LEDs of the
LPS units. The rear side is equipped with fans. The whole LPS module slides into the LPS compartment at the rear bottom of the
DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C projector and can be replaced easily.
To ignite the lamp the voltage on the output pins of the LPS units is brought up to 140 volt. This high voltage will trigger the Start
Pulse Generator (SPG) to ignite the lamp. Once the lamp is ignited the voltage on the output pins of the LPS units is dropped to the
typical arc voltage of the lamp e.g. 28 volt for a 3 kW lamp.
Each LPS unit can deliver maximum 2500 watts and maximum 100 amps. In normal situation, each LPS unit deliver the half of the
required power. So, for a 3 kW lamp having an arc voltage of 28 volt, each LPS unit deliver 53,57 amps at 28 volt which is equal to
1500 watt.
When one of the two LPS units suddenly fails during an event, the other LPS unit continues delivering 53,57 amps at 28 volt. As a
result, the projectors light output is reduced. In case the projector starts up with one LPS unit down, the other LPS unit will run on
its maximum power and delivers 89,3 amps at 28 volt which is equal to 2500 watt.
In case one or both LPS units fails an error is logged in the projector log file.

Parts

LPS MODULE
LPS UNIT 1
B

LPS UNIT 2
E

MAINS
INPUT

MAINS
INPUT

LAMP OUT

LAMP OUT

F G

H I

J K L

F G

H I

J K L

Image 19-1

330

Captive screw.

G Status LEDs: ERR, PFC OK & LPS OK.

Lamp output pin .

H Socket for CTRL OUT cable - DP2K series.

Lamp output pin +.

Status LEDs: LAMP ON / LVPS OK.

J Socket for CTRL IN cable - DP2K series

Mains input.

K Socket for CTRL OUT cable - not used in DP2K series.

Status LEDs, left and middle LED for internal use,

right LED : heartbeat

L Socket for CTRL IN cable - not used in DP2K series

Socket for ADDRESS cable.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

19. Lamp power supply

19.2 LPS diagnostic LEDs

Status LEDs on LPS unit
The LPS module contains in total 16 status LEDs. 8 per LPS unit. Four orange, three green and one red LED.
The orange LED LVPS OK lights up immediately after the projector is switched on. At the same time, the heartbeat LED starts
blinking. All other status LEDs of the LPS unit remain off. This is the standby status of the LPS unit. Once the command is sent
to the LPS units to start up the projection lamp, the green LEDs are lighting up one after the other. First the green LED PFC OK,
then the green LED LPS OK and finally, when the lamp is ignited, the green LED LAMP ON. The right orange of the upper row
blinks. This is the heartbeat signal
The red LED ERR remains off unless an error is detected inside the LPS unit or when both LPS units are ordered to shutdown due
to a malfunction somewhere else inside the projector.

LAMP ON / LVPS OK

ERR PFC LPS

OK OK
Image 19-2
LED indications

Diagnostic
About the orange LEDs next to the CTRL connectors:

ERR PFC LPS

OK OK
Image 19-3

LED A LPS trans LED B is only for internal use. LED C is the heartbeat LED.
Orange LED A

Diagnostics

Blinking

Normal operation, blinks each time a valid transmission has been received
Communication fault (no reception of valid commands Replace LPS unit
from primary side)
Fault on primary side of LPS (E.g. fuse blown and no Replace fuse.
mains voltage available inside LPS)
If the problem is not solved, replace LPS
No mains voltage present at input of LPS mains
Check main voltage.
terminals

OFF or ON

Action

Orange LED C

Diagnostics

Action

Blinking

Normal operation

OFF

12 V from backplane via CTRL IN not available on LPS Check 12V out on backplane.
unit
12 V from backplane available.
Replace the LPS module.

ON

About the diagnostic LEDs, ERR, PFC, LPS, Lamp ON and LVPS.
Orange

Green

Green

Green

Red

LVPS OK

PFC OK

LPS OK

LAMP OK

ERR

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Diagnostic

No input voltage.

Action

Switch on the projector.

331

19. Lamp power supply

Diagnostic

Orange

Green

Green

Green

Red

LVPS OK

PFC OK

LPS OK

LAMP OK

ERR

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Standby modus of LPS unit.

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PFC and LPS seems to work

normally but the lamp is not
ignited. This situation can be
the result of a bad lamp or
SPG module.

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

LPS unit is operating normally.

Projector lamp is ignited.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

LPS internal temperature is

too high.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Blinking

Error detected inside this LPS

unit. In case the other LPS
unit operates normally the
LPS module as a whole works
at 50%.
External error detected from
Fan Control board.

Action

Install a new lamp in

case the voltage on the
LAMP OUT pins is >
140 volt for a short time
(few seconds).

Install another
DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C
lamp house in case the
voltage on the LAMP
OUT pins is > 140 volt
for a short time (few
seconds).

Replace the SPG module

in case the voltage value
on the LAMP OUT pins
is >140 volt and you
do not hear the SPG
module clicking to ignite
the lamp.

Replace the LPS module

in case the voltage value
on the LAMP OUT pins
is below 140 volt and the
lamp is not ignited.

Check if the LPS air inlet

at the bottom side of the
projector is not blocked.

Check if the air outlet at

the rear of the projector
is not blocked.

If the problem remains,

replace the whole LPS
module.

Replace the LPS module.

Check projector log files

for error messages
(temperatures, fan
speed, etc.)

Check Fan Control

board.

Normal conditions of diagnostic LEDs when a lamp is switched ON

332

ERR : OFF

PFC OK : ON (green)

LPS OK : ON (green)

LED A (Yellow left) : flashing few times / second

LED B (Yellow center) : not defined

LED C (Yellow right) : flashing (beating as a heart)

LAMP ON : ON (green)

LVPS OK : ON (yellow/orange)

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

19. Lamp power supply

19.3 Removing the LPS module

Necessary tools

6 x 120 mm flat screw driver.

10 mm nut driver.

How to remove the LPS module

1. Remove the back cover of the projector.
2. Disconnect the MAINS INPUT from both LPS units.

Image 19-4
Mains input

3. Disconnect the wire unit from the CTLB IN socket of LPS unit 2.

Image 19-5
CTLB in connector

4. Disconnect both LAMP OUT power cables at the left side from the LPS module. Use a 10 mm nut driver.
Caution: Do not loose the washers which fit between the fixation nuts and the cable eye.
Tip:

Place the washers and nuts back upon the output pins.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

333

19. Lamp power supply

Image 19-6
Lamp out connection

5. Release the four captive screws which fasten the LPS module to the projector chassis. Use for that a flat screwdriver (6 x 10
mm).

Image 19-7
LPS module fixation

6. Hold fast the LPS module by its handles pull the LPS module out of its compartment.

Image 19-8
Remove LPS module

7. Remove both loop through cables between LPS unit 1 and LPS unit 2. One for ADDRESS and one for CTLB.
Remove both loop through lamp power cables between LPS unit 1 and LPS unit 2.

334

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

19. Lamp power supply

19.4 Installation of the LPS module

Necessary tools

6 x 120 mm flat screwdriver.

Torque wrench with a 10 mm hexagon socket.

How to install the LPS module

1. Slide the LPS module into its compartment as illustrated.

Image 19-9
Insert LPS module

2. Fasten the four captive screws of the LPS module.

Image 19-10
Fixate LPS module

3. Connect the power cables coming from the SPG module with the LAMP OUT sockets of the LPS module as illustrated. Fasten
the nuts with a torque of 4Nm (2.95 lbf*ft).
Warning: Make sure to place the washers and cable eyes in correct order upon the pin as illustrated. Always use a plain
washer between the output pin and the cable eyes.

E2
W
W

L
N

E1

Image 19-11
Lamp out connection
P
W
L
E1
E2
N

LPS output pin.

Plain washer.
Lock washer.
Cable eye from SPG module.
Cable eye from LPS unit.
Nut.

Warning:

Respect the polarity of the socket and cables. Red marked cables with the + pin, black marked cables with the -
pin.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

335

19. Lamp power supply

Image 19-12
Lamp power cables

4. Connect the wire unit coming out of the projector with the CTRL IN socket of LPS unit 2 as illustrated.

Image 19-13
CTRL in connector

5. Connect the mains input cables with the MAINS INPUT sockets of each LPS module as illustrated.
Plug the connector of the blue wire into the socket labeled with N.

Image 19-14
Mains input connection

336

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

19. Lamp power supply

Image 19-15
Neutral wire indication

6. If not yet available, make the connection between CTRL out of LPS unit 2 to CTRL in of LPS unit 1.
Make the connection between both ADDRESS connectors.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

337

19. Lamp power supply

338

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

20. LAMP POWER SUPPLY (SINGLE MODULE)

About this chapter
This chapter describes briefly

the functionality,

the different parts,

the diagnostic LEDs,

the replacement of the Lamp power supply module

the replacement of a large Lamp Power Supply (LPS) with a 2 single modules Lamp power supplies.

Overview

LPS module diagnostic LEDs

Removal of a LPS module

Installation of a LPS module

Replacing a large frame LPS with a 2 single module LPS

About the Lamp power supply

The second generation lamp power supply module can be used to replace first generation lamp power supply unit. Therefore a
special kit is created to replace a first generation power supply. This kit must only be used to replace the first generation power
supply for the first time. Once the kit is installed, when a next LPS replacement is required, only a single LPS unit is necessary.
Kit overview table:
Kit order
number
R765523K

Kit content

When used

Single LPS module

To replace a single module LPS module

R7655232K

2 single LPS modules + fixation frame

To replace for the first time a large LPS module. A

once-only action.

Preparations
Remove first the rear cover of the projector, see "Removal of the rear cover", page 98.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

339

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

20.1 LPS module diagnostic LEDs

Status LEDs on the LPS module
There are 8 diagnostic LEDs on the LPS module. Four orange, three green and one red LED.
The orange LED LVPS OK lights up immediately after the projector is switched on. At the same time, the heartbeat LED starts
blinking. All other status LEDs of the LPS unit remain off. This is the standby status of the LPS unit. Once the command is sent
to the LPS units to start up the projection lamp, the green LEDs are lighting up one after the other. First the green LED PFC OK,
then the green LED LPS OK and finally, when the lamp is ignited, the green LED LAMP ON. The right orange of the upper row
blinks. This is the heartbeat signal.
The red LED ERR remains off unless an error is detected inside the LPS unit or when the LPS unit is ordered to shutdown due to
a malfunction somewhere else inside the projector.

1
LAMP ON / LVPS OK

MAINS
INPUT

- LAMP OUTPUT +

STATUS

CTLB OUT CTLB IN

PFC LPS
ERR OK OK ADDRESS

4
Image 20-1
1
Diagnostic
2
Diagnostic
3
Diagnostic
4
Diagnostic
5
Diagnostic
6
Diagnostic
7
Diagnostic
8
Diagnostic

5
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

CTRL OUT

CTRL IN

6
LPS HEARTBEAT (orange).
(internal use only) (orange).
LPS TRANS (orange).
ERROR (red).
PFC OK (green).
LPS OK (green).
LAMP ON (green).
LVPS OK (orange).

Diagnostic
About the orange LEDs next to the CTRL connectors:
LED 2 is only for internal use. LED 1 is the heartbeat LED.
LPS
HEARTBEAT
(Orange LED
1)
Blinking
OFF

Diagnostics

Action

Normal operation

ON

12 V from backplane via CTRL IN not available on LPS Check 12V out on backplane.
unit
12 V from backplane available.
Replace the LPS unit.

LPS TRANS

Diagnostics

Action

(Orange LED 3)
Blinking
Normal operation, blinks each time a valid transmission has been received
OFF or ON
Communication fault (no reception of valid commands Replace LPS unit.
from primary side)
Fault on primary side of LPS (E.g. fuse blown and no Replace fuse.
mains voltage available inside LPS)
If the problem is not solved, replace LPS
No mains voltage present at input of LPS mains
Check main voltage.
terminals
About the diagnostic LEDs, ERR, PFC, LPS, Lamp ON and LVPS.

340

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

Diagnostic

Action

Orange

Green

Green

Green

Red

LVPS OK

PFC OK

LPS OK

LAMP OK

ERR

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

No input voltage.

Switch on the projector.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Standby modus of LPS unit.

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PFC and LPS seems to work

normally but the lamp is not
ignited. This situation can be
the result of a bad lamp or
SPG module.

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

LPS unit is operating normally.

Projector lamp is ignited.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

LPS internal temperature is

too high.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Blinking

Error detected inside this LPS

unit.
External error detected from
Fan Control board.

Install another xenon

lamp in case the voltage
on the LAMP OUT pins
is 140 volt and you hear
the SPG three times
clicking to ignite the
lamp.

Replace the SPG module

in case the voltage value
on the LAMP OUT pins
is >140 volt and you
do not hear the SPG
module clicking to ignite
the lamp.

Replace the LPS module

in case the voltage value
on the LAMP OUT pins
is below 140 volt and the
lamp is not ignited.

Check if the LPS air inlet

inside the projector is not
blocked.

Check if the air outlet at

the rear of the projector
is not blocked.

If the problem remains,

replace the LPS module.

Replace the LPS module.

Check projector log files

for error messages
(temperatures, fan
speed, etc.)

Check Fan Control

board.

Normal conditions of diagnostic LEDs when a lamp is switched ON

LED 1 (orange right) : flashing (heartbeat)

LED 2 (orange center) : not defined

LED 3 (orange left) : flashing few times / second

ERR : OFF

PFC OK : ON (green)

LPS OK : ON (green)

LAMP ON : ON (green)

LVPS OK : ON (orange)

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

341

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

20.2 Removal of a LPS module

Necessary tools

Flat screw driver

Nut driver 10mm

How to remove
1. Remove the connection between the Address connectors of both LPS modules (3).

1
2

Image 20-2
Communication connections

2. For the left LPS module, remove the CTLB OUT (2) and CTLB IN (1) connections.
For the right LPS module, remove the CTLB IN connection (2).
3. Disconnect the LAMP OUT cables from the LPS module. Use a 10 mm nut driver.
Note: Do not loose the washers !
4. Disconnect the MAINS INPUT cables.
5. Disconnect the grounding wires (PE wires) (4) from both LPS modules.

4
4

Image 20-3
Grounding wires

6. Release the 4 captive screws (1) and take off the fixation frame.

342

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

Image 20-4
Fixation screws

7. Slide out the defective LPS module.

Image 20-5
LPS module removal

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

343

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

20.3 Installation of a LPS module

Necessary tools

Flat screw driver.

Torque wrench with a 10 mm hexagon socket.

How to install
1. Before inserting an LPS unit, place the mounting pin at the backside in its correct position.

Image 20-6
Mounting pin
A
B

To be built-in in the left position

To be built-in in the right position

For a LPS unit to be built-in at the left side of the LPS compartment, the positioning pin must be in the left position when seen
from the backside of the unit.
For a LPS unit to be built-in at the right side of the LPS compartment, the positioning pin must be in the right position when seen
from the backside of the unit.
To move the pin to the left or the right, pull on the pin and slide it to the left or to the right.
2. Take the new LPS module and slide in the LPS module in the LPS compartment so that the LAMP OUT connection points are to
the upper side.

Image 20-7
LPS module insertion

3. Slide the fixation frame on the front of the LPS units in such a way that the fixation pins match the fixation holes.

344

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

Image 20-8
Fixation frame

4. Secure the 4 spring screws (1).

Image 20-9
Fixation screws

5. Connect the grounding wires mounted on the LPS fixation into the socket of each LPS unit.

Image 20-10
Grounding wires

6. Connect the power cables coming from the SPG module with the LAMP OUT sockets of the LPS module as illustrated. Insert at
the same time the connector coming from he second LPS unit. Fasten the nuts with a torque of 4Nm (2.95 lbf*ft).
If it is the left LPS module, push the high power cables through the handle of the this LPS module before connecting to the LAMP
OUT socket.
Warning: Make sure to place the washers and cable eyes in correct order upon the pin as illustrated. Always use a plain
washer between the output pin and the cable eyes.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

345

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

E2
W
W

L
N

E1

Image 20-11
Lamp out connection
P
W
L
E1
E2
N

LPS output pin.

Plain washer.
Lock washer.
Cable eye from SPG module.
Cable eye from LPS unit.
Nut.

Warning:

Respect the polarity of the socket and cables. Red marked cables with the + pin, black marked cables with the -
pin.

Image 20-12
High power connection, left

7. Connect the mains input cables with the MAINS INPUT sockets of the new LPS module as illustrated.
Plug the connector of the blue (or white) wire into the socket labeled with N.

Image 20-13
Mains input connection, left and right LPS module

346

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

When the left LPS module is replaced:
-

Connect the wire unit coming out of the projector with the CTLB IN socket (1).

Connect the CTLB OUT socket of the left LPS with the CTLB IN socket of the right LPS unit (2).

Make the connection between the ADDRESS connector of the left LPS unit and the ADDRESS connector of the right LPS
unit (3). Make sure that the indication Left and Right is at the correct side.

When the right LPS module is replaced:

-

connect the wire unit coming from CTLB OUT socket of the left LPS with the CTLB IN socket (2)

Make the connection between the ADDRESS connector of the left LPS unit and the ADDRESS connector of the right LPS
unit (3). Make sure that the indication Left and Right is at the correct side.

2
3

Image 20-14
Communication connections

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

347

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

20.4 Replacing a large frame LPS with a 2 single module LPS

Interconnection cables installed on the old LPS module must be reused while installing the new LPS modules
(high power cables, address cable and CTLB cable).

How to replace
1. Remove the large frame LPS module, see "Removal of a LPS module", page 342.
2. Before inserting an LPS unit, place the positioning pin at the backside in its correct position.

Image 20-15
Positioning pin
A
B

To be built-in in the left position

To be built-in in the right position

For a LPS unit to be built-in at the left side of the LPS compartment, the positioning pin must be in the left position when seen
from the backside of the unit.
For a LPS unit to be built-in at the right side of the LPS compartment, the positioning pin must be in the right position when seen
from the backside of the unit.
To move the pin to the left or the right, pull on the pin and slide it to the left or to the right.
3. Slide both single units next to each other in the projector.

Image 20-16
Insert LPS units

4. Slide the fixation frame on the front of the LPS units in such a way that the fixation pins match the fixation holes.

348

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

Image 20-17
Fixation frame

5. Secure the 4 spring screws (1).

Image 20-18
Fixation screws

6. Connect the grounding wires mounted on the LPS fixation into the socket of each LPS unit.

Image 20-19
Grounding wires

7. Connect the power cables coming from the SPG module with the LAMP OUT sockets of the LPS module as illustrated. Insert at
the same time the connector coming from he second LPS unit. Fasten the nuts with a torque of 4Nm (2.95 lbf*ft).
Warning: Make sure to place the washers and cable eyes in correct order upon the pin as illustrated. Always use a plain
washer between the output pin and the cable eyes.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

349

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

E2
W
W

L
N

E1

Image 20-20
Lamp out connection
P
W
L
E1
E2
N

LPS output pin.

Plain washer.
Lock washer.
Cable eye from SPG module.
Cable eye from LPS unit.
Nut.

Warning:

Respect the polarity of the socket and cables. Red marked cables with the + pin, black marked cables with the -
pin.

Image 20-21
High power connection, left

8. Pull the high power cables through the handle of the left LPS unit before connecting to the second LPS unit. Use again the same
type and sequence of washers secure with a nut. Fasten the nuts with a torque of 4Nm (2.95 lbf*ft).

Image 20-22
High power connection, right

9. Connect the mains input cables with the MAINS INPUT sockets of each LPS module as illustrated.
Plug the connector of the blue (or white) wire into the socket labeled with N.

350

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

Image 20-23
Mains input connection

10.Connect the wire unit coming out of the projector with the CTLB IN socket of the left LPS unit (1).
Connect the CTLB OUT socket of the left LPS with the CTLB IN socket of the right LPS unit (2).
Make the connection between the ADDRESS connector of the left LPS unit and the ADDRESS connector of the right LPS unit
(3). Make sure that the indication Left and Right is at the correct side.

2
3

Image 20-24
Communication connections

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

351

20. Lamp Power Supply (Single module)

352

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

21. Start Pulse Generator

21. START PULSE GENERATOR

About this chapter
This chapter describes briefly the functionality, the different parts and the replacement procedure of the Start Pulse Generator (SPG).

Overview

Introduction

Troubleshooting

Removal of the Start Pulse Generator

Installation of the Start Pulse Generator

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

353

21. Start Pulse Generator

21.1 Introduction
Functionality
The purpose of the Start Pulse Generator (SPG) is to ignite the lamp with a burst of high voltage peaks. The SPG superimposes
high voltage peaks onto the normal dc start-up voltage of the lamp supplied by the Lamp Power Supply. Once the lamp is started up
and illuminating, the high voltage is removed and the lamp voltage drops to the arc voltage. The high voltage peaks are added to the
lamp voltage by a superimposing transformer which is in series with the positive connection from the LPS to the lamp. The negative
connection from LPS to lamp is direct and is connected to the chassis at the lamp side. The full lamp current passes through the
secondary of the superimposing transformer.

Parts

A
B
Image 21-1
A
Black marked cable lug. Has to be connected with the negative LAMP OUT pin of the LPS module.
B
Red marked cable lug. Has to be connected with the positive LAMP OUT pin of the LPS module.
C
Ferrite block.
D
Negative connection pin from SPG to lamp house.
E
Positive connection pin from SPG to lamp house.

354

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

21. Start Pulse Generator

21.2 Troubleshooting
Lamp fails to ignite after you switched the projector from standby to operation
Situation

Solution

You can hear the SPG module three times clicking in an attempt to ignite
the lamp. The voltage on the LAMP OUT pins of the LPS module is
first 140 volt during the attempt to ignite and then drops to 0 volt.

The LPS and SPG seem to work normally but

the lamp is bad. Install another lamp house.

If the problem remains, replace the SPG

module.

Check the cabling of the SPG module.

Replace the SPG module.

Note: The ambient noise must be low to hear the SPG clicking in an
attempt to ignite the lamp.
You can not hear the SPG module three times clicking in an attempt to
ignite the lamp. The voltage on the LAMP OUT pins of the LPS module
is first 140 volt during the attempt to ignite and then drops to 0 volt.
Note: The ambient noise must be low to hear the SPG clicking in an
attempt to ignite the lamp.
You can not hear the SPG module three times clicking in an attempt to
ignite the lamp. The voltage on the LAMP OUT pins of the LPS module
is below 140 volt during the attempt to ignite. The diagnostic LEDs of
the LPS module indicates a problem with the LPS module.

Check the cabling of the LPS module.

Replace the LPS module.

Note: The ambient noise must be low to hear the SPG clicking in an
attempt to ignite the lamp.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

355

21. Start Pulse Generator

21.3 Removal of the Start Pulse Generator

To remove or install the start pulse generator you have to remove the side cover, the back cover, the lamp
cover and the lamp house first. This procedure assumes that these covers are already removed.

Necessary tools

10 mm nut driver.

3 mm Allen wrench.

6 x 120 mm flat screw driver.

How to remove the Start Pulse Generator

1. Disconnect the SPG cables from the LAMP OUT pins of the LPS module. Use a 10 mm nut driver.
Caution: Do not loose the washers which fit between the fixation nuts and the cable eye.
Tip:

Place the washers and nuts back upon the output pins.

Image 21-2
Disconnect SPG cables

2. Remove the cover of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated. This cover is secured with 5 hexagon socket head cap screws.
Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.

Image 21-3
Remove SPG cover

3. Release the 3 captive screws (S) of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated. Use a flat screw driver.

356

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

21. Start Pulse Generator

Image 21-4
Loosen SPG fixation

4. Remove the Start Pulse Generator from the projector.

Caution: Do not damage the ferrite blocks while removing the SPG module.
Note:

The ferrite blocks have to be reused upon the SPG module which you want to install.

Image 21-5
Remove SPG

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

357

21. Start Pulse Generator

21.4 Installation of the Start Pulse Generator

Make sure that lamp house is removed !

Necessary tools

Torque wrench with a 10 mm hexagon socket.

3 mm Allen wrench.

6 x 120 mm flat screw driver.

How to install the Start Pulse Generator

1. Insert the Start Pulse Generator in the projector. Guide the wires gently through the frame opening.
Caution: Make sure not to damage the wires.

Image 21-6
Insert SPG

2. Fasten the 3 captive screws (S) of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated, using a flat screw driver.

Image 21-7
Fixate SPG

3. Install the cover of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated. The cover has to be fasten with 5 hexagon socket head cap screws.
Use for that a 3 mm Allen wrench.

358

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

21. Start Pulse Generator

Image 21-8

4. Connect the power cables coming from the Start Pulse Generator with the LAMP OUT sockets of the LPS module as illustrated.
Fasten the nuts with a torque of 4Nm (2.95 lbf*ft).
Warning: Make sure to place the washers and cable eyes in correct order upon the pin as illustrated. Always use a plain
washer between the output pin and the cable eyes.

E2
W
W

L
N

E1

Image 21-9
Lamp out connection
P
W
L
E1
E2
N

LPS output pin.

Plain washer.
Lock washer.
Cable eye from SPG module.
Cable eye from LPS unit.
Nut.

Warning:

Respect the polarity of the socket and cables. Red marked cables with the + pin, black marked cables with the -
pin.

Image 21-10

Warning:

Make sure that both SPG cables are provided with ferrite blocks (C). Reuse the ferrite blocks of the removed SPG
module in case no ferrite blocks are present upon the installed SPG module.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

359

21. Start Pulse Generator

C
C

Image 21-11

5. Reinstall the lamp house and the covers of the projector.

360

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

22. FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

Overview

Card cage fans

SMPS compartment fans

Light processor compartment fan

Lamp cathode fan

Lamp anode fan

Heat exchanger fan

Cold mirror fan

Lamp Info Module fan

Integrated cinema processor fan

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

361

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.1 Card cage fans

Necessary tools
Allen key 3 mm

How to replace
1. Remove the front cover, see "Removal of the front cover", page 96.
2. Remove the front filter as follow:.
a) Remove the input cover, see "Removal of the input cover", page 95.
b) Pull the small handle a little backwards and then to the front of the projector until the filter frame is released.
c) Slide out the filter.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable(s). If necessary, cut the cable tie.

Image 22-1
Card cage fans, connection

4. Turn out the 4 fixation screws. Use the front holes in the fan housing to reach these screws.

Image 22-2
Card cage fans, removal

362

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

5. Take out the fan.
6. Insert a new fan, with the arrow indication on the fan pointing to the inner side of the projector.
7. Drive in the 4 fixation screws.
8. Reconnect the fan power cable. Use a cable tie to secure the cables.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

363

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.2 SMPS compartment fans

Necessary tools
Allen key 3 mm

How to replace
1. Remove the front cover, see "Removal of the front cover", page 96.
2. Remove the front filter as follow :
a) Remove the input cover, see "Removal of the input cover", page 95.
b) Pull the small handle a little backwards and then to the front of the projector until the filter frame is released.
c) Slide out the filter.
3. Disconnect the power cable of the defective fan. If necessary, cut the cable tie(s).

Image 22-3
SMPS fans, connection

4. Turn out the 4 fixation screws (1). Use the front holes in the fan housing to reach these screws.

Image 22-4
Remove the SMPS compartment fan(s)

5. Take out the fan.

6. Insert a new fan, with the arrow indication on the fan pointing to the inner side of the projector (2).

Image 22-5
Mount the SMPS compartment fan(s)

364

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

7. Drive in the 4 fixation screws.
8. Reconnect the fan power cable. Use a cable tie to secure the cables.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

365

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.3 Light processor compartment fan

Necessary tools
Allen key 3mm

How to replace
1. Remove covers, see Removal and Installation of projector covers.
2. Remove the light processor cover.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable from the signal backplane.

Image 22-6
Light processor fan connection

4. Remove the 4 screws.

366

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

2
1

Image 22-7
Light compartment fan, removal

5. Take of the fan protection grid and the fan.

6. Insert a new fan with the arrow indication on the fan pointing towards the light processor.
Place the grid on the fan.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

367

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-8
Light compartment fan, mount

7. Drive in the 4 screws.

2
1

Image 22-9
Light compartment fan, screws

8. Connect the power cable to the signal backplane (image 22-6).

9. Reinstall the Light processor top cover.
Mount the housing, see Removal and Installation of the projector covers..

368

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.4 Lamp cathode fan

To access the cathode fan, the lamp house has to be removed. This procedure assumes that the lamp cover
and lamp house are already removed.

Preparations
1.

Remove the lamp cover.

2.

Remove the lamp house.

Necessary tools

3 mm Allen wrench.

7 mm flat screwdriver.

7 mm nut driver.

How to replace
1. Remove the left side panel of the lamp compartment by removing the six indicated screws (reference 1).

Image 22-10
Side panel lamp house, removal

2. Pull out the wire unit with connector from behind the plate and disconnect the power cable of the cathode fan.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

369

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-11
Cathode fan, power disconnection

3. Remove the small side plate of the air channel by releasing the three screws (reference 2). Cut the foam rubber (reference 3)
as it is stuck on different plates.

2
Image 22-12
Small side plate, removal

4. Remove the cathode fan assembly out of its compartment by releasing the five indicated screws (reference 4). Cut the foam
rubber (reference 5) as it is stuck on different plates.
Tip:
Lift up and slightly turn the fan assembly to remove.

5
4

Image 22-13
Cathode fan assembly removal

5. Disassemble the cathode fan assembly by removing the five indicated screws (reference 6).

370

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-14
Cathode fan disassembling unit

6. Fasten the two plates upon the new cathode fan with five screws (reference 6). Provide the four screws in the center with a
washer (reference 7). Note that the wire unit of the fan must be guided trough the hole of the lower plate.

Image 22-15
Assembling the unit

7. Install the fan assembly back in its compartment with five screws (reference 8). Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.
Caution: Make sure that the wire unit of the fan does not get jammed.

Image 22-16
Cathode fan assembly, mounting

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

371

22. Fan replacement procedures

8. Install the small side plate of the air channel with three screws (reference 9).

9
Image 22-17
Small side plate, mounting

9. Reconnect the wire unit of the cathode fan and hide the connector behind the plate.

Image 22-18
Cathode fan, power connection

10.Reinstall the left side panel of the lamp compartment with six screws (reference 10).

372

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

100

10

Image 22-19
Side panel lamp house, installation

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

373

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.5 Lamp anode fan

To access the anode fan, the light processor has to be removed. This procedure assumes that the light processor is already removed.

Necessary tools

2,5 mm Allen wrench.

3 mm Allen wrench.

5 mm Allen wrench.

Pair of pliers.

Universal pliers.

7 mm open-end wrench.

How to replace
1. Disconnect the anode fan (reference B), the fan (reference A) of the heat exchanger and the wire unit of the pump (reference C)
as illustrated. Use a set of pliers to cut the cable tie (reference D) which fasten the wire unit of the pump with the tubing.

B
A

D
C

Image 22-20
Electrical disconnection

2. Pull out the tube out of the tube fixation.

3. Release the two fixation screws of the heat exchanger assembly and pull out the assembly.

Image 22-21
Remove heat exchanger assembly

4. Remove the anode fan security guard and fan bezel by releasing the four hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1). Use
a 3 mm Allen wrench.

374

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-22
Remove fan security guard

5. Release the three indicated hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 2) and slide out the anode fan assembly. Use a 5 mm
Allen wrench.

2
2

Image 22-23
Remove fan assembly

6. Remove the fan from the fan house by releasing first the 11 small screws at the edge (reference 3) and then the 4 big screws in
the middle (reference 4) as illustrated. Use a 2,5 mm and a 3 mm Allen wrench.

4
5

Image 22-24
Remove fan

7. Install a new anode fan inside the fan house as follows:

a) Guide the wire unit of the anode fan through the holes in mounting plates.
b) Fasten the two mounting plates upon the fan with four hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 6) as illustrated. Provide
each screw with a washer (reference 7).
c) Close the anode fan house with 11 screws (reference 8).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

375

22. Fan replacement procedures

6

Image 22-25
Mount fan

8. Slide the anode fan assembly back in its compartment and secure with 3 big hexagon screws (reference 9). Use a 5 mm Allen
wrench.

9
9

Image 22-26
Insert fan assembly

9. Reinstall the anode fan bezel and security guard. Use a 3 mm Allen wrench to secure the four hexagon socket head cap screws
(reference 10).

10

Image 22-27
Mount fan security guard

10.Slide the heat exchanger assembly in its place and fasten the two fixation screws. Use a 2,5 mm Allen wrench.

376

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-28
Insert heat exchanger assembly

11. Insert the cooling fixation into the plate.

12.Reconnect the wire unit of the anode fan (reference B), the wire unit of the heat exchanger fan (reference A) and the wire unit of
the pump (reference C). Use a cable tie (reference D) to secure the wire unit of the pump with the tubing.

B
A

D
C

Image 22-29
Electrical connection

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

377

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.6 Heat exchanger fan

Preparations
1.

Remove the side cover, see "Removal of the side cover", page 97.

2.

Open the sealed compartment, see "Open the sealed compartment", page 101.

How to replace
1. Disconnect the fan (reference F) of the heat exchanger and the wire unit of the pump (reference P) as illustrated. Use a set of
pliers to cut the cable tie which fasten the wire unit of the pump with the tubing.

Image 22-30
Disconnection of hear exchanger fan

2. Pull out the tube out of the tube fixation.

Image 22-31

3. Release the two fixation screws of the heat exchanger assembly and pull out the assembly.

Image 22-32
Remove heat exchanger assembly

4. Remove the 4 fixation screws (1 to 4)

Take the fan protection grid and remove the fan.

378

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

2
1

3
4

Image 22-33
Fan removal

5. Place a new fan with the arrow indication pointing upwards on the heat exchanger assembly.
Place the fan protection grid on the fan.
Secure with the 4 fixation screws.

Image 22-34
Fan, mounting

6. Slide the heat exchanger assembly in its place and fasten the two fixation screws.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

379

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-35
Insert assembly

7. Insert the cooling fixation into the plate.

8. Reconnect the wire unit of the fan (reference F) and the wire unit of the pump (reference P). Use a cable tie (reference T) to
secure the wire unit of the pump with the tubing.

T
F
P

Image 22-36
Fan connection

9. Close the sealed compartment, see "Close the sealed compartment", page 102.
Reinstall the housing.

380

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.7 Cold mirror fan

Preparations
1.

Remove the covers to get access to the cold mirror fan.

2.

Remove the cover plat of the sealed compartment.

How to replace
1. Remove the cover of the Start Pulse Generator as illustrated. This cover is secured with 5 hexagon socket head cap screws.
Use a 3 mm Allen wrench.

Image 22-37
Remove SPG cover

2. Disconnect the fan wire (reference 1).

Tip:
Pull out the top filter for easy access to the fan wire connection.

Image 22-38
Electrical disconnection

3. Turn out the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws at the right side (reference 2).

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

381

22. Fan replacement procedures

Image 22-39
Remove cold mirror

4. Remove both nuts at the left side (reference 3).

Support the assembly while removing the nuts.
5. Slide out the cold mirror assembly.
6. Turn out the 4 fixation screws (reference 1).
Take off the fan protection grid (reference 2) and remove the fan (reference 3.

Image 22-40

7. Place new fan on the assembly with the arrow pointing to downwards.
8. Place the protection grid on the fan and drive in the 4 fixation screws.
9. Re-install the cold mirror assembly.

382

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.8 Lamp Info Module fan

To access the Lamp Info Module fan the lamp cover has to be removed. This procedure assumes that the lamp
cover is already removed.

Necessary tools
3 mm Allen wrench.

How to replace the fan of the Lamp Info module?

1. Disconnect the wire unit (reference C) of the fan (reference FL).

C
FL

Image 22-41

2. Remove the fan from the projector by releasing the two hexagon socket head cap screws (reference 1). Use a 3 mm Allen
wrench.

Image 22-42

3. Install a new fan as illustrated in image 22-42. Use a 3 mm Allen wrench to fasten the two hexagon socket head cap screws.
4. Reconnect the wire unit of the fan.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

383

22. Fan replacement procedures

22.9 Integrated cinema processor fan

Preparations
First remove the following parts to get access to the fan.
1.

Input cover and top cover, see Removal and Installation of the projector covers.

2.

Remove the fan controller board, see "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.

3.

Remove the button unit, see "Removing the button unit", page 265.

How to replace
1. Disconnect the fan power cable from the backplane.

Image 22-43
Fan connection

2. To work handy it is recommended to slide out the intermediary plate a little bit. To it as follow:
a) cut the necessary wire ties.
b) turning out both fixation screws.
c) sliding the plate backwards.

Image 22-44
Fan removal

3. Slide the cable through the hole in the intermediary plate.

4. Turn out the 4 fixation screws (reference 1).
5. Take off the fan.
6. Mount a new fan with the arrow indication pointing to the plate and drive in the 4 fixation screws.
7. Push the power cable through the hole in the plate.
8. Slide the intermediary plate back on its place and drive in both fixation screws.
9. Connect the power cable to the backplane. Secure the wires units with a few wire ties.

384

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

23. Maintenance procedures

23. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

About this chapter
This chapter describes how to clean the exterior of the projector and how to clean or replace the dust filters.

Overview

Cleaning the exterior of the projector

Removing the front dust filter

Clean the dust filter on the bottom side

Clean the dust filter on the top side

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

385

23. Maintenance procedures

23.1 Cleaning the exterior of the projector

How to clean the exterior of the projector ?
1. Switch off the projector and unplug the projector from the mains power net.
2. Clean the housing of the projector with a damp cloth. Stubborn stains may be removed with a cloth lightly dampened with a mild
detergent solution.

386

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

23. Maintenance procedures

23.2 Removing the front dust filter

The front filter of the projector can be removed from the lamp side.

The filter can be cleaned.

Remove the dust filter

1. Remove the input cover of the projector, "Removal of the input cover", page 95.
2. Release the captive screw of the front cover.
Pull the left side of the front cover 5 centimeters forwards. There is no need to remove the cover completely.

Image 23-1
Dust filter access

3. Pull the small handle a little backwards and then to the front of the projector until the filter frame is released.
4. Slide the filter to the left.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

387

23. Maintenance procedures

Image 23-2
Dust filter removal

Clean the dust filter

1. Remove most contamination with a vacuum cleaner in an other room or outside.
2. Blow remaining dust away with compressed air in an other room or outside.

Mount the dust filter

1. Insert the dust filter with the handle to the projector side.
2. Pull the handle a little backward, push the filter completely in. Release the handle so that it jumps in its lock.

388

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

23. Maintenance procedures

23.3 Clean the dust filter on the bottom side

Remove the dust filter
1. Remove the side cover, see "Removal of the side cover", page 97.
2. Release the dust filter by pushing the handle a little bit downwards.

Image 23-3
Bottom dust filter

3. Pull out the dust filter.

Clean the dust filter

1. Remove most contamination with a vacuum cleaner.
2. Blow remaining dust away with compressed air in an other room or outside.

Mount the dust filter

1. Insert the dust filter with the locking lip facing up.
2. Push the handle a little downwards and insert the filter completely. Release the handle so that it jumps in to its lock.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

389

23. Maintenance procedures

23.4 Clean the dust filter on the top side

Remove the dust filter
1. Remove the side cover, see "Removal of the side cover", page 97.
2. Pull out the dust filter.

Image 23-4
Top dust filter

Clean the dust filter

1. Remove most contamination with a vacuum cleaner in an other room or outside.
2. Blow remaining dust away with compressed air in an other room or outside.

Mount the dust filter

1. Insert the dust filter and push on it until it is fully inserted.

390

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24. PROJECTOR CLEANING PROCEDURE

Overview

Purpose

Necessary tools, products and tips

Optical path

Non optical components

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

391

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.1 Purpose
Purpose of projector cleaning
Projectors are not used in 100% ideal circumstances and due to that they might get contaminated by particles in the environment
air. Due to this contamination the light output can be reduced or overheating may occur which may also lead to a projector shutdown
during operation.
To keep the projector in a good shape, it is advised to clean the projector as suggested in the preventive maintenance section. Dust
filter cleaning, cover cleaning and projection lens cleaning can be done by the operator of the projector. The inside cleaning of the
light path must be done by a trained and certified service engineer.

392

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.2 Necessary tools, products and tips

Tools
Only the tools necessary to clean the projector are indicated here. Tools needed to disassemble or to get access are listed in the
replacement procedures which are included in the projectors service manual.

Any micro fiber lens cleaning cloth (e.g. Toraysee cloth(s) (R379058))

Vacuum cleaner

Brush

Clean cloth(s) (never use cloths that leave particles on the surfaces)

Products

Compressed air (spray)

Lens cleaner (e.g. Carl Zeiss cleaner or Purasol Optical or any water based lens cleaner)

Tips
Ensure there is sufficient light in the cleaning environment. If necessary, add extra lights.
To protect the optical coatings, limit the number of wipe movements. It is better to wipe off the dust with one good wipe movement
then with 10 soft wipe movements.
It is advised to use a lens cleaner in combination with a micro fiber lens cleaning cloth. These lens cleaners break the molecular
bonds that dust, dirt and grime that adhere to the surface so that cleaning is much easier. These lens cleaners can also remove
fingerprints without streaks.
Always use a clean cloth! If smears occur when cleaning optics, replace the cloth. Smears are the first indication of a dirty cloth.
Clean the light processor and light pipe in a dust free environment (best will be a clean room).
Make sure your booth environment corresponds with the environment specifications given in the projectors user and installation
manual.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

393

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.3 Optical path

Steps
1.

Optimize the Z-axis of the lamp for highest light output.

2.

Measure the light output of your projector before starting the cleaning procedure.

3.

Clean the complete optical path.

4.

Measure the light output again when the cleaning procedure is finished.

Write down all your results, remarks and time of measurement.

Measure always in the same environment conditions. Put your measuring device on a fixed position and always measure from this
position.
Do these measurements every time you perform an optical cleaning. Overtime you will have an overview and you will be able to
compare with previous measurements.
Consult the projectors service manual to see how to remove any optical part.
Before starting with the cleaning of the optical parts, first clean the outside covers of the projector.
We advise to measure the light output in every step, such as Z-axis alignment, cleaning the complete lamp
house, the cold mirror, the notch filter, rod inlet and prism outlet, projection lens and port hole window. At
least, make sure to measure the light output before you start and at the end of the complete cleaning procedure.

General cleaning procedure for optical parts

1.

Blow off dust with clean compressed air (or pressurized air cans6).

2.

Clean with lens cleaner liquid together with a clean micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to remove the dust and contamination. Use
big wipes.

3.

Use a dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to remove left liquid or stripes. Polish using small circles.

4.

If there are still fingerprints on the surface, wipe them off with lens cleaner together with a clean lens cleaning cloth. Polish
again with a dry one.

If there is a difference in cleaning a specific part, it is mentioned in the description of that specific part.

6. Pressurized air cans is not efficient if there is too much dust on the surface, the pressure is too low

394

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.3.1 Cleaning order
Overview
1. Outside lamp house
2. Reflector cleaning
3. UV blocker
4. Lamp house compartment
5. Cold mirror
6. Rod inlet
7. Notch filter
8. Light pipe cleaning
9. 3D color wheel (optional)
10.Prism outlet
11. Light processor compartment
12.Lens cleaning
13.Port hole

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

395

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.3.2 Cleaning procedure
Outside lamp house
1. Take the lamp house out of the projector. See "Removal of the lamp house", page 112.
2. Remove contamination with a vacuum cleaner and a brush.

Image 24-1

Reflector cleaning
1. Remove the lamp from the lamp house. See "Removal of the xenon lamp", page 114.
2. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.
To obtain the best result, it is best to use immediately a lens cleaner.

Image 24-2

Note:

Polishing the reflector is very important. It improves the light output significantly.

Or,
see "Cleaning the Reflector of the Lamp House", page 137.

CAUTION:

When reflector is cracked or damaged, replace with a new one.

UV blocker
1. Blow the excessive dust off with compressed air. Do this on both side.
2. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts to clean both sides, see page 394.

396

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

Image 24-3

Or,
see "Cleaning the UV blocker of the Lamp House", page 138
3. Reassemble the lamp house. See "Installation of the Xenon lamp", page 118.

CAUTION:

When the UV blocker is cracked or damaged, replace with a new one.

Lamp house compartment

1. Remove all dust from the complete compartment with a vacuum cleaner and a brush.

Image 24-4

Cold mirror
1. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.
Note: Do not push too hard to avoid a crack.

Image 24-5

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

397

24. Projector cleaning procedure

Or,
see "Cleaning the Cold Mirror", page 149.

Rod inlet
1. Consult the projectors service manual to remove the Light processor assembly out of the projector. See "Light Processor assembly", page 163 to find the necessary procedures.
If you do not want to clean other parts of the light processor assembly, then the rod inlet can be cleaned through the lamp house
compartment. Be careful not to touch or damage the cold mirror.
2. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.

Image 24-6
Cleaning without building out the light processor

CAUTION:

Image 24-7

Do not push too hard.

Notch filter
1. To access the notch filter, loosen both fixation screws and pull out the notch filter.

Image 24-8

2. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.
Note: Do not push too hard to avoid a crack.

398

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

Image 24-9

3. Reinsert the notch filter.

Note: Realignment of the notch filter is necessary, see "Adjusting the notch filter", page 185.

Light pipe cleaning

Light pipe cleaning is a dangerous action and should only be done when really necessary. Try first to clean all other optical parts
and measure the result. If the light output is not meeting the official specifications for 2D and 3D at this point swap the lamp. If the
improvement is not enough then try to improve the light output by cleaning the light pipe. Opening and cleaning the light pipe may
only be done by a trained service engineer and in a clean room.

CAUTION:

This action may only be done in a clean room.

How to clean the light pipe

1. Remove the Light processor assembly out of the projector. See "Light Processor assembly", page 163.
2. Disassemble the light pipe. See first part of procedure "Removal of the integrator rod", page 204.
3. Do not remove the lenses from their sockets and clean them while theyre still in their place. Clean as described in the general
cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.

Image 24-10

4. Clean outlet of the rod with clean dry lens cleaning cloth. Do not use liquid and do not push too hard.
Note: Do not remove the rod. The rod is a very sensitive part and the risk to break off small parts is very high.
5. Clean the folding mirror (2) and prism inlet (3) as described in the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.
Note: Do not push too hard to avoid a crack of the folding mirror.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

399

24. Projector cleaning procedure

2
3

Image 24-11

6. Close the light pipe.

3D color wheel (optional)

1. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.
2. While the projector is running, run a 3D macro so that the color wheel is down and then switch off the projector
Or,
Bring the 3D color wheel down by turning the axis of the stepper motor with a flat screw driver. (reference 2)
Turn the color wheel a little so that it is possible to clean other areas (reference 1).
Clean the 3D color wheel itself.
Note: Be careful not to push to hard on the color wheel as this is a very fragile and expensive thin glass.

Image 24-12

Image 24-13

400

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

3. When the color wheel was turned down manually, turn it fully back. When it was turned down by a macro, it will be automatically
turned back after deactivating the 3D macro.

Prism outlet
1. Follow the general cleaning procedure for optical parts, see page 394.

Image 24-14

Or,
see "Cleaning the Prism exit side", page 187.

Light processor compartment

1. Remove dust with a vacuum cleaner and brush.

Image 24-15

2. Clean the air inlet of the anode fan (1) and clean the complete compartment.
3. Remove the light sensor module, see "Replacement of the Light Sensor Module", page 182

Image 24-16

4. Clean the module on both sides.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

401

24. Projector cleaning procedure

5. Reinstall the light sensor module, follow the second part of the replacement procedure.
6. Mount the light processor assembly in its compartment and insert the lamp house.

Projector lens cleaning

1. Follow the procedure as given in "Cleaning the lens", page 242.

Port hole window

1. Clean the window of the port hole on both sides. Use a lens cleaner to clean. Commercial window cleaners can destroy the
anti-reflective coating of the window glass.

402

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.4 Non optical components

Overview

Card cage

External covers

Dust filters

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

403

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.4.1 Card cage
Air intake side
1. Remove the front dust filter and take off the front cover.

Image 24-17

2. Clean the metal mesh grid of the card cage fans and the fans itself with a vacuum cleaner and brush.
Warning: Do not blow with compressed air to avoid dust distribution inside the card cage.

Card cage
1. Remove the Light processor compartment top cover (also called convergence top cover).
2. Remove all the boards out of the card cage. See "Removing a board in the card cage", page 263.
Caution: Wear a wrist band which is connected to the ground while handling the electrostatic discharge sensitive parts.

Image 24-18

3. Remove the switched mode power supply. See "Replacement of the Switched Mode Power Supply", page 327.
4. Clean the mesh grid and fan grid inside the card cage with a vacuum cleaner and brush.
5. Clean the board compartment and SMPS compartment with a vacuum cleaner and brush.
6. Clean the boards with compressed air, but be careful not to damage components.
7. Reinsert all boards.
404

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

Cold mirror fan
1. Remove the cold mirror fan assembly. See "Cold mirror fan", page 381.
2. Remove dust with a vacuum cleaner and brush.
3. If not all dust is removed, take out the fan and blow off with compressed air.

Lamp power supply

1. Remove the LPS unit. See "Removal of a LPS module", page 342 to remove a single module or see "Removing the LPS module",
page 333 to remove a first generation LPS unit.
2. Clean the fans and the cabinet of the LPS unit with a vacuum cleaner and brush.
3. Reinstall the LPS unit.

Heat exchanger
1. Remove the heat exchanger assembly. See first part of procedure "Heat exchanger fan", page 378
2. Clean the heat exchanger and the heat exchanger fan with a vacuum cleaner and brush and/or compressed air.
3. Reinsert the assembly.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

405

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.4.2 External covers
How to clean
1. Switch off the projector and unplug the projector from the mains power net.
2. Clean the housing of the projector with a damp cloth. Stubborn stains may be removed with a cloth lightly dampened with a mild
detergent solution.

406

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

24. Projector cleaning procedure

24.4.3 Dust filters
How to clean
For a complete explanation on how to clean the dust filters, see chapter "Maintenance procedures", page 385 and look for the dust
filter topics.

To clean sticky, greasy metal mesh filters

In some conditions the metal mesh filters on the projectors are sticky and are getting clogged by dust and grease. Because of the
grease the cleaning methods with a vacuum cleaner or compressed air is no longer sufficient.
To clean sticky, greasy metal mesh filters we suggest usage of Sodium carbonate crystals. Sodium carbonate (Often called washing soda, soda crystals, or sal soda in the detergent section of stores) is widely used to effectively remove oil, grease, alcohol
stains The product itself is relatively safe, sodium carbonate is used in toothpastes and as a food additive (E500). Potential
Hazards are described below.

Image 24-19
Sodium carbonate crystals.

How to clean metal mesh filters?

1. Make a solution with a ratio of 30 gram (a handful) sodium carbonate to 1 liter hot water.
2. Soak the metal mesh filters in the solution for 30 to 60 minutes. The grease should be dissolved after 1 hour.
3. If there is still grease present after that 1 hour remove it by gently wiping off the grease from the metal mesh filter. Use a soft
brush or cloth.
Caution: Do not damage the metal mesh filter while wiping off the grease!
4. If the metal mesh filter is still clogged repeat this procedure from step 1.
5. Rinse the metal mesh filter with clean water to flush all grease residue away.
6. Dry the metal mesh filter with compressed air. Ensure that the metal mesh filter is clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not install/use damaged metal mesh filters. Replace damaged metal mesh filters immediately
with new metal mesh filters of the same type. See https://my.barco.com for replacement parts.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

407

24. Projector cleaning procedure

Cleaning illustration

}
}

Uncleaned part
(sticky, greasy)

Cleaned part by
soaking in Sodium Carbonate

Image 24-20

Hazards, Safety notice

According to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), Sodium Carbonate could cause the following hazards:

Potential Acute Health Effects: Hazardous in case of skin contact (irritant), of eye contact (irritant), of ingestion, of inhalation
(lung irritant).

Potential Chronic Health Effects: Slightly hazardous in case of skin contact (sensitizer). The substance may be toxic to upper
respiratory tract, skin, eyes. Repeated or prolonged exposure to the substance can produce target organ damage.

More info about the product can be found on website of unep or the link below:
http://www.chem.unep.ch/irptc/sids/oecdsids/Naco.pdf

408

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

A. Pin configurations

A. PIN CONFIGURATIONS
Overview

About General Purpose Inputs & Outputs (GPIO)

Pin configurations of the communication ports

Pin configurations of the ICMP communication ports

Pin configurations of the inputs

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

409

A. Pin configurations

A.1

About General Purpose Inputs & Outputs (GPIO)

The Barco Cinema Controller and the Barco ICMP are equipped with GPIO ports. The electrical specifications
described in this chapter are the same for both GPIO ports.

General Purpose inputs

The Barco Cinema Controller and the Barco ICMP have each eight (8) opto-isolated general purpose inputs available. These inputs
are used to trigger the execution of macro files. For more explanation about the association of a macro to a GPI, consult the user
guide of the Communicator.

Input voltage
The inputs can be directly driven from a TTL or CMOS output.

The shape of the pulse must be rectangular.

The duration of the pulse must be at least 50 milliseconds (shorter pulses are considered as a switch bounce)

Minimum voltage : V min = 3,3 V

Maximum voltage : V max = 24 V

External power supply

When interfacing with contact closure outputs, an external power supply needs to be provided. Depending upon the configuration a
suitable pull-up resistor needs to be added as well.

Input to projector

Internal projector
GPIn P

+5V
to
+24V

Input to projector

GPIn P

820R
10k

1k1

4.7V

Internal projector

+5V
to
+24V

GPIn N

820R
10k

1k1

4.7V

GPIn N

Image A-1

Cables
When long cable connections are required the use of shielded cables with twisted pairs is recommended. One twisted pair is to be
assigned to each GP Input pair.

How to make the connection

When the power supply used to provide the DC voltage is isolated from ground (for example in the case of an AC adapter) it is
recommended that the minus pole of that power supply is connected to ground (or to the projector chassis). This will avoid high
common mode voltages at the projector GP Inputs. If that same power supply is used for other parts of the system, take care not to
create ground loops. In any case when shielded cables are used that shield should be connected to the projector chassis.

General Purpose outputs

The Barco Cinema Controller and the Barco ICMP have each eight (8) opto-isolated outputs available. Four (4) of the outputs on
the Cinema Controller are dedicated for TI. The other general purpose outputs can be controlled via software.

About an output
The output can generate a falling edge, rising edge, toggle or continuous toggle.

410

Generate Falling Edge generate a falling edge on the external GPO port if the present state of the output is high. If the
present state of the external GPO is low, no edge will be generated.

Generate Rising Edge generate a rising edge on the external GPO port if the present state of the output is low. If the present
state of the external GPO is high, no edge will be generated.

Generate Toggle generate a toggle on the external GPO port. If the present state of the output is low, a rising edge will be
generated, followed by a falling edge. If the present state of the output is high, a falling edge will be generated, followed by a
rising edge. Pulse width = 20 milliseconds.

Generate Continuous Toggle - This command will generate a continuous toggle of the external GPO port. This toggle will
continue until a Generate Falling Edge, Generate Rising Edge, or Generate Toggle command is received. The rate of toggle is
24Hz. .

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

A. Pin configurations
Output transistor

Maximum output driving voltage : V max = 70 V

Maximum current : I max = 30 mA

Maximum power dissipation : 120 mW

Output from projector

VAC

V....Vmax
V....

V+
R

Internal projector
GPOut P

Max 120 mW
GPOut N

Image A-2

When the GPO driver inside the projector becomes powerless the GPO state changes to the default state.
The default GPO state depends on the external system connected with the GPO port (pull-up or pull-down
circuitry).

GPIO and projector Sleep mode

In case the projector is equipped with a Sleep mode (e.g. DP2K S series): Enter or leave Sleep mode can be done with GPIO of
the Cinema Controller via two predefined Macros (not editable). Not with the GPIO of the ICMP.
The GPO signals of the ICMP will return to their default output level when the projector is switched to Sleep mode. This could
generate unexpected "Falling Edge" triggers at the output pins. Also when awakening the projector (from Sleep mode to Standby
mode) the GPO signals of the ICMP may generate unexpected "Rising Edge" events.

GPO and projector switching On or Off

The GPO signals of the Cinema Controller and ICMP will return to their default output level when the projector is switched to poweroff. This could generate unexpected "Falling Edge" triggers at the output pins. Also during power-on the GPO signals may generate
unexpected "Rising Edge" events.

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

411

A. Pin configurations

A.2

Pin configurations of the communication ports

RS232IN
RS232 IN
1

2 RXE-

Receive Data (RD or RX or RXD)

3 TXE-

Transmitted Data (TD or TX or TXD)

5 GND

Signal Ground (GND)

General Purpose IN/OUT

General Purpose In/Out
1

3D Input Reference P

20

3D Input Reference N

3D Display Reference P

21

3D Display Reference N

GPIN 3 P (reserved)

22

GPIN 3 N (reserved)

GPIN 4 P (reserved)

23

GPIN 4 N (reserved)

GPIN 5 P

24

GPIN 5 N

GPIN 6 P

25

GPIN 6 N

GPIN 7 P

26

GPIN 7 N

GPIN 8 P

27

GPIN 8 N

3D Output Reference P

28

3D Output Reference N

10

GPOUT 2 P (reserved)

29

GPOUT 2 N (reserved)

11

GPOUT 3 P (reserved)

30

GPOUT 3 N (reserved)

12

GPOUT 4 P

31

GPOUT 4 N

13

GPOUT 5 P

32

GPOUT 5 N

14

GPOUT 6 P

33

GPOUT 6 N

15

GPOUT 7 P

34

GPOUT 7 N

16

GPOUT 8 P

35

GPOUT 8 N

17

reserved

36

reserved

18

reserved

37

reserved

19

reserved

Ethernet port
10/100 Base-T RJ45 port

1000 Base-T RJ45 port

Pin

Pair

Color

Description

Description

white/green

TXD+

TX0+

green

TXD-

TX0-

white/orange

RXD+

RX0+

blue

TX1+
TX1-

white/blue

orange

RXD-

RX0-

white/brown

Rx1+

brown

RX1-

Peripheral Port

412

Pin

Name

+5V

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

A. Pin configurations
Pin

Name

SCL

SDA

+24V

GND

3D connector
Pin

Name

Pin

Name

+12V

+12V

Grnd

10

3D Input Reference -

Grnd

11

3D Display Reference +

RS232 RX

12

3D Display Reference -

RS232 TX

13

CONN_3D MODE -

CONN_3D_MODE +

14

CONN_SYNC -

CONN_SYNC +

15

3D Input Reference +

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

413

A. Pin configurations

A.3

Pin configurations of the ICMP communication ports

RJ-45 pin configuration
P8

P1

Image A-3

Audio Channels:
AUDIO-AES 1-8
Audio channel

AES pair

RJ-45 pin

1, 2

1 +

1 -

3, 4

5, 6

7, 8

2 +

2 -

3 +

3 -

4 +

4 -

AUDIO-AES 9-16
Audio channel

AES pair

RJ-45 pin

9, 10

5 +

5 -

11, 12

13, 14

15, 16

6 +

6 -

7 +

7 -

8 +

8 -

General Purpose Output:

GPO 1-4
Definition

RJ-45 pin

EXT_GPOUT_1_P

EXT_GPOUT_1_N

EXT_GPOUT_2_P

EXT_GPOUT_2_N

EXT_GPOUT_3_P

EXT_GPOUT_3_N

EXT_GPOUT_4_P

EXT_GPOUT_4_N

8
GPO 5-8

414

Definition

RJ-45 pin

EXT_GPOUT_5_P

EXT_GPOUT_5_N

2
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

A. Pin configurations
GPO 5-8
Definition

RJ-45 pin

EXT_GPOUT_6_P

EXT_GPOUT_6_N

EXT_GPOUT_7_P

EXT_GPOUT_7_N

EXT_GPOUT_8_P

EXT_GPOUT_8_N

General Purpose Input:

GPI 1-4
Definition

RJ-45 pin

EXT_GPIN_1_P

EXT_GPIN_1_N

EXT_GPIN_2_P

EXT_GPIN_2_N

EXT_GPIN_3_P

EXT_GPIN_3_N

EXT_GPIN_4_P

EXT_GPIN_4_N

8
GPI 5-8

Definition

RJ-45 pin

EXT_GPIN_5_P

EXT_GPIN_5_N

EXT_GPIN_6_P

EXT_GPIN_6_N

EXT_GPIN_7_P

EXT_GPIN_7_N

EXT_GPIN_8_P

EXT_GPIN_8_N

About 568A and 568B on an Ethernet connector RJ-45

TIA/EIA-568A and -568B are two standards for connecting Category 3 and Category 5 wire to connectors. Both are appropriate for
high speed data, though 568B is somewhat more common for installed wiring and 568A is more common in jumpers. There is no
performance advantage either way. The only real difference between the two is the order in which the pairs are used (orange and
green).
Hold a cable as if to plug it into a wall jack, the locking tab down (contacts facing you). The contacts are numbered 1-8 from left to
right. Heres what you will see:
RJ-45 Pin Number

568A

568B

AES -1-8

(Left >Right copper

side)
1

White/Green

Green

White/Orange

Blue

White/Blue

Orange

White/Brown

Brown

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown

AES 1&2 +plus

AES 1&2 +minus
AES 3&4 +plus
AES 5&6 +minus
AES 5&6 +plus
AES 3&4 +minus
AES 7&8 +plus
AES 7&8 +minus
415

A. Pin configurations
568A and 568B may be used interchangeably in a system SO LONG AS both ends of a given cable are terminated the same way.
568A + 568B wiring is a crossover cable.
568A + 568A wiring is a straight cable.
568B + 568B wiring is a straight cable.
The mapping of the channels is done according to the Ethernet wiring scheme and gives us 100 Ohm per pair.

416

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

A. Pin configurations

A.4

Pin configurations of the inputs

DVI-D
DVI IN A & B
1

RX2-

DDC Data

13

nc

19

RX0 Shield

14

+5V

20

nc

RX2+

nc

RX2 Shield

RX1-

15

GND

21

nc

nc

10

RX1+

16

Hot Plug Detect

22

TMDS Clock Shield

nc

11

RX1 Shield

17

RX0-

23

TMDS RXC+

12

nc

18

RX0+

24

TMDS RXC-

DDC Clock

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

417

A. Pin configurations

418

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

B. Input formats

B. INPUT FORMATS

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

419

B. Input formats

420

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

B. Input formats

B.1

Input formats
DVI Input formats
Input

Scan type

Color space

Sampling

Color depth

Single DVI

Vertical rate
Source
standard
VESA (640x480) 60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

VESA (640x480) 72

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

VESA (800x600) 60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

VESA (800x600) 72

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

70

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

VESA
(1024x768)
VESA
(1024x768)
VESA
(1280x1024)
1280x720

60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

1920x1080

60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

2048x1080

50/60

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Single DVI

1920x1080i

50/60

Interlaced

RGB

4:4:4

8 bit

Twin DVI

ACS
(2048x1080)
ACS
(2048x1080)

50/59.94

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

10 bit

50/59.94

Progressive

RGB

4:4:4

12 bit

Single DVI
Single DVI

Twin DVI

SMPTE 274M
System
no

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

System
Luma or RGB
nomenclature samples per
active line
(S/AL)
1920 x
1920
1080/60/I
1920 x
1920
1080/59.94/I
1920 x
1920
1080/50/I
1920 x
1920
1080/30P
1920 x
1920
1080/29.97/P
1920 x
1920
1080/25/P
1920 x
1920
1080/24/P
1920 x
1920
1080/23.98/P

Total lines per

frame

30

Interface
sampling
frequency fs
(MHz)
74.25

Luma sample
periods per
total line
(S/TL)
2200

1125

1080

30/1.001

75.25/1.001

2200

1125

1080

50

74.25

2640

1125

1080

30

74.25

2200

1125

1080

30/1.001

74.25/1.001

2200

1125

1080

25

74.25

2640

1125

1080

24

74.25

2750

1125

1080

24/1.001

74.25/1.001

2750

1125

Active lines
per frame
(AL/F)

Frame rate
(Hz)

60

Luma sample
periods per
total line
(S/TL)
1650

Total lines per

frame

720

Interface
sampling
frequency fs
(MHz)
74.25

750

Active lines
per frame
(AL/F)

Frame rate
(Hz)

1080

SMPTE 296M
System
no

1
2

System
Luma or RGB
nomenclature samples per
active line
(S/AL)
1280 x 720/60 1280
1280

720

60/1.001

74.25/1.001

1650

750

1280 x
720/59.94
1280 x 720/50

1280

720

50

74.25

1980

750

1280 x 730/30

1280

720

30

74.25

3300

750

1280 x
720/29.97
1280 x 720/25

1280

720

30/1.001

74.25/1.001

3300

750

1280

720

25

74.25

3960

750

1280 x 720/24

1280

720

24

74.25

4125

750

1280 x
720/23.98

1280

720

24/1.001

74.25/1.001

4125

750

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

421

B. Input formats
SMPTE 260M
The system nomenclature for SMPTE 260M is 1920 x 1035 (1035 active lines) constrained to 60/60/1.001. All other parameters are
the same as for SMPTE 274M.

422

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

C. Specifications

C. SPECIFICATIONS

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

423

C. Specifications

424

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

C. Specifications

C.1

Specifications of the DP2K-15C

Overview
Digital MicroMirror Device

3 x 0.98 DC2K dark metal devices

Native resolution

2,048 x 1,080 pixels

Housing

Hermetically sealed DMDs and optical assembly

Lamp

1.2kW - 3kW

Light output

14,500 lumens

Screen size

Up to 15m / 49ft wide (screen gain 1.4 @ 14 ftl)

Contrast ratio

2,000:1

Digital Video Inputs

2 x DVI input
both selectable as single and dual link

Prime lenses

1.2 - 1.8
1.4 - 2.05
1.6 - 2.5
1.95 - 3.2
2.4 - 3.9

Projector diagnostics

via PC touch panel

via Communicator control software
via SNMP agent

Power requirements

220V

Dimensions

558(H) x 694(W) x 1034(D) mm

22.0(H) x 27.3(W) x 40.7(D) inch
NB.: min. 5 cm of air inlet spacing required at the bottom of projector

Weight

102kg (225lbs)

Ambient temperature

35C / 95F Max.

Options

ACS-2048
3D add-ons
Touch panel
Pedestal

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

425

C. Specifications

C.2

Specifications of the DP2K-20C

Overview
Digital MicroMirror Device

3 x 0.98 DC2K dark metal devices

Native resolution

2,048 x 1,080 pixels

Housing

Hermetically sealed DMDs and optical assembly

Lamp

1.2kW - 4kW

Light output

18,500 lumens

Screen size

Up to 20m / 65ft wide (screen gain 1.8 @ 14ftl)

Contrast ratio

2,000:1

Digital Video Inputs

2 x DVI input
both selectable as single and dual link

Prime lenses

1.2 - 1.8
1.4 - 2.05
1.6 - 2.5
1.95 - 3.2
2.4 - 3.9

Projector diagnostics

via PC touch panel

via Communicator control software
via SNMP agent

Power requirements

220V

Dimensions

558(H) x 694(W) x 1034(D) mm

22.0(H) x 27.3(W) x 40.7(D) inch
NB.: min. 5 cm of air inlet spacing required at the bottom of projector

Weight

102kg (225lbs)

Ambient temperature

35C / 95F Max.

Options

ACS-2048
3D add-ons
Touch panel
Pedestal

426

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Index

INDEX
Numerics/Symbols
3D color wheel 151, 153, 157, 161, 400
Cleaning 400
Finalize procedure 161
Parts locations 153
Unpacking 157

A
Access 315
Mains 315
Adjust 147
Cold mirror 147
Authorization 291
Security warning 291
Clear 291
Available 236
Lenses 236
Types 236

B
Block diagrams 16
Board insertion 264
Card cage 264
Board removal 263
Card cage 263
Button module 269
Button unit 265, 268, 277
Installation 268
Remove 265
Signal back plane 277
Replace 277

C
Card cage 258261, 263264, 404
Cinema controller 261
Cleaning 404
Fan controller 258
HD-SDI 260
ICP 259
Insert board 264
Link decryptor 260
Remove board 263
Card Cage 257
Cinema controller 261
Clean 137138, 149, 187, 226
Cold Mirror 149
Prism 187
Pump 226
Reflector 137
UV blocker 138
Clean dust filter 387, 389390
Bottom side 389
Front side 387
Top side 390
Cleaning 242, 386, 391398, 400404, 406407
Card cage 404
Dust filters 407
Exterior 386
External covers 406
Lamp house 396
Reflector 396
UV blocker 396
Lens 242, 402
Light processor 401
Compartment 401
Non optical components 403
Optical path 395, 397398, 400401
3D color wheel 400
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Cleaning order 395

Cold mirror 397
Compartment 397
Notch filter 398
Prism outlet 401
Rod inlet 398
Outside lamp house 396
Port hole 402
Procedure 396
Products 393
Projector 391, 394
Optical path 394
Purpose 392
Tips 393
Tools 393
Close 102, 321
Mains Input 321
Sealed compartment 102
Cold mirror 139141, 145, 147, 381
Adjust 147
Diagnostic 140
Fan 381
Functionality 140
Installation 145
Introduction 140
Removal 141
Cold Mirror 143, 149
Clean 149
Replace 143
Communicator 307
Convention 10
Orientation 10
Convergence 193197, 199
Controls 194
Green on Blue 199
Prepare 196
Red on Blue 197
Test pattern 195
Cooling liquid 214215
Level 214
Check 214
Refill 215
Covers 93
Installation 93
Removal 93

D
DC update companion 294
Launch 294
Diagnostic 166
Light Processor 166
Dowser 180
Dust filter 387, 389390
Bottom side 389
Clean 389
Front side 387
Clean 387
Top side 390
Clean 390

E
Electrical disconnection 168
Light processor assembly 168
Error code name 3067, 69, 7189
++12v - voltage high 87
++12v - voltage low 87
+24v - voltage high 86
+24v - voltage low 87
+24v - voltage too low 86
3d module - change status failed due to communication error

73
427

Index
3d module - change status failed due to dolby 3d key-server
lock 73
3d module - color wheel in failed 74
3d module - color wheel out failed 75
3d module - color wheel speed not ok (not locked) 75
3d module - color wheel spin failed 74
3d module - color wheel temperature too high 75
3d module - read status failed 73
5043 33
ambient - temperature high 43
ambient - temperature sensor open 44
ambient - temperature sensor short 44
ambient - temperature too high 43
block blue - temperature high 85
block blue - temperature sensor open 85
block blue - temperature sensor short 86
block blue - temperature too high 85
block front - temperature high 81
block front - temperature sensor open 82
block front - temperature sensor short 82
block front - temperature too high 81
block green - temperature high 84
block green - temperature sensor open 84
block green - temperature sensor short 85
block green - temperature too high 84
block red - temperature high 82
block red - temperature sensor open 83
block red - temperature too high 82
block red- temperature sensor short 83
cold mirror fan - speed too low 33
cold mirror fan - voltage high 52
cold mirror fan - voltage low 52
cold mirror fan - voltage too low 52
dmd - temperature hardware protection warning 86
dmd blue - temperature high 44
dmd blue - temperature low 45
dmd blue - temperature sensor open 45
dmd blue - temperature sensor short 46
dmd blue - temperature too high 44
dmd blue front - temperature high 80
dmd blue front - temperature low 80
dmd blue front - temperature sensor open 80
dmd blue front - temperature sensor short 81
dmd blue front - temperature too high 80
dmd green - temperature high 46
dmd green - temperature low 47
dmd green - temperature sensor open 47
dmd green - temperature sensor short 47
dmd green - temperature too high 46
dmd green front - temperature high 79
dmd green front - temperature low 79
dmd green front - temperature sensor open 79
dmd green front - temperature sensor short 79
dmd green front - temperature too high 78
dmd red - temperature high 49
dmd red - temperature low 50
dmd red - temperature sensor open 50
dmd red - temperature sensor short 51
dmd red - temperature too high 49
dmd red front - temperature high 77
dmd red front - temperature low 78
dmd red front - temperature sensor open 78
dmd red front - temperature sensor short 78
dmd red front - temperature too high 77
dolby 3d key-server - read status failed 73
dolby 3d key-server - status = locked 73
dowser - set dowser open failed 64
electronics fan 1 (top side) - speed low 37
electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage high 59
electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage low 60
electronics fan 1 (top side) - voltage too low 59
electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - speed low 38
electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage high 60
electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage low 61
electronics fan 2 (bottom side) - voltage too low 60
engine fan - speed low 33
428

engine fan - voltage high 53

engine fan - voltage low 53
engine fan - voltage too low 53
engine switch - not ok 38
fcb - force lps/lamp off (overtemperature, lamp house not
connected or engine not connected) 49
heat exchanger fan - speed low 34
heat exchanger fan - voltage high 54
heat exchanger fan - voltage low 54
heat exchanger fan - voltage too low 54
icp fan - speed low 87
icp fan - voltage high 88
icp fan - voltage low 88
imb - logical marriage tamper event 72
imb - no communication 72
imb - physical marriage tamper event 72
imb - service door tamper event 72
lamp - lamp is off due to an error 64
lamp - no communication 30
lamp - set lamp on failed 64
lamp - temperature high 47
lamp - temperature sensor open 48
lamp - temperature sensor short 49
lamp - temperature too high 47
lamp anode fan - speed low 35
lamp anode fan - speed too low 34
lamp anode fan - voltage high 55
lamp anode fan - voltage low 55
lamp anode fan - voltage too low 55
lamp cathode fan - speed low 36
lamp cathode fan - speed too low 35
lamp cathode fan - voltage high 56
lamp cathode fan - voltage low 56
lamp cathode fan - voltage too low 56
lamp house - not connected 38
lamp power supplies - at least one lamp power supply could not
be detected 62
lamp power supplies - communication failed 31
lamp power supplies - communication failed with at least one
lamp power supply 63
lamp power supplies - lamp is on, but at least one lamp power
supply is off 63
lamp power supplies - lamp is on, but smps is off 62
lamp power supplies - zero lamp power supplies detected 61
lamp rear fan - speed low 37
lamp rear fan - voltage high 59
lamp rear fan - voltage low 59
lamp rear fan - voltage too low 59
lamp run time - exceeds maximum 64
lamp run time - read failed 64
lamp run time - read limits failed 64
lamp run time - warning 64
lens - no lens parameter file has been activated 89
lens focus position - requested target not reached 41
lens horizontal shift position - requested target not reached 42
lens motors - voltage too low 87
lens vertical shift position - requested target not reached 42
lens zoom position - requested target not reached 40
light pipe - temperature high 75
light pipe - temperature sensor open 76
light pipe - temperature sensor short 77
light pipe - temperature too high 75
light sensor - no communication 30
maintenance - maintenance required 88
pfc heatsink - temperature high 49
prism switch - warning (lens probably touches prism) 39
pump - refill mode is on 32
pump - speed low 40
pump - speed too low 40
pump - voltage high 57
pump - voltage low 58
pump - voltage too low 57
smps fan - voltage high 57
smps fan - voltage low 57
smps fan - voltage too low 57
smps fan 1 (left side) - speed low 36
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Index
smps fan 2(right side) - speed low 36
smps primary heatsink - temperature high 51
smps secondary heatsink - temperature high 51
smps secondary heatsink - temperature sensor open 52
smps secondary heatsink - temperature sensor short 52
system - read projector identification failed 32
tec - voltage high 58
tec - voltage low 58
ti-boards - system status = fail 65
ti-icp - certificate error 69
ti-icp - icp board not detected 69
ti-icp - key error 69
ti-icp - read satellite info failed 67
ti-icp - read system status failed 66
ti-icp - satellite firmware mismatch 67
ti-icp - self test = fail 69
ti-link-decryptor - logical marriage tamper event 71
ti-link-decryptor - no communication 69
ti-link-decryptor - physical marriage tamper event 71
ti-link-decryptor - read system status failed 72
ti-link-decryptor - security log almost full 71
ti-link-decryptor - security log is full 72
ti-link-decryptor - security tamper event 71
ti-link-decryptor - service door tamper event 66
ti-link-decryptor - system error 69
Error code number 3067, 69, 7189
5003 30
5004 30
5005 31
5010 32
5020 32
5042 33
5053 33
5063 34
5072 34
5073 35
5082 35
5083 36
5103 36
5113 36
5123 37
5143 37
5153 38
5160 38
5180 38
5191 39
5212 40
5213 40
5230 40
5231 41
5232 42
5233 42
5280 43
5281 43
5284 44
5285 44
5290 44
5291 44
5293 45
5294 45
5295 46
5300 46
5301 46
5303 47
5304 47
5305 47
5310 47
5311 47
5314 48
5315 49
5320 49
5331 49
5340 49
5341 49
5343 50
5344 50
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

5345
5351
5361
5364
5365
5431
5432
5433
5441
5442
5443
5451
5452
5453
5461
5462
5463
5471
5472
5473
5491
5492
5493
5531
5532
5533
5551
5553
5571
5572
5573
5611
5621
5622
5623
5632
5633
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5646
5647
5654
5657
5658
5659
5670
5800
5801
5807
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5850
5851
5853
5854
5880
5881
5882
5884
5885
5890

51
51
51
52
52
52
52
52
53
53
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
59
59
59
60
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
65
66
66
67
67
69
69
69
69
69
69
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
72
72
73
73
73
73
73
74
429

Index
5891 74
5892 75
5893 75
5894 75
5960 75
5961 75
5964 76
5965 77
5970 77
5971 77
5973 78
5974 78
5975 78
5980 78
5981 79
5983 79
5984 79
5985 79
5990 80
5991 80
5993 80
5994 80
5995 81
6000 81
6001 81
6004 82
6005 82
6010 82
6011 82
6014 83
6015 83
6020 84
6021 84
6024 84
6025 85
6030 85
6031 85
6034 85
6035 86
6050 86
6061 86
6062 86
6063 87
6071 87
6073 87
6082 87
6123 87
6131 88
6133 88
6200 88
6210 89
cold mirror fan - speed low
Ethernet 261
Exterior 386
Cleaning 386
External covers 406
Cleaning 406

G
General 9
General Purpose I/O
GPIO 262, 410

H
HD-SDI board 260
Heat exchanger 222, 224, 378
Fan 378
Installation 224
Removal 222
Horizontal Shift 255
Stepper motor 255
Replace 255

I
ICMP software update 297
ICP board 259
ICP software update 301
Input cover 95, 107
Install 107
Remove 95
Input formats 419, 421
Install 103107, 131, 180, 232, 292, 310, 335
Dowser 180
Front cover 106
Input cover 107
LPS 335
Pump (complete) 232
Rear cover 104
Shutter 180
Side cover 105
Status Light 292
Top cover 103
Touch panel 310
UV blocker 131
Installation 358
SPG 358
Integration rod 202203, 207
Diagnostic 203
Installation 207
Introduction 202
Integrator rod 201, 204, 211
Adjust 211
Removal 204
Introduction 152, 330
LPS 330
33

F
Fan 362, 364, 366, 369, 374, 378, 381, 383384
Card cage fans 362
Cold mirror 381
ICP fan 384
Lamp anode fan 374
Lamp cathode 369
Lamp Info 383
Light processor compartment fan 366
SMPS fans 364
Fan controller 258
Fan replacements 361
Front cover 96, 106
Install 106
Remove 96

430

262, 410

K
Keypad

272, 276

L
Lamp 109110, 112, 118, 126127
Install 118
Introduction 110
Realignment 127
Remove 112
Reset 126
Lamp cathode 369
Fan 369
Lamp cover 94
Remove 94
Lamp house 109110, 112, 124, 134
Installation 124
Introduction 110
Reflector 134
Remove 112
Lamp House 137138
Reflector 137
Clean 137
R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Index
UV blocker 138
Clean 138
Lamp Info 383
Fan 383
Lamp info module 129
Replace 129
Lamp power supply 329
Lamp power supply (Single module) 339
Lens 239240, 242, 249, 402
Cleaning 242, 402
Install 240
Removal 239
Scheimpflug 249
Lens holder 235, 243, 246, 253
Installation 246
Remove 243
Vertical Shift 253
Stepper motor 253
lens selection 238
Lenses 235
Light processor 163164, 179, 182183, 185, 188, 190, 204, 207,
211
Finalize installation 179
Fold mirror 183
Integrator rod 204, 207, 211
Adjust 211
Installation 207
Removal 204
Introduction 164
Light Sensor module 182
Notch filter 185
Peltier element 190
Heat pipe cooling block 190
Peltier element DMD 188
Light Processor 166
Diagnostic 166
Light processor assembly 154, 156, 158, 167169, 171, 173, 177
3D color wheel 154, 158
Installation 158
Remove 154
Electrical connections 177
Electrical disconnection 168
Installation 173
Prepare new one 171
Removal 169
Rod cooling block 156
Remove 156
Top cover 167
Light processor cover 178
Installation 178
Link decryptor 260, 289
Replace 289
Link decryptor software update 304
Liquid cooling 217, 220
Draining 217
Filling 220
Liquid cooling circuit 213, 221222, 224
Excluding light processor 221
Heat exchanger 222, 224
Installation 224
Removal 222
Location 11
Main components 11
LPS 330331, 333, 335, 340, 342, 344, 348
Diagnostic 331, 340
Install 335
Installation 344
Introduction 330
Removal 342
Remove 333
Replace large by 2 single 348
LPS (Single module) 339

M
Main components

11

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015

Location 11
Mains filter 319
Replace 319
Maintenance 2325, 28, 294, 297, 301, 304, 306, 385
4 yearly 28
Annually 25
Lamp change 23
Software upgrade 294, 297, 301, 304, 306
ICMP software 297
ICP software 301
Launch DC update companion 294
Link decryptor 304
Log file 306
Projector software 297
Touch panel software 297
Three monthly 24
Maintenance actions 2122
Monthly 22

N
Notch filter 398
Cleaning 398

O
ON/OFF switch 317
Replace 317
Open 101
Sealed compartment
Optical path 394
Cleaning 394
Orientation 10
Convention 10

101

P
Parts location 153
3D color wheel 153
Pin configuration 412, 417
Communication ports 412
Inputs 417
Pin configurations 409, 414
ICMP 414
Port hole 402
Cleaning 402
Position 312
Touch panel 312
Power input 313314
Introduction 314
Prism 187
Clean 187
Prism outlet 401
Cleaning 401
Projector software update 297
Projector status light 15
About 15
Pump 226, 232
Clean 226
Replace 232
Pump motor 228
Pump rotor 228

R
Realignment 127
Lamp 127
Rear cover 98, 104
Install 104
Remove 98
Reflector 134, 137, 396
Clean 137
Cleaning 396
Replace 134
Remove 9499, 114, 180, 232, 292, 333, 356
431

Index
Dowser 180
Front cover 96
Input cover 95
Lamp cover 94
LPS 333
Pump (complete) 232
Rear cover 98
Shutter 180
Side cover 97
SPG 356
Status Light 292
Top cover 99
Xenon lamp 114
Replace 129, 134, 143, 180, 228, 232, 255, 292, 317, 319
Cold Mirror 143
Dowser 180
Horizontal Shift 255
Stepper motor 255
Lamp info module 129
Mains filter 319
ON/OFF switch 317
Pump (complete) 232
Pump motor 228
Pump rotor 228
Reflector 134
Shutter 180
Status Light 292
replacement 269, 272, 276
Reset 126
Lamp 126
Rod 203
Diagnostic 203
Rod inlet 398
Cleaning 398
RS232 262

S
Safety 56
Instructions 6
Scheimpflug 249
second generation Keypad 269, 272, 276
Serial communication 262
Shutter 180
Signal back plane 277
Replace 277
SMPS 325327
Diagnostics 326
Replacement 327
Software update 293, 297, 301, 304, 306
DC update companion 293
ICMP software 297
ICP software 301
Link decryptor 304
Log file 306
Projector software 297

432

Touch panel software 297

Via Communicator 293
Software upgrade 294
DC update companion 294
Launch 294
Spare part list 18
Specifications 423, 425426
DP2K-15C 425
DP2K-20C 426
SPG 354356, 358
Installation 358
Introduction 354
Remove 356
Troubleshooting 355
Start Pulse Generator 353
Status light 15
About 15
Status Light 292
Replace 292
Switched mode power supply 325327
Diagnostics 326
Replacement 327

T
Test Pattern 195
Convergence 195
Tools 216
Top cover 99, 103
Install 103
Remove 99
Touch panel 307308, 310, 312
Install 310
Introduction 308
Position 312
Touch panel software update 297
Troubleshooting 2930, 90, 355
Checklist 30
Log files 90
SPG 355

U
Unpacking 157
3D color wheel 157
UV blocker 138, 396
Clean 138
Cleaning 396

V
Vertical Shift 253
Stepper motor 253
Lens holder 253

R5905014 DP2K-15C/DP2K-20C/DP2K-18CX 25/02/2015